assam power distribution company ltd. lower assam … · general requirements 30 – 34 (1) quality...

CGM CGM(D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32 of 282

ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LTD.

LOWER ASSAM REGION BID DOCUMENT

FOR CONSTRUCTION OF 33/11KV, 2X2.5MVA SUB STATION AT CIT COMPLEX, KOKRAJHAR FOR POWER

SUPPLY TO THE CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, KOKRAJHAR UNDER KOKRAJHAR

ELECTRICAL SUB DIVISION OF KOKRAJHAR ELECTRICAL CIRCLE UNDER DEPOSIT SCHEME ON FULL

“TURNKEY”MODE.

SCHEME: “DEPOSIT SCHEME”

NIT No: CGM (D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/ D-32


INDEX

Section Item

Sl. No Particulars Page Nos.

1

NOTICE INVITING TENDER 3 – 6

(1) Tender Notice 4

(2) Details of Tender Notice 5 – 6

2

TENDER INVITING PROPOSAL 7 – 19

(1) Tender inviting proposal with terms &conditions 7 – 14

(2) Tender Format Part – I (Techno Commercial Bid) 15 – 16

(3) List of ongoing project (s) 17

(4) Financial Situation 18

(5) Annual Turn Over / Financial Resources 18 – 19

(6) Abstract of Techno commercial bid 19

3

BILL OF QUANTITY & PRICE BIDDING SCHEDULE FORMAT 20 – 29

(1) Bill of Quantity 21 – 24

(2) Price Bidding Format 25 – 29

4

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 30 – 34

(1) Quality Assurance Plan 30 – 31

(2) Inspection 32

(3) Additional Test 32 -34

5

FORMS OF BID 35 – 46

(1) Proforma of Bank Guarantee for Bid Guarantee / Security 36

(2) Proforma of Bank Guarantee for Contract Performance 37 – 38

(3) Proforma for Bank Guarantee Extension 39

(4) Proforma for Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment 40-41

(5) Proforma of Agreement 42 – 44

(6) Form of Power of Attorney for Joint Venture 45 - 46

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 47 – 225

7 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 226 -265

8 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY & ERECTION OF APDCL 266-281

9 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 282


SECTION :1

NOTICE INVITING TENDER


ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION CO. LTD Lower Assam Region

SHORT E-TENDER NOTICE

NIT No: CGM (D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32

E-tenders are invited for construction of 33/11KV, 2x2.5MVA Sub Station at CIT Complex, Kokrajhar

for power supply to the Central Institute of Technology, Kokrajhar under Kokrajhar Electrical Sub

Division of Kokrajhar Electrical Circle under deposit scheme on FULL “TURNKEY” mode.

KEY Dates:

Tender download start date : 11.00 Hrs 31-05-2018

Pre-Bid meeting date& time : 11.30 Hrs on 04-06-2018

Bid submission start date & time : 13.00 Hrs on 05-06-2018

Bid Submission End date &time : 16.00Hrs on 11-06-2018

Technical Bid opening date &time : 13.00Hrs on 12-06-2018

For details please visit www.apdcl.org & https://www.assamtenders.gov.in

Chief General Manager (D), APDCL (LAR),Bijulee Bhawan (5th Flr.)

Paltanbazar, Guwahati-781001

Memo No.CGM (D)/ APDCL(LAR)/CIT/DEPOSIT/2017-18/ Date:

Copy to: -

1. The PS to Chairman, APDCL, Bijulee Bhawan, Guwahati-1, for kind appraisal of the Chairman.

2. The PS to MD, APDCL, Bijulee Bhawan, Guwahati-1 for kind appraisal of the MD.

3. The GM, Bongaigaon Zone, APDCL (LAR), Bongaigaon - for information.

4. The CEO, Kokrajhar El. Circle, APDCL (LAR), Kokrajhar - for information.

5. The PRO, APDCL, Bijiulee Bhawan, Paltan Bazar, Guwahati-1, for publication of the above NIT in

one issue of “The Assam Tribune” and one in vernacular daily.

6. The OSD to Chairman, APDCL/AEGCL/APGCL, Bijulee Bhawan, Guwahati-1, for uploading the

above Notice in the APDCL’s Website.

7. The AGM, Kokrajhar El. Division, APDCL (LAR), Kokrajhar - for information.

8. The SDE, Kokrajhar El. Sub division, APDCL (LAR), Kokrajhar - for information.

Chief General Manager (D),

APDCL (LAR)


ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED.

(LOWER ASSAM REGION) NIT No: CGM(D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32

E-tenders are invited from the experienced Contractors/Firms having valid electrical contractor license up to 33KV, issued by

the competent authority of Govt. of Assam, subject to the electrical supervisors certificate of competency and workman permit

&having sufficient experience of construction of 33/11KV Sub Station in last 5 years for the Package in the State of Assam for

the following works under Deposit Scheme on ―Turnkey‖ mode.

Name of the Work :

C CONSTRUCTION OF 33/11KV, 2X2.5MVA SUB STATION AT CIT COMPLEX, KOKRAJHAR FOR POWER SUPPLY TO THE

CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, KOKRAJHAR UNDER KOKRAJHAR ELECTRICAL SUB DIVISION OF KOKRAJHAR

ELECTRICAL CIRCLE UNDER DEPOSIT SCHEME ON FULL “TURNKEY” MODE.

. The entire work will be executed as per direction of field Engineers of APDCL.

Scheme of work: Deposit head of APDCL (LAR).

Completion period: 90 (ninety) days from the date of issue of Work Order. Parties capable of completing the work within

90 (ninety) days should only participate in the bid.

Bid Validity:

The validity of the bid shall be at least180 (one hundred eighty) days.

Earnest Money:

The earnest money for the work is Rs.3,75,000.00 (Rupees three lakh seventy five thousand) only.EMD should be

submitted along with Techno-Commercial bid in the form of A/C payee Demand Draft/Fixed Deposit receipt/Bankers

Cheque/Bank Guarantee from any Nationalized Bank or scheduled bank of RBI, pledged in favour of “ASSAM

POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED‖. Any tender without EMD will be rejected outright.

Eligibility Criteria:

(1) The tenderer must have valid electrical contractors and supervisor‘s license (HT up to 33KV) from the

statutory body, Govt. of Assam.

(2) The bidder must have successfully erected and commissioned at least 1(one) no. of 33/11KV Sub Station in

last 5 years in the State of Assam as on the date of bid opening and which must be in satisfactory operation

for at least 1(one) year as on the date of bid opening. Experience & performance certificate from the

concerned Engineer not below the rank of DGM/CEO are to be furnished.

(3) The bidder must not be involved in any litigation with ASEB/APDCL or any other successor company of

ASEB. The bidder should submit a declaration to that effect.

(4) The bidder must be financially solvent so as to execute the proposed work. Financial solvency certificate from

the concerned Bank is to be submitted.

(5) The average financial turnover of the bidder in each financial year should be more than Rs 5,000,00,00.00

(five crore) for best of 3 (three) years out of five consecutive financial years for the Package and a

certificate from a Charter Accountant to that effect must be furnished along with the Techno-commercial bid of

the offer.

(6) Past & present performance of a bidder in execution of awarded work under ASEB or any of the successor

companies shall be taken into Account in deciding the eligibility of the bidder.

(7) The bidder should have adequate experience in similar nature of work and to be substantiated through

certificate issued by an Engineer not below the rank of Superintending Engineer/DGM/CEO along with

supporting copies of the works executed under any department.

Cost of Tender paper:


The complete tender papers can be downloaded from our official website www.apdcl.org and also from e-tendering portal https://www.assamtenders.gov.in. Interested bidders can download the Bidding Documents and commence preparation. Download of bidding document is free of cost. However, bidders must deposit tender participation fee of Rs. 10,000.00 (Rupees

ten thousand ) only in the form A/C payee DD/Banker‘s Cheque (which is non-refundable) duly pledged in favour of ―CGM (F&A), APDCL‖ along with their bid and provide the DD details in the web documents.

Submission of Bids:

The Techno-commercial bid must be submitted through online mode only. A copy of Technical Bid has to be submitted in sealed envelope along with the Bid Security and Cost of Bid document super scribing the following on the covers: (i) Name of bidder with full address (II) NIT No. (III) Name of the bid i.e. ―Techno-commercial bid with Earnest Money‖ for envelope containing Technical bid addressed to Chief General Manager (D), APDCL (LAR), Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati-1. The tender (bid) will be received up to 16:00 Hrs on 11-06-2018.

The bids are to be submitted to the O/O the Chief General Manager (D), APDCL (LAR), Bijulee Bhawan,5th floor, Paltanbazar, Guwahati-781001. The Technical bid will be opened on 13.00Hrs on 12-06-2018. Intending tenderers or their representative may be present at

the time of bid opening. The price bids of the eligible bidders will be opened on asubsequent date to be notified later. The company reserves the right to accept or reject any tender in part or in full or split the work without assigning any reasons thereof.


APDCL (LAR), Bijulee Bhawan, 5th

floor,

Paltanbazar, Guwahati-781001.

Memo No.CGM (D)/ APDCL(LAR)/CIT/DEPOSIT/17-18/ Date:

Copy to:-

1. The MD, APDCL, Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati - 781001, for favour of information.

2. The Public Relation Officer, APDCL/AEGCL/APGCL, 4th

floor, Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati-781001.

3. The General Manager, Bongaigaon Zone, APDCL (LAR), Bongaigaon-for information

4. The Chief Executive Officer, Kokrajhar Elect. Circle, APDCL (LAR), Kokrajhar - for information.

5. Concerned File.


APDCL (LAR).

http://www.apdcl.org/

https://www.assamtenders.gov.in/


SECTION: 2

TENDER INVITING PROPOSAL


ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION CO. LTD (LOWER ASSAM REGION)

TENDER INVITING PROPOSALS WITH TERMS & CONDITIONS FOR

Intent of the Tender Enquiry The intent of the Tender Enquiry is to invite proposals from the prospective and relevantly experienced and financially

sound contractor(s) (individual or joint venture)/firms to carry out the works as mentioned above on turnkey mode.

1. Scope of Work

The various activities under the scope of work shall among other related aspects cover the following.

i. Procurement and supply of those materials as specified for the Turn Key Contractor for the work.

ii. Arrange inspection / testing of any/all items ordered at manufacturer‘s works for officer deputed by APDCL for such

inspection/testing.

iii. Site unloading, storage and handling of all materials supplied including watch and ward for safe custody.

iv. Site fabrication work as per requirement.

v. Submission of implementation schedule from the date of award of contract for: -

Route survey for laying new line.

Erection, testing installation and commissioning of all materials/equipment supplied by Turn Key Contractor &

APDCL

vi. Project management and site organization.

vii. Obtaining clearance from Statutory Agencies, Government Departments, Village Panchayats etc. wherever necessary

viii. Submission of technical specification/Test Certificate/Drawings/ GTPs etc. of all materials supplied.

ix. A list of various items normally involved in proposed type of work is provided in this document. This, however, is not to

be considered as limiting but only typical. Vendors‘ scope will include all other items and materials as may be required

to effectively complete the work.

x. Mapping of electric works awarded at all voltage levels on Geographical Information System (GIS).

Above all, the scope of work of the vendor/contractor will include all items and facilities as may be necessary to

complete the work on turnkey basis and as binding requirement.

2. Basic specification of the various equipment/ works to be supplied /carried out.

i. All equipment/materials supplied shall conform to the requirement of relevant ISS (BIS) as approved by ASEB or its successor

Company and that of APDCL specification and construction standards.

ii. All materials supplied shall be erected, protected as per approved standard practice for proposed type of electrical work so as to

supply the electricity to the consumers most effectively and in an intrinsically safe manner.

iii. All equipment supplied and installed shall provide easy and effective:

Maintainability

Reliability

Availability

Long life

All equipment supplied and installed shall be provided with stable and adequate weather protection, system earthling etc. LA should

be earthed separately.

iv. All items, which may require frequent opening up/ dismantling for maintenance, shall be adequately sealed against any tampering/

theft etc.

v. General supply and erection of materials and system shall meet the requirement of construction standard being followed in the

electrification work.

vi. All materials shall be supplied from the latest vendor list of APDCL issued by the CGM( PP&D),APDCL

3. Basic qualifying requirement:

To be qualified for the package the bidder must compulsorily meet the following minimum criteria

A. Technical.

The prospective bidder must fulfill the following qualifying requirements.

a. The bidder must have valid electrical Contractor‘s and Supervisor‘s License (HT) issued by the Licensing

Authority of Govt. Of Assam.

b. The bidder must have successfully erected and commissioned at least 1(one) no. of 33/11KV Sub Station in

last 5 years as on date of bid opening and which must be in satisfactory operation for at least 1(one) year as

on the date of bid opening in the State of Assam. Experience & performance certificate from the concerned

Engineer not below the rank of DGM/CEO are to be furnished.

c. The bidder shall furnish details of the work / works along with its value already in hand either of APDCL, or in

any other successor companies of ASEB along with date of completion as per Letter of Award and likely date

of completion duly certified by the competent authority as per format enclosed as Annexure-I(A). This shall


be treated as one of the major qualifying criteria for technical evaluation of the bid. The bidder must also fill

up the format as per Annexure-I (B), I(C), I (D).

B. Financial

a. Average annual turnover of the bidder for the last three consecutive financial years should be as per NIT and

the annual turnover must be certified by a registered Chartered Accountant. This should be supported by the

copy of the income tax return submitted by the firm for the last three previous years. In case of joint venture

firms, the figures of average annual turnovers for each Joint Venture partners shall be added together to

determine the bidder‘s compliance with the minimum average turnover requirement for the bid. However, the

lead partner must meet at least 40% and each of the other partners must meet at least 25% of the minimum

average annual turnovers criteria required for the bid.

If any bidder for certain valid reason did not undertake sufficient work in the previous three years, then

APDCL, if satisfied with the reasons, may take into account the financial turn over & experience of best of

three years out of previous five consecutive years. b. If the total work in hand against the works of APDCL or any successor companies of ASEB and other

agencies exceed more than 3(three) times the average annual turnover of the bidder, the bid shall be

treated as non-responsive.

c. The bidder shall furnish latest GST Registration certificate, Employee - Provident Fund and valid Labour

License (wherever applicable).

d. The bidder shall furnish copy of their Pan Card. The card must be in the name of the firm if the bidder is a

firm. If it is a joint venture copy of Pan Card of both the partner must be submitted.

e. Joint venture agreement should be a registered one or certified by Notary.

f. Power of attorney should be a registered one.

g. Formal authority, Registered / Notarized for signing the tender or other documents on behalf of the

firm / individual must be submitted along with the bid. In case of registered company Board‟s

resolution of the company for authorized signatory should be furnished.

h. Notwithstanding anything stated herein above, APDCL reserves the right to assess the capacity and

capability of the bidder to execute the work, should the circumstance warrant such assessment in the overall

interest of APDCL

4. Joint Venture Requirement

i. The Bid and, in case of successful Bid, the form of agreement shall be signed so as to be legally binding both

the partners.

ii. One of the partners shall be authorized to be as the lead partner and this authorization shall be evidenced by

submitting a Power of Attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of the partners. Also the lead partner

must have valid electrical Contractor‘s and Supervisor‘s License (HT) issued by the Licensing Authority of

Govt. Of Assam

iii. The lead partner shall be authorized to incur liabilities, receive payments and receive instructions for and on

behalf of any or all partners of the joint venture and the entire execution of the contract.

iv. All the partners of the joint venture shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the contract in

accordance with the contract terms and a relevant statement to this effect shall be included in the authorization

mentioned under (ii) above as well as in the bid form and the form of agreement (in case of successful bidder).

v. A copy of the agreement entered into by the joint venture partners shall be submitted with the bid.

vi. The figure of average annual turnovers for the joint venture partners shall be added together to determine the

bidder‘s compliance with the minimum average turnover requirement for the package. However, the lead

partner must meet at least 40% and other partner must meet the at least 25% of the minimum average annual

turnover criteria given in the Tender.

vii. The bidder must fill up Financial format as per FIN-I, FIN-II, FIN-III

5. Other requirements:

The Bidder

i) Should be acquainted himself / herself / themselves with relevant conditions of the local geography and socio

economic setup of the different location of the State and being capable accordingly to mobilize, organize and

expedite the activities.


ii) Should have adequate working personnel comprising of Electrical/ Mechanical engineers, electrical

supervisor, skilled and unskilled labour to be deputed to the proposed assignment.

iii) Should be conversant with the code/ standards applicable to proposed type of work. ISS / APDCL guidelines.

6. Submission of bid

The bidder shall submit the bid in e-tendering portal https://www.assamtenders.gov.in using their own

Digital Signature Certificate.

Techno-commercial bid

Techno-commercialbid should be submitted in online mode. However, a copy of the submitted bid has

to be submitted in a sealed envelope, superscripting ―Techno-commercial bid with EMD‖ with name of bidder, full

address and NIT reference, Name of Package and under this shall include defined vendors scope of work,

responsibilities, guarantees, specification of equipment, commercial terms and conditions, vendor‘s company

credentials, experience of similar assignments, registration details, etc. as per requirement. Bidding format for

techno-commercial Bid is enclosed as Annexure-I (A).

a. Earnest Money Deposit (EMD):

The Tender must be accompanied with earnest money as mentioned in the NIT against the work, to be

deposited in the form of Bank Guarantee (BG) of Nationalized Bank/ Bank Call Deposit/ Term Deposit pledged in

favour of “ASSAM POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED”. The EMD should be submitted along with

Techno- Commercial bid. The earnest money will be released to the unsuccessful bidders on finalization of the

tenders. The EMD to the successful bidder will be released on submission of performance Security Deposit at the

time of execution of the agreement as per clause 14

Submission of documents with technical bids.

i) Detail list of makes and materials offered with catalogues, technical specification ,type tests certificate ,

performance certificate from utilities, authorization letter from manufacturer, customer list etc.

ii) Certificates and testimonials in support of credentials of the bidder‘s organization.

iii) Details of past experience along with present works in hand with awarded amount and progress report.

iv) Brief write-up on methodology to carry out the assignment, if awarded.

v) Details of manpower to be engaged for the assignments.

vi) Any other information, the vendor may feel facilitative in evaluating the bid.

vii) Copies of bidder and supervisor‘s license, etc.

viii) Certificate from Registered Charted Accountant in support of Annual turn over

ix) Solvency certificate from Bank

x) Certificate in support of performance of the bidder

xi) If the bidder is involved in any litigation with ASEB/ or any successor company of ASEB. The bidder should

furnish the information to that effect.

xii) The bidder should submit the list of materials that are to be brought from outside the state

xiii) GTP‘S of major items as described in BOQ. Such as poles, conductors, insulators, surge arrestor, D.O,GOAB

Stay Set, Earth pipe etc as per bid requirements should invariably be submitted along with the tender

otherwise tender is liable to be rejected .

b. Price Bid

Price bid should be submitted online only in the prescribed format. The bidding format for price Bid is

enclosed as Annexure-II (A).

c. Submission of bid

Techno-commercial bid should be submitted online. However, a copy of the submitted bid has to be submitted

in a sealed envelope and addressed to CGM (D), APDCL (LAR), Bijulee Bhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati-1.

Note:-:

a. If there is discrepancy between the unit price and the total price that is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the

unit price shall prevail and total price should be corrected. If there is a discrepancy between the words and figures, the amount

in word should prevail. If the bidder does not accept the correction of the errors as above, his bid will be rejected and the

amount of bid guarantee/security will be forfeited.

b. No separate declaration offering discount on price will be allowed. Offered price in the price schedule will be final.

c. All taxes whichever are applicable shall be included in the tender price and no claim of any account of any of the

above shall be entertained by APDCL.

https://www.assamtenders.gov.in/


7. Estimation of material requirement: The total quantity of materials required is indicated in the BOQ a. Quantity Variation: There may increase or decrease in quantity of individual item subject to the condition that

the corresponding change in total contract value does not increase or decrease by more than 10% keeping the

unit rate of individual material and labour unchanged.

b. A maximum of 5% wastage/damage on dismantled items shall be allowed on the total quantity dismantled

and deposited to departmental store against conversion works if any.

8. Award of work:

i) The evaluation of bids will be carried out, first of techno-commercial bid and thereafter opening the price bid of

only those who qualify and meet the technical requirement.

ii) Company reserves the right not to order/ award the job to the price-wise lowest party if the party during

evaluation is found technically non responsive.

iii) Work should be started within fifteen 15 (fifteen) days from the date of issue of the work order, failing which

order will be cancelled without further correspondence.

iv) The successful bidder must have to complete survey works within 2(two) days from date of issue of LOI &

submit quantity variation within that period.

v) The Sub-station equipments installed shall be under custody of the contractor till the date of commissioning and

charging. The properties will be taken over by APDCL, LAR after satisfactory commissioning and charging.

9. Period of completion: 90 (ninety) days from the date of issue of LOA.

10. Implementation schedule:

Comprehensive implementation schedule of work for the mentioned works

Sl

no. Description

EXECUTION PERIOD

3days

2days

15 d

ays

30 d

ays

30days

10days

1 Signing of Agreement

2 Survey works

3 Manufacture & supply of materials

4 Erection of equipments

5 Testing & commissioning

11. Terms of Payment:

a) During the currency of the contract, maximum of 2(two) nos. of progressive payment on the actual work done

(i.e. supply +erection of the particular one item) can be made against the claims preferred by the contractor

subject to 80% of the claimed amount. 20% will be retained as security deposit which will be released along

with final bill on satisfactory completion including commissioning.

All payment shall be made from the office of the CGM (F &A), APDCL on recommendation of the CGM (D),

APDCL, LAR after due verification by the concerned SDE and duly passed by the Asstt. General Manager

concerned and countersigned by the concerned CEO and on submission of work progress report (as per format

enclosed herewith). Bills whether progressive or final shall be entertained only after completion of both

supply and erection of works of specified items.

b) The right of the contractor/supplier to have payment or reimbursement of any cost for execution of works/supply of

materials as the case may be, against this order will be forfeited or deemed to have been relinquished if the claim

for it is not preferred to the appropriate authority within 6 (Six) months from the date of completion or deemed

completion as per cause No. 25.0 of Company‘s General Conditions of Supply and Erection.

12. Agreement and Security deposit

The successful bidders shall have to make an agreement with the CGM (D), APDCL, LAR and shall have to

deposit security money in the form of Bank Guarantee issued by any Nationalized Bank or scheduled bank of RBI in


Company‘s standard Performa on non-judicial stamp of appropriate value for an amount equal to 2.5 % of the contract

value at the time of execution of agreement in favour of “CGM (F&A), APDCL”. The security deposit is liable to be

forfeited in case of non-execution of contract / work order. The security deposit will be released on successful

commissioning and testing of the materials ordered and after depositing performance B/G for an amount equal to 10%

of the contract value in the form of Bank Guarantee issued by any Nationalized Bank or scheduled bank of RBI in

Company‘s standard Performa with a validity of 18(eighteen) months beyond the completion period in favour of

“CGM (F&A), APDCL”.

a. If the contractor fails or neglects to perform any of his obligations under the contract within the guarantee period,

APDCL shall have the right to forfeit the BG submitted against performance either in full or in part at its absolute

discretion.

b. No interest shall be payable on such deposits.

All Bank Guarantees (BG) submitted along with the bid or to be submitted later should be from those branches of

nationalized or scheduled Bank of RBI having their regional offices in Assam or at least a branch office at Guwahati (In

case of those, whose regional office is not located in the state of Assam) with a certificate from the Bank to the effect

that the verification or any confirmation in regard to the BG issued by the bank can be taken up with the Branch office

at Guwahati..

13. Project Management and site Organizations:

In Consideration of the tight schedule of the project, the successful bidder(s) /Contractor(s) shall exercise systematic

closely controlled project management system with the aid of commonly used soft tools. Following are the major

activities/deliverables to be organized /generated for submission to the Board.

(I) Liaison/Construction offices will be established in each Circle of APDCL, LAR.

(II) Work Progress Report:

Progress monitoring by the contractor as per implementation schedule and approved milestones.

Fortnightly progress report will be submitted to the concern Deputy General Manager, Asstt. General

Manager & Sub-Divisional Engineers.

The progress report will highlight the points like, work completion vis-à-vis planned, plan for next working

period, delay analysis vis-à-vis committed schedule with reasons and remedies, etc.

(III) Site Organization.

The vendor at each working site shall establish the following.

Store house

Site fabrication facilities

Construction supervision office

All offices shall be adequately furnished and staffed so as to take all site decisions independently without frequent

references to head Work‘s/offices.

14. Guarantees and Penalties

a) Liquidated Damages (LD) The proposed work is on top priority of Department of Science &Technology,

Government of India and therefore has to be completed within stipulated/agreed schedule. Any delay beyond that

will attract penalty as per Company‘s General condition of supply and erection.

b) Equipment and system supplied & installed shall be guaranteed individually for integrated operations for a period

of 18 (Eighteen) months from date of commissioning of a system in general.

c) Warranty from the manufacturer shall be produced along with manufacturer‘s test certificate for all equipment/

materials covered under Manufacturer‘s warranty.

15. Approvals/Clearances:

1. APDCL, concerned DGM shall approve all site/location and documents prepared by the contractor for construction

of the S/S.

2. GTP and drawings of all equipment/ materials shall be submitted to the CGM (D), APDCL, LAR, for approval from

the concerned authority.


3. The contractor shall obtain all statutory approvals and clearances from the statutory authorities before charging

the system at his/her own cost.

16. Testing & Inspection:

All the equipments / materials to be supplied and erected shall be tested /inspected at manufacturer‘s works by authorized

officer/ Engineers of APDCL before dispatching them to worksite. The contractor shall intimate the CEO, Kokrajhar

Electrical Circle, APDCL, LAR sufficiently in advance regarding the date of inspection of materials/equipments at

manufacturer‘s works. The materials are to be dispatched to site only after receipt of dispatch clearance to be issued by

the CEO, Kokrajhar Electrical Circle for works under his control after satisfactory testing of the same. The materials

&equipments to be supplied should be from the vendors as per the preferred Vendors‟ list of APDCL.

17. Environmental Considerations:

While carrying out the assignment, no damage to environment /forests will be caused by the contractor. If so done, the

contractor will have to compensate the same to the satisfaction of the concerned Authority.

18. Submission of documents.

a) With bids. -----As per clause 7c

b) During project execution

i) All documents for approval shall be submitted in 6 copies.

ii) All final documents to be submitted to statutory organizations will be furnished as per requirement of the

Authority.

19. Funding of the project. The proposed work is funded by deposit head of APDCL (LAR).

20. Ceiling on acceptance of bid value

As a deterrent for cartel formation APDCL at its discretion have the right to scrap the tender if values quoted by all the

bidders is above 25% of the estimated cost. Also the price bids whose total quoted value is below 15% of the

estimated cost, the bid is liable to be rejected by APDCL

21. Termination of contract on Contractor‟s default

If the Contractor shall neglect to execute the Works with due diligence and expertise or shall refuse or neglect to

comply with any reasonable order given to him, in the Contract by the Engineer in connection with the works or shall

contravene the provisions of the Contract, the owner may give notice in writing to the contractor to make good the

failure, neglect or contravention complained of. Should the contractor fail to comply with the notice within fifteen (15)

days from the date of serving the notice, then and in such case the Owner shall be at liberty to employ other workmen

and forthwith execute such part of the works as the Contractor, may have neglected to do or if the owner shall think fit,

without prejudice to any other right he may have under the Contract to take the work wholly or in part out of the

contractor‘s hands and re-contract with any other person or persons to complete the works or any part thereof and in

that event the Owner shall have free use of all Contractor‘s equipment that may have been at the time on the site in

connection with the works without being responsible to the Contractor for fair wear and tear thereof and to the

exclusion of any right of the contractor over the same, and the Owner shall be entitled to retain and apply any balance

which may otherwise be due on the Contract by him to the contractor, or such part thereof as may be necessary, to the

payment of the cost of executing the said part of the work or of completing the Works as the case may be. If the cost of

completing of Works or executing a part thereof as aforesaid shall exceed the balance due to the contractor, the

contractor shall pay such excess. Such payment of excess amount shall be independent of the liquidated damages for

delay which the contractor shall have to pay if the completion of works‘ is delayed.

In addition, such action by the Owner as aforesaid shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability to pay liquidated

damages for delay in completion of works as defined in clause no.26 of GCSE

Such action by the Owner as aforesaid, the termination of the Contract under this clause shall neither entitle the

contractor to reduce the value of the contract Performance Guarantee nor the time thereof. The contract Performance

Guarantee shall be valid for the full value and for the full period of the contract including guarantee period.

22. Termination of contract on owners‟ initiative

The Owner reserves the right to terminate the Contract either in part or in full due to reasons other than those

mentioned under clause entitled ―Contractor‘s Default.‖ The Owner shall in such an event give f ifteen (15) days notice

in writing to the Contractor of his decision to do so.

The Contractor upon receipt of such notice shall discontinue the work on the date and to the extent specified in the

notice, make all reasonable efforts to obtain cancellation of all orders and contracts to the extent they are related to the


work terminated and terms satisfactory to the Owner, stop all further sub-contracting or purchasing activity related to

the work terminated, and assist the Owner in maintenance, protection, and disposition of the Works acquired under the

Contract by the Owner.

In the event of such a termination, .the Contractor shall be paid compensation, equitable and reasonable, dictated by

the circumstances prevalent at the time of termination.

If the Contractor is an individual or a proprietary concern and the individual or the proprietor dies and if the contractor

is a partnership concern and one of the partners dies then unless the Owner is satisfied that the legal representatives

of the individual contractor or of the proprietor of propriety concern and in the case of partnership, the surviving

partners, are capable of carrying out and completing the Contract, the Owner shall be entitled to cancel the Contract

as to its uncompleted part without being in any way liable to payment of any compensation to the estate of deceased

Contractor and/or to surviving partners of the contractor‘s firm on account of the cancellation of the contract. The

decision of the owner that the legal representatives of the deceased contractor or surviving partners of the contractor‘s

firm cannot carry out and complete the contract shall be final and binding on the parties. In the event of such

cancellation, the Owner shall not hold the estate of the deceased Contractor and/or the surviving partner of the

Contractor‘s firm liable to. Damages for not completing the Contract

23. Frustration of contract

In the event of frustration of the contract of supervening impossibility in items of Section 56 of the Indian Contract Act,

parties shall be absolved of their responsibility to perform the balance portion of the contract.

In the event of non-availability or suspension of funds for any reasons whatsoever (except for reason of willful or

flagrant breach by the Owner and/or contractor) then the Works under the contract shall be suspended. Furthermore, if

the Owner is unable to make satisfactory alternative arrangements for financing to the contractor in accordance with

the terms of the Contract within three months of the event, the parties hereto shall be relieved from carrying out further

obligations under the Contract treating it as frustration of the Contract. In the event Performance Bank Guarantee, the

parties shall mutually discuss to arrive at reasonable on all issues including amounts due to either party for the work

already done on ―Quantum merit‖ basis which shall be determined by mutual agreement between the parties.

24. Disclaimer:

While the Company will make every endeavor to extend necessary facilitation in expediting the work, the contractor

shall be responsible to organize and arrange all necessary inputs right from mobilization activities up to completion of

the project. Company will not entertain any failure / delay on such accounts. Also, Company will not be responsible for

any compensation, replenishment, damage, theft etc. as may be caused due to negligent working, insufficient

coordination with Government / non Government / Local Authority by the contractor and/ or his personnel deputed for

work. The contractor shall take necessary insurance coverage under LIC/GIC. etc. for his working personnel and the

goods in store as well as in transit. The contractor will be deemed to have made him acquainted with the local working

conditions at site(s) and fully provide for into the bid submitted.

25. If for any reason the last date of receiving and opening of tender or the date of pre-bid discussion is a declared holiday

the next working day will be considered for receiving and opening of bid or pre bid discussion.

26. In case any clause mentioned in the bid document contradicts or differ any clause of the APDCL‘s General condition of

Supply and Erection the clauses appended in this document will prevail.

27. The intending bidders are requested to physically survey the location of the line and Sub-Station. The BOQ shown in

the bid document are only indicative and in case the bidder feel that some additional item are required to complete the

work in totality they may indicate the same separately with unit rate along with the price bid but in a separate sheet.

The evaluation of the bid shall however be done on the basis of materials stated in the BOQ of the bid. Also Before

submitting the tender the bidder should have discussion with concerned Sub-divisional Engineer /Asstt. General

Manager of APDCL.

28. The quantity mentioned in the bill of quantity (BOQ) and price bidding schedule are purely provisional and shall be

finalized on completion of detailed survey work and submission of bill of materials thereof subject to quantity variation

clause mentioned in clause 8

Terms and conditions, which are not specified, herein above will be governed by Company‟s General Conditions of supply and erection in force.


Annexure –I(A)

Tender Format part – I (Techno-commercial Bid)

NIT No: CGM(D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32

1. Name and full address of the Bidder. :

2. Particulars of payment made for Purchase of

Tender document in the shape of . :

3. Amount of earnest money paid in the shape of :

4. GST Registration. No :

5. Acceptance of guarantee clause of :

Materials /equipment and system

Installed individually and for integrated

Operation.

6. Acceptance of penalty clause :

7. Acceptance of terms of payment :

8. Certificate/ documents regarding adequate :

Experience of doing similar job

9. Details of work presently in hand with amount :

(Awarded by APDCL and other successor

Companies of ASEB)- a separate sheet if

Required may be enclosed.

10. Details of manpower and T&Ps including :

Vehicles available with the firm to be

enclosed separately.

11. List of documents enclosed :

.

a) ….

b) ….

c) ….

Signature with full name

and designation of bidder or

his/her authorized representative

with seal


Annexure-I(B)

Sl.

No. Qualification Requirement

Furnished

at

Annexure

Page Remark

A LEGAL

1 Document in support of legal status of firm

2 Memorandum of Association &Registered/Notarized Joint venture Agreement if JV

3 Registered/Notarized power of attorney of the signatory of the Bidder to participate

in the Bid.

4 Board resolution of the company to authorizing the signatory

5 Information regarding any litigation, current or during the last five years, in which the

Bidder is involved, the parties concerned, and disputed amount

6 Valid Electrical Contractor‘s License

7 Valid Electrical & Supervisory License

8 GST registration certificate

9 Provident Fund Registration Certificate

10. Valid Labour license

B Financial

1 Audited Balance sheet, Profit & Loss account, Auditor‘s report for last three year

2 CA Certified Turnover of bidder during the last 3(three) years.

3 Evidence of adequacy of working capital for this contract (access to line (s) of credit

and availability of other financial resources)

4 Authority to seek references from the Bidder's Bankers

5 Income Tax return for last 3(three) years

6 Value of similar work performed by the bidder in each of the last five years –

Statement

7 Proposals for subcontracting components of the Works amounting to more than 10

percent of the Contract Price

8 Details of the Bank Guarantee as EMD(BG/TD/Bank Call Deposit)

C Technical ability and experience

1

Experience in works of a similar nature and volume for each of the last 5(five) years

and details of works under way or contractually committed including full address of

client for communication- Statement

2

Certificates issued by an Engineer not below the Cadre of Deputy General

Manager/SE along with supporting photo-copies of agreements for the works

executed in any one year (12 months)

3 Detailed activity plan and methodology supported with layout and necessary

drawings and calculations (detailed) to allow the employer to review their proposals.

4 Quality Assurance plan with Bar Chart

5 List of technical personnel and their qualification and experience with organization

chart

6 Proof of availability of the tools, tackles, spare parts, etc. for carrying out the works.

D Technical particulars of equipments and Materials offered in the Bill of

Material and their GTPs


ANNEXURE- I(C)

LIST OF ONGOING & COMPLETED PROJECTS

List of ongoing & completed projects of APDCL & Other successor companies of ASEB

Sl.No

.

Name of the

work Order No Contract value Scheme

Stipulated date of

completion Present Status

11

1

2

3

Annexure- I(D)

BIDDER‟S INFORMATION SHEET:

Bidder‟s Information

Bidder‟s legal name

In case of JV, legal name of each

partner

Bidder‟s country of

constitution

Bidder‟s year of constitution

Bidder‟s legal address in

country of constitution

Bidder‟s authorized

representative

(name, address, telephone

numbers, fax numbers, e-mail

address)

Attached are copies of the following original documents.


FINANCIAL SITUATION (FIN-1)

Each bidders or member of JV must fill in this form

Financial Data for Previous 3 Years [Rs in lakhs]

Year 1: Year 2: Year 3:

Information from Balance Sheet

Total Assets

Total Liabilities

Net Worth

Current Assets

Current Liabilities

Information from Income Statement

Total Revenues

Profits Before Taxes

Profits After Taxes

Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets including all related notes, and income statements) for the last three years, as

indicated above, complying with the following conditions

Form FIN - II: Average Annual Turnover

Each Bidder or member of a JV must fill in this form

Annual Turnover Data for the Last 3 Years

Year Amount (Rs. In lakhs)

Average Annual Turnover

The information supplied should be the Annual Turnover of the Bidder or each member of a JV in terms of the amounts billed

to clients for each year for contracts in progress or completed in ₹ (Rupees).


Form FIN – III: Financial Resources

Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credit, and

other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flow demands of

the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section 3 (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)

Financial Resources

No. Source of financing Amount (Rs. In lakhs)

1

2

3

4

ABSTRACT OF TECHNO COMMERCIAL INFORMATION

NIT NO. CGM(D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32

Name of the Bidder _____________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________

Sl.

No. Particulars Document submitted

Page No. / Sheet

No. of the Bid

Document

1 Payment against purchase of Bid Document DD / BC No. etc.

2 Earnest Money Details BG / DD No, Issuing Bank , Date

etc.

3 Contractor’s License License No. with validity

4 Supervisor’s Certificate Name, No. with validity

5 No Litigation Certificate Declaration

6 Solvency Certificate from Bank Photocopy to be attached

7 Avg. Annual Turn Over Certificate from CA Photocopy to be attached

8 Experience Certificate Photocopy to be attached

9 Works undergoing / in hand Details to be attached

10 Manpower and T&P Details to be attached

11 GTP Details to be attached

________________________

Signature of the Bidder

Name :

Mobile / Fax / email ID :


SECTION: 3

BILL OF QUANTITIES

&

PRICE BIDDING SCHEDULE


BILL OF QUANTITY WORK

CONSTRUCTION OF 33/11KV, 2X2.5MVA SUB STATION AT CIT COMPLEX, KOKRAJHAR FOR POWER

SUPPLY TO THE CENTRAL INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, KOKRAJHAR UNDER KOKRAJHAR

ELECTRICAL SUB DIVISION OF KOKRAJHAR ELECTRICAL CIRCLE UNDER DEPOSIT SCHEME ON FULL

“TURNKEY” MODE..

Bill of Quantity

Sl. No

List of Materials Unit Total Qty required

1 33KV, 10KA LA, Station type with GI mounting Structure (at main 33KV incomer line)

Set 3

2 33KV Isolator with earth switch, 800A,with GI mounting Structure (at main 33KV incomer line)

Set 1

3 33KV VCB with GI mounting Structure (at main 33KV incomer line 2nos.)

Set 3

4 33KV CT (outdoor type) (CT Ratio, 400-200/5-5-5A) with terminal connectors and all accessories, mounting structure & marshalling box (at main 33KV incomer line)

Set 1

5 33KV CT (outdoor type) (CT Ratio, 200-100/5-5-5A) with terminal connectors and all accessories, mounting structure & marshalling box (for Transformer incomer)

Set 2

6 33KV Isolator, 800A without Earth switch but with GI Mounting structure (for the 33KV VCBs)

Set 8

7 33KV PT outdoor type with terminal connector along with all accessories, mounting structure & marshalling box (33KV BUS PT)

Set 1

8 33/0.433KV, 100KVA DTR, 3 STAR (Delta Star) for Station Transformer

No 1

9 33KV DO fuse, 20A (fitted for protection of Station transformer) Set 1

10 DTR Cubicle for 100KVA DTRs (comprising of requisite MCCB, Static TVM, CT, V-meter, Ammeter etc)

set 1

11 LT XLPE 3.5 core, 120 Sqmm (Aluminium) ( for Station Transformer to Cubicle and control room)

MTR 100

12 33/11 KV, 2.5MVA power Transformer No 2

13 GI steel Tubular Pole, SP-66 (for 33KV Bus) No 8

14 ACSR Wolf conductor (for bus-bar conductor) Mtr 200

15 33KV polymeric Disc insulator, 90KN (for Bus-bar making) set 12


16 Tension clamp for AAAC wolf(for mounting conductor at Disc insulator)

No 36

17 PG clamp for AAAC wolf (at the transfer joint of all equipment) No 70

18 T-connector, Aluminium, wolf to wolf (to be fitted at Bus riser same as PG clamp)

No 12

19 H/W fitting for Disc insulator, B&S 90KN tension type (for Disc Insulator at Bus-bar)

No 40

20 33KV polymeric Pin insulator,(to be used at jumpering point) No 6

21 GI Ch. Cross Arm (100x50x6x Running meter) (for 33KV bus) Mtr 90

22 Lightning spike made of copper for lightning protection (to be fitted at the pole tip)

No 6

23 GI Nuts & Bolts with GI washer (assorted) Kg 140

24 GI wire, 6 SWG (for overhead lightning guard) Kg 50

25

installation of earthing system with MS flats, 50x10mm (for earthing mat) with riser 25x6mm (for earthing conductor) and GI Pipe 50mm dia. Of length 3000mm (for earth electrodes) including excavation of earth welding etc as necessary

sqmm 400

26 GI strip, 50x6mm (for equipment earthing) MTR 270

27 GI strip, 50x10mm (for PTR earthing) MTR 40

28 33KV combined CT/PT set (for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

No 1

(APDCL supply)

29 HT meter Cabinet (for metering at 33KV main incomer line) No 1

30 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 10 core (for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

MTR 12

31 33KV LA line type (for installation at CT/PT set for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

Set 1

32 33KV & 11KV (combined) relay & control panel for transformer VCB

No 2

33 33KV & 11KV (combined) relay & control panel for main incomer VCB

No 1


34 ACDB Set 1

35 DCDB Set 1

36 Battery bank of 110V, 100AH, 55 cells maintenance free battery, value regulated Lead acid

LOT 1

37 Float cum Boost type Battery Charger, 110V, 100AH Set 1

38 Switchyard lighting (complete with 6nos. Of 40W LED Bulb with structure & accessories)

LS 1

39 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 10 core (for CT connection taking 80 mtr length)

MTR 4000

40 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 2 core (for AC & DC supply to Breaker)

MTR 600

41 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 4 core (for breaker control circuit)

MTR 300


Mtr 300

43 12 KV, 9 KA LA Station type (2 set at transformer outgoing & 4set at outgoing feeder

Set 6

44 11KV Isolator with earth switch & GI mounting structure, 630A (2 sets for 11KV outgoing transformer and 4 sets for 11KV outgoing feeder)

Set 6

45 11KV Indoor VCB Panel, 7 Unit Set 1

46 11KV XLPE Cable, 3 core, 240 sqmm (Aluminium) (for transformer 11KV incomer)

MTR 200

47 11KV XLPE Cable, 3 core, 185 sqmm (Aluminium) (for 11KV outgoing feeder)

MTR 400

48 11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 240 sqmm (outdoor) (for transformer 11KV incomer)

No 2

49 11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 240 sqmm (indoor) (for transformer 11KV incomer)

No 2

50 11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 185 sqmm (outdoor) (for 11KVoutgoing feeder)

No 4

51 11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 185 sqmm (indoor) (for 11KVoutgoing feeder)

No 4


52 GI Ch Cross Arm (100x50x6x Running meter) (for 11KV bus) MTR 80

53 11KV polymeric post insulator (to support conductor to 11KV isolator)

No 12

54 GI Steel Tubular Pole, SP-60 (for 11KV Bus) No 5

55 Grouting & mufflering of steel pole as per specification (for 8nos. Of SP-66 & 5nos. Of SP-60 tubular pole)

Job 13

56 PCC foundation (1:2:4) for 33KV CT/PT/LA CuMtr 16

57 RCC foundation for Isolator (including 33KV & 11KV) Set 15

58 RCC foundation for VCB (for 3nos. Of 33KV VCB) No 3

59 Switchyard gravelling of 0.15Mtr (thickness) by 40mm size crushed stone (for 20x20mtr. Switchyard)

sqMtr 400

60 Transformer pad for station transformer complete as per specification (for the 33/0.433KV, 100KVA Station Transformer)

No 1

61 Transformer pad for 2.5MVA transformer complete as per specification

Job 2

62 Construction of cable trenches Size (950x450)mm for control cable including supply of all materials & labour as per specification & drawing

MTR 100

63 Construction of cable trenches Size (1260x650)mm for power cable including supply of all materials & labour as per specification & drawing

MTR 100


Annexure –II(A)

Tender Proforma Part-II( PRICE BID) NIT No CGM(D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32

construction of 33/11KV, 2x2.5MVA Sub Station at CIT Complex, Kokrajhar for power supply to the Central Institute of Technology, Kokrajhar under

Kokrajhar Electrical Sub Division of Kokrajhar Electrical Circle under deposit scheme on FULL “TURNKEY” mode..

Sl.

No Brief Item Description Unit Qty

Supply of materials

Erection of Materials

Total cost of

supply& erection

(including GST)

(Rs)

Unit

price

of

item

GST@18%

Total

supply

cost

(including

GST)

(Rs)

Unit Erection/

Installation

charges

(Rs)

GST@18%

Total Erection

cost (including

GST)

(Rs)

1 2 3 4 5 6=(18%x5) 7=(4x(5+6)) 8 9=(18%x8) 10=(4x(8+9)) 11=(7+10)

1

33KV, 10KA LA, Station type with GI mounting Structure (at main 33KV incomer line)

Set 3

2

33KV Isolator with earth switch, 800A,with GI mounting Structure (at main 33KV incomer line)

Set 1

3 33KV VCB with GI mounting Structure (at main 33KV incomer line 2nos.)

Set 3

4

33KV CT (outdoor type) (CT Ratio, 400-200/5-5-5A) with terminal connectors and all accessories, mounting structure & marshalling box (at main 33KV incomer line)

Set 1

5

33KV CT (outdoor type) (CT Ratio, 200-100/5-5-5A) with terminal connectors and all accessories, mounting structure & marshalling box (for Transformer incomer)

Set 2

6

33KV Isolator, 800A without Earth switch but with GI Mounting structure (for the 33KV VCBs)

Set 8

7 33KV PT outdoor type with terminal connector along with all accessories,

Set 1


mounting structure & marshalling box (33KV BUS PT)

8 33/0.433KV, 100KVA DTR, 3 STAR (Delta Star) for Station Transformer

No 1

9 33KV DO fuse, 20A (fitted for protection of Station transformer)

Set 1

10

DTR Cubicle for 100KVA DTRs (comprising of requisite MCCB, Static TVM, CT, V-meter, Ammeter etc)

set 1

11

LT XLPE 3.5 core, 120 Sqmm (Aluminium) ( for Station Transformer to Cubicle and control room)

MTR 100

12 33/11 KV, 2.5MVA power Transformer No 2

13 GI steel Tubular Pole, SP-66 (for 33KV Bus) No 8

14 ACSR Wolf conductor (for bus-bar conductor)

Mtr 200

15 33KV polymeric Disc insulator, 90KN (for Bus-bar making)

set 12

16 Tension clamp for AAAC wolf(for mounting conductor at Disc insulator)

No 36

17 PG clamp for AAAC wolf (at the transfer joint of all equipment)

No 70

18 T-connector, Aluminium, wolf to wolf (to be fitted at Bus riser same as PG clamp)

No 12

19 H/W fitting for Disc insulator, B&S 90KN tension type (for Disc Insulator at Bus-bar)

No 40

20 33KV polymeric Pin insulator,(to be used at jumpering point)

No 6

21 GI Ch. Cross Arm (100x50x6x Running meter) (for 33KV bus)

Mtr 90

22 Lightning spike made of copper for lightning protection (to be fitted at the pole tip)

No 6

23 GI Nuts & Bolts with GI washer (assorted) Kg 140

24 GI wire, 6 SWG (for overhead lightning guard)

Kg 50


25

installation of earthing system with MS flats, 50x10mm (for earthing mat) with riser 25x6mm (for earthing conductor) and GI Pipe 50mm dia. Of length 3000mm (for earth electrodes) including excavation of earth welding etc as necessary

sqmm 400

26 GI strip, 50x6mm (for equipment earthing) MTR 270

27 GI strip, 50x10mm (for PTR earthing) MTR 40

28 33KV combined CT/PT set (for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

No 1 0

29 HT meter Cabinet (for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

No 1

30 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 10 core (for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

MTR 12

31 33KV LA line type (for installation at CT/PT set for metering at 33KV main incomer line)

Set 1

32 33KV & 11KV (combined) relay & control panel for transformer VCB

No 2

33 33KV & 11KV (combined) relay & control panel for main incomer VCB

No 1

34 ACDB Set 1

35 DCDB Set 1

36

Battery bank of 110V, 100AH, 55 cells maintenance free battery, value regulated Lead acid

LOT 1

37 Float cum Boost type Battery Charger, 110V, 100AH

Set 1

38 Switchyard lighting (complete with 6nos. Of 40W LED Bulb with structure & accessories)

LS 1

39 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 10 core (for CT connection taking 80 mtr length)

MTR 4000

40 Control cable Copper, 2.5 sqmm, 2 core (for AC & DC supply to Breaker)

MTR 600


MTR 300



Mtr 300

43

12 KV, 9 KA LA Station type (2 set at transformer outgoing & 4set at outgoing feeder

Set 6

44

11KV Isolator with earth switch & GI mounting structure, 630A (2 sets for 11KV outgoing transformer and 4 sets for 11KV outgoing feeder)

Set 6

45 11KV Indoor VCB Panel, 7 Unit Set 1

46

11KV XLPE Cable, 3 core, 240 sqmm (Aluminium) (for transformer 11KV incomer)

MTR 200

47 11KV XLPE Cable, 3 core, 185 sqmm (Aluminium) (for 11KV outgoing feeder)

MTR 400

48

11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 240 sqmm (outdoor) (for transformer 11KV incomer)

No 2

49

11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 240 sqmm (indoor) (for transformer 11KV incomer)

No 2

50 11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 185 sqmm (outdoor) (for 11KVoutgoing feeder)

No 4

51 11KV Cable Kit for XLPE Cable, 3 core, 185 sqmm (indoor) (for 11KVoutgoing feeder)

No 4

52 GI Ch Cross Arm (100x50x6x Running meter) (for 11KV bus)

MTR 80

53 11KV polymeric post insulator (to support conductor to 11KV isolator)

No 12

54 GI Steel Tubular Pole, SP-60 (for 11KV Bus) No 5

55

Grouting & mufflering of steel pole as per specification (for 8nos. Of SP-66 & 5nos. Of SP-60 tubular pole)

Job 13

56 PCC foundation (1:2:4) for 33KV CT/PT/LA CuMtr 16

57 RCC foundation for Isolator (including 33KV Set 15


& 11KV)

58 RCC foundation for VCB (for 3nos. Of 33KV VCB)

No 3

59

Switchyard gravelling of 0.15Mtr (thickness) by 40mm size crushed stone (for 20x20mtr. Switchyard)

sqMtr 400

60

Transformer pad for station transformer complete as per specification (for the 33/0.433KV, 100KVA Station Transformer)

No 1

61 Transformer pad for 2.5MVA transformer complete as per specification

Job 2

62

Construction of cable trenches Size (950x450)mm for control cable including supply of all materials & labour as per specification & drawing

MTR 100

63

Construction of cable trenches Size (1260x650)mm for power cable including supply of all materials & labour as per specification & drawing

MTR 100

Total

Total Value for the Package inclusive of GST etc-:Rs. ……………………… (In words)

Signature of the bidder with seal

Name of Signatory:

Mobile No/Telephone No:

Email address:


SECTION: 4

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The bidder shall comply with the following general requirements along with other

specifications.

1.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

1.1 The bidder shall invariably furnish the following information along with his offer failing

which the offer shall be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given for

individual type of equipment offered.

i) The structure of organization

ii) The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work

iii) The system of purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials

iv) The system for ensuring quality of workmanship

v) The quality assurance arrangements shall confirm to the relevant requirement of

ISO 9001 on ISO 9002 as applicable.

vi) Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-supplies for the raw

materials, list of standards according to which the raw material are tested, list of

tests normally carried out on raw material in the presence of suppliers

representative, copies of test certificates.

vii) Information and copies of test certificates as on (i) above in respect of bought out

items t of manufacturing facilities available

viii) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists.

ix) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally

carried out for quality control and details of such test and inspection.

x) List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of equipment

specified and test plant limitation, if any vis-à-vis the type. Special acceptance and

routine tests specified in the relevant standards. These limitations shall be very

clearly brought out in "Schedule of Deviations" from the specified test requirement.

1.2 The contractor shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit the following

information to the purchaser.

i) List of the raw material as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub-

suppliers selected from those furnished along with the offer.

ii) Type test certificated of the raw material and bought out accessories if required

by the purchaser.

iii) Quality Assurance Plant (QAP) with hold points for purchasers inspection. QAP

and purchasers hold points shall be discussed between the purchaser and

contractor before the QAP is finalized.

The contractor shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out accessories and

central excise asses for raw material at the time of routine testing if required by the

purchaser and ensure that the quality assurance requirements of specification are

followed by the sub-contractor.

1.3 The Quality Assurance Programme shall give a description of the Quality System and

Quality Plans with the following details.

i) Quality System


The structure of the organization.

The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work.

The system of purchasing, taking delivery of verification of materials

The system of ensuring of quality workmanship.

The system of control of documentation.

The system of retention of records.

The arrangement of contractor internal auditing.

A list of administrator and work procedures required to achieve contractor‘s

quality requirements. These procedures shall be made readily available to

the purchaser for inspection on request.

ii) Quality Plans

An outline of the proposed work and program sequence.

The structure of contractor‘s organizations for the contract.

The duties and responsibilities ensuring quality of work.

Hold and notification points. Submission of engineering documents required

by this specification.

The inspection of the materials and components on request.

Reference to contractor‘s work procedures appropriate to each activity.

Inspection during fabrication /construction.

Final inspection and test.

2.0 Inspection

2.1 The Owner's representative or third party nominee shall at all times be entitled to have

access to the works and all places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component

parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for

unrestricted inspection of the Contractor's and sub-Contractor's works, raw materials,

manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.

2.2 The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Contractor only under packed

condition as detailed in the specification. The Owner shall select samples at random

from the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. Insulators shall normally be

offered for inspection in lots not exceeding 5000 nos. the lot should be homogeneous

and should contain insulators manufactured in the span of not more than 3-4

consecutive weeks.

2.3 The Contractor shall keep the Owner informed in advance of the time of starting and the

progress of manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements could

be made for inspection.

2.4 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been

satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the inspection is waived off by the Owner in

writing. In the latter case also the material shall be dispatched only after satisfactory

testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.

2.5 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be no way relieve the Contractor of his

responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall not prevent

subsequent rejection, if such material are later found to be defective.

3.0 Additional Tests

3.1 The Owner reserves the right of having at his own expense any other test(s) of

reasonable nature carried out at Contractor's premises, at site, or in any other place in


addition to the type, acceptance and routine tests specified in these bidding documents

against any equipments to satisfy himself that the material comply with the

Specifications.

3.2 The Owner also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this specification

at his own expense on the samples drawn from the site at Contractor's premises or at

any other test center. In case of evidence of noncompliance, it shall be binding on the

part of the Contractor to prove the compliance of the items to the technical specifications

by repeat tests or correction of deficiencies, or replacement of defective items, all

without any extra cost to the Owner.

4.0 Test Reports

4.1 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies along with one

original. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Owner only after which the

commercial production of the concerned materials shall start.

4.2 Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One copy

shall be returned duly certified by the Owner, only after which the material shall be

dispatched.

4.3 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at his works for

periodic inspection by the Owner's representative.

4.4 Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the Contractor. These

shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the Owner.

5.0 List of Drawings and Documents:

5.1 The bidder shall furnish the following along with bid.

i) Two sets of drawings showing clearly the general arrangements, fitting details,

electrical connections etc.

ii) Technical leaflets (user‘s manual) giving operating instructions.

iii) Three copies of dimensional drawings of the box for each quoted item.

The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved

drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the

purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier's risk.

Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and

liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the

specification.

5.2 The requirements of the latest revision of application standards, rules and codes of

practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering,

design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering

and purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or materials which, in his judgment

is not in full accordance therewith.

5.3 The successful Bidder shall within 2 weeks of notification of award of contract submit

three sets of final versions of all the drawings as stipulated in the purchase order for

purchaser's approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the

drawings to the supplier within two weeks. The supplier shall, if necessary, modify the


drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval. The

supplier shall within two weeks. Submit 30 prints and two good quality report copies of

the approved drawings for purchaser's use.

5.4 Eight sets of operating manuals/technical leaflets shall be supplied to each consignee for

the first instance of supply.

5.4.1 One set of routine test certificates shall accompany each dispatch consignment.

5.4.2 The acceptance test certificates in case pre-dispatch inspection or routine test certificates

in cases where inspection is' waived shall be got approved by the purchasers.

6.0 Any Item specification if not available in this document Contractor shall supply and

execute the items meeting the relevant IS specification with the approval of the

purchaser.


SECTION :5

FORMS OF BID


PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR BID GUARANTEE/SECURITY

(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act)

The non-Judicial stamp paper should be in the name of issuing bank

Ref………………………….. Bank Guarantee No…………..

Date…………………….

To

The Chief General Manager (D)

Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd (LAR)

BijuleeBhawan, Paltanbazar

Guwahati-1

Dear Sir/ Madam,

In accordance with invitation to bid under your Bid No………………. M/s………………. having its

Registered/ Head Office at ……………..( hereinafter called the ‗Bidder‘) wish to participate in the

said Bid or ………………… and you, as a special favour have agreed to accept an irrevocable

and unconditional Bank Guarantee for an amount of ……………….. validupto…………………….

On behalf of Bidder in lieu of the Bid deposit required to be made bythe bidder, as a condition

precedent for participation in the Said Bid.

We, the …………………. Bank at …………………… have our Head Office at…………..( local

address) guarantee and undertake to pay immediately on demand by , the Amount of

………………………………………………………………………………………………..( in words &

figures) without any reservation, protest, demur and recourse. Any such demand made by said

‗Owner‘ shall be conclusive andbinding on us irrespective of any dispute or difference raised by

the Bidder.

The Guarantee shall be irrevocable and shall remain valid up to and including ………….

@....................... if any further extension of this guarantee is required, the same shall be

extended to such required period ( not exceeding one year) on receiving instruction from M/s

………… … ………. on whose behalf this guarantee is issued.

In witness whereof the Bank, through its authorized office, has set its hand and stamp on this

…………… day of ………………….. 20………… at …………………………

WITNESS

……………………… …………………….

(Signature) ( Signature)

…………………….. ……………………

(Name) (Name)

……………………. ……………………

( Official Address) (Official Address)

@ This date shall be thirty (30) days after the last date for which the bid is valid.


PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR CONTRACT PERFORMANCE

(To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act)

Ref………………………….. Bank Guarantee No…………..

Date…………………….

To




Guwahati-1

Dear Sir/Madam,

In consideration of Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd., (herein after referred to as the

‗Owner‘ which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof include its

successors, administrators and assigns) having awarded to

M/s…………………………………….with registered/ Head office at ……………….( hereinafter

referred to as ― Contractor‖ which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning

thereof include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns), a Contract by issued of

Owner‘s Letter of Award No…………… dated……………….. and the same having been

acknowledged by the contractor, resulting in a contract bearing No…………….. dated contractor

having agreed to provide a Contract Performance Guarantee for the faithful performance of the

entire Contract equivalent to……………… being(%) (percent *) of the said value Contract to the

Owner.

We………………………………………………………………………………………….. (Name &

Address) having its Head Office at …………………( hereinafter referred to as the ― Bank‖ , which

expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors,

administrators, executors and assigns) do hereby guarantee and undertake to pay the owner, on

demand any all monies payable by the contractor to be extent of …………………. As aforesaid at

any time up to ………………………..**( day/month/year) without any demur, reservation , contest

, recourse or protest and / or without any reference to this contractor. Any such demand made by

the owner on the bank shall be conclusive and binding notwithstanding any difference between

the Owner the Contractor or any dispute pending before any Court, Tribunal, Arbitrator or any

other authority. The bank undertakes not to revoke this guarantee during its currency without

previous consent of the owner and further agrees that the guarantee herein contained shall

continue to be enforceable till the owner discharges this guarantee.

The Owner shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of the Bank under

the guarantee, from time to time to extend the time for performance or the contract by the

contractor. The owner shall have the fullest liberty, without affecting this guarantee, to postpone

from time to time the exercise of any power vested in them or of any right which they might have

against the contractor, and to exercise the same at any time in any matter, and either to enforce

or to for bear to enforce any covenants, contained or implied, in the contract between the owner

and the contractor or any other course or remedy or security available to the owner. The Bank

shall not be released to its obligations under these presents by any exercise by the owner of its

liberty with reference to the matters aforesaid or any of them or by reason of any other act of

omission or commission on the part of the owner or any other indulgences shown by the owner or

by any other matter or thing whatsoever which under law would, but for this provision have the

effect of relieving the Bank.


The bank also agrees that the owner at its option shall be entitled to enforce this guarantee

against the Bank as a principal debtor, in the first instance without proceeding against the

contractor and not withstanding any security or other guarantee the owner may have in relation to

the Contractor‘s liabilities.

Notwithstanding anything contained herein above our liability under this guarantee is restricted to

……………………. And it shall remain in force up to an including …………………….. and shall be

extended from time to time for such period( not exceeding 1 year) as may be desired

M/s………………………………………………………….on whose behalf this guarantee has been

given.

Dated this……………………. Day of ……………………….. 20……………… at…………

WITNESS

……………………………. ………………………

(Signature) (Signature)

…………………………… ……………………..

(Name) ( Name)

………………………….. ……………………..

(Official address) (Official address)

Attorney as per power

Of Attorney No…………..

Date……………………..

Notes

* This sum shall be 2.5%( two & half) of the Contract price.

** The date will be 90(Ninety) days after the end of the Warranty Period as specified in the

contract.

1. The stamp paper of appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of issuing bank.


PROFORMA OF EXTENSION OF BANK GUARANTEE

Ref………………………….. Date…………………….

To




Guwahati-1

Dear Sir/ Madam,

Sub: Extension of Bank Guarantee No……………….. forRs…………………. Favouring

yourselves, expiring on …………………. On account of M/S………………………….. in

respect of contract no……………………. dated …………….. (Hereinafter called original

Bank Guarantee).

At the request of M/s ……………………… we …………………… bank, branch office at

………………….. and having its Head Office at ………………………. Do hereby extend our

liability under the above mentioned Bank Guarantee

No…………………dated………………………for a further period of ……………………… (Years/

Months) from………………….. to expire on………………….. expect as provided above, all other

terms and conditions of the original Bank Guarantee No………………………. dated

………………. Shall remain unaltered and binding .

Please treat this as an integral part of the original Bank Guarantee to which it would be attached.

Yours faithfully

For………………………………

Manager/ Agent/Accountant …………………..

Power of attorney No……………………

Dated……………………………………

SEAL OF BANK

Note: The non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of the

Bank who has issued the Bank Guarantee.


PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCEPAYMENT

( To be stamped in accordance with Stamp Act )

Ref………………………….. Bank guarantee No……………………

Date…………………….

To




Guwahati-1

Dear Sir/Madam,

In consideration of Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd.(hereinafter referred to as the

‗Owner‘, which expressions shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof include its

successors, administrators and assigns) having awarded to M/s……………………………

hereinafter referred to as the ‗Contractor‘ which expression shall unless repugnant to the context

or meaning thereof , include its successors, administrators, executors and assigns), a Contract by

issue of Owner‘s letter of Award No…………………… Dated……………………and the same

having been acknowledged by the contractors, resulting in a Contract bearing no………………….

Dated…………………. Valued (at………………………………( in words and figures). For

………………………….Contract (space of work)………………………………….. (hereinafter called

the ‗Contract‘) and the Owner having agreed to make an advance payment to the Contractor for

performance of the above contract amounting ……………………………… (in words and figures)

as an advance against Bank Guarantee to be furnished by the Contractor.

We…………………………..( Name of the Bank) having its Head Office

at……………………………… ( hereinafter referred to as the ‗Bank‘, which expression shall,

unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof , include its successors, administrators,

executors and assigns) do hereby guarantee and undertake to pay the owner , immediately on

demand any or, all monies payable by the contractor to the extent of ………………..as aforesaid

at any time upto…………………….. (a….) without any demur, reservation, contest, recourse or

protest and/or without any reference to the contractor. Any such demand made by the Owner on

the Bank shall be conclusive and binding notwithstanding any difference between the Owner and

the Contractor or any dispute pending before any Court, Tribunal , Arbitrator or any other

authority. We agree that the guarantee herein contained shall be irrevocable and shall continue to

be enforceable till the owner discharges this guarantee.

The Owner shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of the Bank under

this guarantee, from time to time to vary the advance or to extent the time for performance of the

contract by the Contractor. The Owners shall have the fullest liberty without affecting this

guarantee, to postpone from time to time the exercise of any power vested in them or of any right

which they might have against the Contractor and to exercise the same at any time in any

manner, and either to enforce any covenants, contained or implied, in the contact between the

Owner and the Contractor or any other course or remedy or security available to the Owner. The

Bank shall not be released of its obligations under this presents by any exercise by the owner of

its liberty with reference to the matter aforesaid of any of them or by reason of any other act or

forbearance or other acts of omission or commission on the part of the owner or any other

indulgence shown by the owner or by any other matter or thing whatsoever which under law

would be for this provision have the effect of relieving the Bank.


The Bank also agrees that the Owner at its option shall be entitled to enforce this guarantee

against the Bank as a principal debtor, in the first instance without proceeding against the

contractor and not withstanding any security or other guarantee that the owner may have in

relation to the contractors liabilities.

Notwithstanding anything hereinabove our liability under this guarantee is limited to………… and

it shall remain in force upto an including ……………………….( @ and shall be extended from

time to time for such period ( not exceeding 1 year as may be desired by

M/s…………………………………………………………………...dated this ………. Day of

……………….. 20……. At……………………………..

WITNESS……………………………………..

……………… ……………….

(Signature) (Signature)

……………………………. ………………………………

(Name) (Name)

…………………………..….

(Designation)

(Official Address) (With Bank Stamp)

Attorney as per Power of attorney No……………………….…. Dated………………….

Strike whichever is not applicable

@ The date will be 90(ninety) days after the date of completion of the Contract.


PROFORMA OF “AGREEMENT”

(To be executed on non-Judicial stamp paper)

This Agreement made this …………….. day of ………… two thousand……………. Between

Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd. having its head office at BijuleeBhawan, Paltanbazar,

Guwahati-1 (hereinafter referred to as ‗Owner‘ or ‗‘, which expression shall include its

administrators, successors and assign on one part and (hereinafter referred to as the ‗Contractors

‗X‘ ( Name of the contracting Co.) which expression shall include its administrators, successors,

executors and permitted assigns) on the other part.

WHEREAS desirous of …………………….. in ……………. Circle associated with at

……………….(District) invited Bids for……………………………………………..

………………………………. (Briefly describe scope of works) for the first state of the project as

per its Bid Specification No………………………………

AND WHEREAS……………………….‖X‖ ………………………. Had participated in the above

referred Bidding vide their proposal No……………………. dated………………. And awarded the

Contract to……………..‖ X‖…………….. on terms and conditions documents referred to therein

which have been acknowledged by……………….‖X‖…………………..resulting into a ―Contract‖

NOW THEREFORE THIS DEED WITNESS AS UNDER:-

1.0 Article

1.1 Award of Contract

Awarded the contract to……………..‖X‖……………… for the work of …………… on the

terms and conditions contained in its letter of Award No…….. ………. Dated…………… and

the documents referred to therein. The award has taken effect from aforesaid letter of award.

The terms and expression used in this agreement shall have the same meaning as are

assigned to them in the ‗Contract Documents‘ referred to in this succeeding

Article.

2.0 Documentation

2.1 The contract shall be performed strictly as per the terms and condition stipulated herein and

in the following documents attached herewith( hereinafter referred to as ―Contract

Documents‖.)

i. Section 1-11 of the Bidding Document.

ii. Proposal Sheets, Data Sheets, Drawing work schedule submitted by ―X‖.

Letter of Award No………….. dated……………….duly acknowledged by ―X‖.

Quality Plans for manufacturing and field activities entitled as Quality Plan.

All the aforesaid Contract Documents shall form an integral part of this agreement , in so far as

the same or any part conform to the bidding documents and what has been specifically agreed to

by the Owner in its letter of Award. Any matter inconsistent therewith, contrary or repugnant

thereto or any deviations taken by the Contractor in its ‗Proposal‘ but not agreed to specially by

the Owner in its Letter of Award shall be deemed to have been withdrawn b y the Contractor. For

the sake of brevity, this agreement along with its aforesaid Contract Documents shall be referred

to as the ‗Agreement‘.

3.0 Conditions & Covenants

3.1 The scope of Contract, Consideration, Terms of Payment, Price Adjustments, Taxes

wherever applicable, Insurance, Liquidated Damage, Performance Guarantees and all other

terms and conditions are contained in ‘s Letter of Award No………........... dated………………

read in conjunction with other aforesaid contract documents. The contract shall be duly

performed by the Contract Documents, but which are needed for successful, efficient, safe


and reliable operation of the equipment unless otherwise specifically excluded in the

specification under ‗exclusion‘ or Letter of Award.

3.2 The scope of work shall also include supply and installation of all such items which are not

specifically mentioned in the contract Documents, but which are needed for successful,

efficient, safe and reliable operation of the equipment unless otherwise specifically excluded

in the specifications under ‗exclusions‘ or ‗Letter of Award‘.

3.3 Time Schedule

3.3.1 Time is the essence of the Contract and schedules shall be strictly adhered to ―X‖ shall

perform the work in accordance with the agreed schedules.

3.4 Quality Plans

3.4.1 The Contractor is responsible for the proper execution of the Quality Plans mentioned in

Section 4.8 of GTC. The work beyond the customer‘s hold points will progress only with the

owners consent. The Owner will also undertake quality surveillance and quality audit of the

Contractor‘s /Sub-contractor‘s works, systems and procedures and quality control activities.

The Contractor further agrees that any change in the Quality Plan will be made only with

the Owner‘s approval. The contractor shall also perform all quality control activities,

inspection and tests agreed with the Owner to demonstrate full compliance with the

contract requirements.

3.4.2 The contractor also agrees to provide the Owner with the necessary facilities for carrying

out inspection, quality audit and quality surveillance of contractors and its Subcontractor‘s

Quality Assurance Systems and Manufacturing Activities.

These shall include but not limited to the following:

Relevant plant standards, drawing and procedures;

Detailed Quality Assurance System manuals for manufacturing activities.

Storage procedures and instructions weld, NDT, heat treatment prior to commencement of

manufacture;

Complete set of log sheets ( blank) mentioned in the Quality Plans.

It is expressly agreed to by the contractor that the quality test and inspection by the owner

shall not in any way relief the contractor of its responsibilities for quality standards and

performance guarantee and their other obligations under the Agreement. 3.4.4 ―X‘ agrees

to submit quality Assurance Documents to for review and record after completion and

within 3 weeks of dispatch of material.

The package will include the following:

Factory test result, inspection report for testing required by this contract or applicable codes

and standards.

Two copies of inspection reports duly signed by Quality Assurance personnel of both

APDCL and ―X‖ for the agreed customer hold points.

Report of the rectification works where and if applicable.

3.5 It is expressly agreed to by the Contractor that notwithstanding the fact that the Contract is

termed as Supply-cum-Erection Contract or indicates the break-up of the Contract

consideration, for convenience of operation and for payment of sale tax on supply portion, it is

in fact one composite Contract on single source responsibility basis and the Contractor is

bound to perform the total Contract in its entirely and non-performance of any part or portion

of the Contract shall be deemed to be breach of the entire Contract.

3.6 The Contractor guarantees that the equipment package under the Contract shall meet the

ratings and performance parameters as stipulated in the technical specifications (Section10)

and in the event of any deficiencies found in the requisite performance figures, the Owner

may at its option reject the equipment package or alternatively accept it on the terms and

conditions and subject to levy of the liquidated damages in terms of Contract documents. The

amount of liquidated damages so leviable shall be in accordance with the contract document

and without any limitation.

3.7 It is further agreed by the contractor that the contract performance guarantee shall in no way

be constructed to limit or restrict the owner‘s equipment right to recover the

damages/compensation due to shortfall in the equipment performance figures as stated in


Para 3.6 above or under any other clause of the agreement. The amount of

damages/compensation shall be recoverable either by way of deduction from the contract

price, contract performance guarantee and or otherwise. The contract performance guarantee

furnished by the contractor is irrevocable and unconditional and the owner shall have the

power to invoke it notwithstanding any dispute or difference between the owner and the

contractor pending before any court tribunal, arbitrator or any other authority.

3.8 This Agreement constitutes full and complete understanding between the parties and terms of

the payment. It shall supersede all prior correspondence terms and conditions contained in

the Agreement. Any modification of the agreement shall be effected only by a written

instrument signed by the authorized representative of both the parties.

4.0 SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES:

4.1 It is specifically agreed between parties that all the differences or disputes arising out of the

agreement or touching the subject matter of the agreement shall be decided by process of

settlement and Arbitration as specified in clause 41 of the General Condition of the Contract

and provision of the Indian Arbitration Act, 1996 shall apply. Guwahati Courts alone shall

have exclusive jurisdiction over the same.

4.2 NOTICE OF DEFAULT

Notice of default given by either party to the other under agreement shall be in writing and

shall be deemed to have been duly and properly served upon the parties hereto if delivered

against acknowledgement or by telex or by registered mail with acknowledgements due

addressed to the signatories at the addresses mentioned at Guwahati.

IN WITNESS WHEROF, the parties through their duly authorized representatives have executed

these presents (execution where of has been approved by the competent authorities of both the

parties) on the day, month and year first above mentioned at Guwahati .

WITNESS:

1. ……………………….. (Owner‘s signature) ( Printed Name)

2. ……………………… (Designation)( Company‘s Stamp)

3. …………………….. (Contractor‘s Signature)(Company‘s Name)

4. …………………….. (Designation)(Company‘s Stamp)

Applicable in case of single award is placed on one party on Supply-cum- Erection basis.

In two separate awards are placed on single party/two different parties this clause is to be

modified suitably while signing the contract agreement to be signed separately for two

awards to incorporate cross fall breach clause.


FORM OF POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR JOINT VENTURE

(On Non-judicial Stamp Paper of Appropriate value to be Purchased in the

Name of Joint Venture)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT WE, the Partners whose details are given

hereunder……................................................................. have formed a Joint Venture under the laws

of……………………..and having our Registered Office(s)/Head Office(s) at

………………………………………………………………………………………………………….....(herein after

called the 'Joint Venture' which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof,

include its successors, administrators and assigns) acting thorough M/S………………

………………………………………………………………………….. being the Partner in-charge do hereby'

constitute, nominate and appoint M/S…………………………………… ………………………………..a

Company incorporated under the laws of arid having its Registered/Head Office at..as our duly 'constituted

lawful Attorney (hereinafter called "Attorney" or" Authorized Representative" or "Partner In-charge") to

exercise all or any of the powers for and on be.ha1f of, the Joint Venture in regard* to ---------------------

(Name of the Package) (Specification No.-------------------------) of Assam Power Distribution Company Ltd.

Bijulee Bhawan, Paltan Bazar, GUWAHATI (hereinafter called the "Owner"). and the bids for which' have

been invited by the Owner, to undertake the following acts:

i) To submit proposal and participate in the aforesaid Bid Specification of the Owner on behalf of the

―Joint Venture‖.

ii) To negotiate with the Owner 'the terms and' conditions for award of the Contract pursuant to the

aforesaid Bid and to sign the Contract with the Owner for and on behalf of the "Joint Venture'.

iii) To do any other act or submit any document rated to the above.

iv) To receive, accept and execute .the Contract for and on behalf of the "Joint Venture".

It is clearly understood that the Partner In-charge (Lead Partner) shall ensure performance of the Contract(s)

and if one or more Partner fail to perform their respective portion of the Contract(s), the same shall be

deemed to be a default by all the Partners.

It is expressly understood that this Power of Attorney shall remain valid binding and irrevocable till completion

of the Defect Liability Period in terms of the Contract.

The Joint Venture hereby agrees and undertakes to ratify and confirm all the above whatsoever the said

Attorney/ Authorized Representative/Partner In-charge quotes in the bid, negotiates and signs the Contract

with the Owner and/or proposes to act on behalf of the joint Venture by virtue of this Power of Attorney and

the same shall bind the Joint Venture as if done by itself.

* Strike which is not applicable.

IN WITNESS THEREOF the Partners Constituting the Joint Venture as aforesaid have executed

these presents on this …………….. day of ……………....... under the Common Seal(s) of their

Companies.


for and on behalf of

the Partners of Joint

Ventures

The Common Seal of the above Partners of the Joint Venture:

The Common Seal has been affixed there unto in the presence of :

WITNESS

1. Signature _________________________

Name___________________________

Designation_______________________

Occupation ________________________

2. Signature _________________________

Name___________________________

Designation_______________________

Occupation ________________________


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL TUBULAR POLES SCOPE: 1.1 This

specification covers the general requirements towards design, manufacture, testing at

manufacturers works, supply and delivery for tubular steel poles of circular cross section

( swaged type ) for overhead lines. 1.0 STANDARD : 1.1. The tubular steel poles shall

conform to the latest edition of Indian Standard specification IS: 2713 ( Part – I, III ) :

1980 Specification for Steel Tubular poles The Steel Tubular Poles conforming to other

internationally accepted, which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards,

mentioned above also be acceptable. In case the bidder who wish to offer material

conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference between adopted and

specific standards with authentic English Translation shall be furnished. 2.0 Topography

and Climatic Condition : 2.1. The materials offered, shall be suitable for operation in

tropical climate and will be subjected to the sun and inclement weather and shall be able

to withstand wide range of temperature variation. For the purpose of design, average

atmospheric temperature may be considered to be 50 °C with humidity nearing

saturation. 3.0 Materials : 3.1. The materials used in construction of tubular steel poles

shall be of the tested quality of steels of minimum tensile strength 540 MPa( : 55

Kgf/mm2 ). Or 410MPa as the case may be. 3.2. The materials, when analysed in

accordance with IS : 228 ( Part-III : 1972 ) and IS : 228 ( Part-IX) shall not show sulpher

and phosphorous contents of more than 0.060 percent each. 4.0 Types, Size and

construction: 4.1. Tubular Steel Poles shall be swaged type. 4.2. Swaged poles shall be

made of seamless or welded tubes of suitable lengths swaged and jointed together. No

circumferential joints shall be permitted in the individual tube lengths of the poles. If

welded tubes are used they shall have one longitudinal weld seam only : and

thelongitudinal welds shall be staggered at each swaged joint. 4.3. Swaging may be done

by any mechanical process. The upper edge of each joint shall be chamfered if at an angle

of about 45o. The upper edge need not be chamfered if a circumferential weld is to be

deposited in accordance with clause No. 5.3 2 of IS: 2713 (Part-I):1980. 4.4. The length

of joints on swaged poles shall be in accordance with clause No. 5.4 of IS: 2713(Par-I):

1980. 4.5. Poles shall be well-finished, clean and free from harmful surface defects. Ends

of the poles shall be cut square. Poles shall be straight, smooth and cylindrical. The weld

joints, if any, shall be of good quality, free from scale, surface defects, cracks, etc. 4.6.

Tolerances for outside diameter, thickness, length, weight and straightness shall be in

accordance with IS: 2713 (Part-I) : 1980. 4.7. The poles shall be coated with black

bituminous paint conforming to IS : 158-1968 throughout, internally and externally, upto

the level which goes inside the earth. The remaining portion of the exterior shall be

painted with one coat of red oxide primer as specified in IS: 2074-1979 or equivalent

international specifications. 5.0 EarthingArrangements: 5.1. For earthing arrangement a

through hole of 14mm diameter shall be provided in each pole at a height of 300mm

above the planting depth.


SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FORTUBULAR STEEL POLES : SWAGED TYPE

16meters long 14.5 meters long

1) Standard IS: 2713 ( Pat-I and III): 1980 as amended

upto date

2) Type of Pole Swaged Type

3) Designation 410 SP-80 410 SP 76

4) Overall Length 16 meters 14.5 meters

5) Planting depth 2.3 meters 2.0 meters

6) Height above ground 13.7 meters 12.5 meters

7) Effective length of Each

section.

a) Bottom 7.0 meters 6.50 meters

b) Middle 4.5 meters 4.00 meters

c) Top 4.5 meters 4.00 meters

8) Outside diameter and

Thickness of each Section.

a) Bottom 219.1x5.90mm 219.1x5.90 mm

b) Middle 193.7x4.85 mm 193.7x4.85 mm

c) Top 165.1x4.50 mm 165.1x4.50 mm

9) Joint Length ( in cm.):

a) Bottom (J2) 45 cm. 45 cm.

b) Top (J1) 40 cm. 40 cm.

10) Approximate weight

of Pole 416 Kg. 380 Kg.

11)Point of application of

load below/top (mtr.) 0.6mtr. 0.6 mtr

12) Breaking load ( inKgf ) 657 947

13) Working load with factor of

Safety : 2.5 ( in Kgf ) 291 379

14) Crippling load ( inKgf ) 466 672

15) Load for permanent set Not

exceeding 13mm (in Kgf) 319 460

16) Load for Temporary

Deflection of 157.5 mm (in Kgf) 60 81

17) Tolerance As per IS:2713(partI&partIII):1980

18) Finish -do-

19) Manufacturing clause -do-

1. Base Plate A Mild Steel base plate of size 400 mm x 400 mm x 8

mm shall be welded at the bottom of the pole.

2.

Painting The inner side & outer underground portion of the pole is

to be painted with black bituminous paint conforming to IS

: 158-1968 throughout,[ internally and externally, up to the

level which goes inside the earth]. The remaining portion

of the exterior shall be galvanized as per clause No


2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVENISED CHANNEL CROSS ARM ANGLE AND

FLAT

1.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of Galvanized Cross Arm and channel used for 33KV, 11 KV & line complete with all accessories as specified.

2.0 Standards The M.S Cross Arm and channel supplied under this specification shall conform the latest

issue of the relevant Indian Standards IS – 226:1975, Regulations etc. except where specified otherwise.

The rolling and cutting tolerance for steel product conforming to IS: 266 shall be those specified in the IS: 1852-1973 with latest revision. Galvanization conforming to latest version of 1S:2629

In the event of conforming to any standards other than the Indian Standards, the salient features of comparison shall be clearly set out separately

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT : i. The cross arm shall be fabricated grade of mild steel of channel section as

per requirement. ii. All steel members and other parts of fabricated material as delivered shall be

free of warps, local deformation, unauthorized splices, or unauthorized bends.

iii. Bending of flat strap shall be carried out cold. Straightening shall be carried


out by pressure and not by hammering. Straightness is of particular importance if the alignment of bolt holes along a member is referred to its edges.

iv. Holes and other provisions for field assembly shall be properly marked and cross referenced. Where required, either by notations on the drawing or by the necessity of proper identification and fittings for field assembly, the connection shall be match marked.

v. A tolerance of not more than 1mm shall be permitted in the distance between the center lines of bolt holes. The holes may be either drilled or punched and, unless otherwise stated, shall be not more than 2mm greater in diameter than the bolts.

vi. When assembling the components force may be used to bring the bolt holes together (provided neither members nor holes are thereby distorted) but all force must be removed before the bolt is inserted. Otherwise strain shall be deemed to be present and the structure may be rejected even though it may be, in all other respects, in conformity with the specification.

vii. The back of the inner angle irons of lap joints shall be chamfered and the ends of the members cut where necessary and such other measures taken as will ensure that all members can be bolted together without strain or distortion. In particular, steps shall be taken to relieve stress in cold worked steel so as to prevent the onset of embitterment during galvanizing.

viii. Similar parts shall be interchangeable. ix. Shapes and plates shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the

greatest extent practicable. Shearing flame cutting and chipping shall be done carefully, neatly and accurately. Holes shall be cut, drilled or punched at right angles to the surface and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges, and burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations shall be removed with the proper tool.

x. Shapes and plates shall be fabricated to the tolerance that will permit fielderection within tolerance, except as otherwise specified. All fabrication shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner so as to facilitate cleaning,

painting, galvanizing and inspection and to avoid areas in which water and other matter can lodge.

xi. Contact surfaces at all connections shall be free of loose scale, dirt, burrs, oil and other foreign materials that might prevent solid seating of the parts.

xii. Welded joints not permissible. xiii. The rolling and cutting tolerance for steel product conforming to IS: 266 shall

be those specified in the IS: 1852-1973 with latest revision.

all dimensions are subject to the following tolerances: a) dimensions up to and including 50mm:+1mm: and b) dimensions greater than 50mm: +2%

xiv. The channel cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust.

xv. For galvanized channel : All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring

washers, support channels, structures, shall; be hot dip galvanized conforming to latest version of 1S:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and uniform. It shall be free from acid spot and shall not scale, blister or be removable by handling or packing. There shall be no impurities


in the zinc or additives to the galvanic bath which could have a detrimental effect on the durability of the zinc coating. Before picking, all welding, drilling, cutting, grinding and other finishing operations must be completed and all grease, paints, varnish, oil, welding slag and other foreign matter completely removed. All protuberances, which would affect the life of galvanizing shall also be removed.

The weight of zinc deposited shall be in accordance with that stated in Standard IS 2629 and shall not less than 0.61kg/m² with a minimum thickness of 86 microns for items of thickness more than 5mm, 0.46kg/m² (64 microns) for items of thickness between 2mm and 5mm and 0.33kg/m² (47 microns) for items less than 2mm thick.

xvi. he raw materials and fabrication thereof in respect of cross arm shall be furnished along with dimension.

xvii. The hole for fixing of insulator and pole clamp shall be provided as per requirement.

xviii. One copy of the drawing of cross arm for each size shall be furnished along with the technical bid.

a. REQUIRED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GI CHANNEL CROSS ARM

[100x50x6x3200 ]

Sl No.

Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm G.I Channel cross arm

2 Size 100 x 50x 6 x 3200 mm

3 Material Mild Steel channel

4 Length 3200 mm

5 Breath 100 mm

6 Width 50 mm

7 Thickness 6 mm

8 Hole for fixing of insulator

26 mm

9 Center to center distance of hole

1525 mm

10 Hole for pole clamp 18 mm

11 Weight 29.5 kg (approx)

12 Galvanization The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.

13 Standard applicable IS: 266; IS: 1852-1973:


Sl No.

Description Particular

1 Type of cross arm GI Channel cross arm

2 Size 75 x 40x 40x6 x 2200 mm

3 Material Mild Steel channel( galvanized)

4 Length 2200 mm

5 Breath 75 mm

6 Width 40 mm

7 Thickness 6 mm

8 Hole for foxing of insulator

20 mm

9 Center to center distance for hole

1070mm

10 Weight 16 kg (approx)

11 Galvanization

The cross arm shall be properly brushed to make it free from rust and hot dip galvanized confirming to IS: 2629.

3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ACSR CONDUCTORS

A. ACSR CONDUCTOR

1. SCOPE

This section covers design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, packing, supply and delivery for

destination of Kms of “WEASEL” " RABBIT", "RACOON", "DOG", “WOLF” and "PANTHER" ACSR

Conductor of size 6/1/2.59mm, 6/1/3.35mm, 6/1/4.09 mm, 6/4.72mm, 7/1.57mm,30/7/2.59 mm

and 30/7/3.00mm respectively.

2. STANDARDS

The Conductor shall also comply in all respects with the IS: 398(Part-II)-1996 with latest

amendments unless otherwise stipulated in this specification or any other International Standards

which ensure equal or higher quality material.

The ACSR Conductor shall also conform to the following standards :

Sl.

No.

Indian

Standards

Title International

1 IS:209-1979 Specification for Zinc BS-3436-1961

2 IS:398-1996 Specification for Aluminium conductors for overhead

transmission purposes.

Part-II Aluminium conductors IEC-209-1966

Galvanized steel reinforced BS-215(Part-II)


OfferConforming to standards other than IS-398 shall be accompanied by the English version of

relevant standards in support of the guaranteed technical particulars to be furnished as per

format enclosed.

3. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The General Technical Requirements are given in Section-II. The Conductor shall conform to these

technical requirements.

The Bidder shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars in Section-III.

3.1. MATERIALS/WORKMANSHIP

3 IS:1521-1972 Method of Tensile Testing of Steel wire ISO/R89-1959

4 IS:1778-1980 Reels and Drums for Bare conductors BS-1559-1949

5 IS:1841-1978 E.C. Grade Aluminium rod produced by rolling

6 IS:2629-1966 Recommended practice for Hot Dip Galvanizing of iron and

steel

7 IS:2633-1986 Method of testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated

articles.

8 IS:4826-1968 Galvanized coatings on round steel wires. ASTM A472-729

9 IS:5484-1978 E.C. Grade Aluminium rod produced by continuous casting

and rolling.

10 IS:6745-1972 Methods of determination of weight of zinc-coating of zinc

coated iron and steel articles

BS-443-1969


3.1.1. The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. The steel coredAluminium

conductor strands shall consist of hard drawn Aluminium wire manufactured from not less than

99.5% pure electrolytic Aluminium rods of E.C. grade and copper content not exceeding 0.04%.

They shall have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC: 889-1987. The steel

wire shall be made from material produced either by the acid or basic open hearth process or by

electric furnace process or basic oxygenprocess. Steel wire drawn from Bessemer process shall not

be used.

3.1.2. The steel wires shall be evenly and uniformly coated with electrolytic high grade, 99.95% purity

zinc complying with the latest issue of IS-209 for zinc. The uniformity of zinc coating and the

weight of coating shall be in accordance with Section-II and shall be tested and determined

according to the latest IS-2633 or any other authoritative standard.

3.1.3. The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 250

gm/sq.m after stranding. The coating shall be smooth, continuous, and of uniform thickness,free

from imperfections and shall withstand minimum three dips after stranding in standard preece test.

The steel strands shall be preformed and post-formed in order to prevent spreading of strands in

the event of cutting of composite core wire. The properties and characteristics of finished strands

and individual wires shall be as prescribed in IEC: 888-1987.

4. CONDUCTOR PARAMETERS

The Parameters of individual strands and composite steel coredaluminiumconductor, shall be in

accordance with the values given in Section-II.

Creep in a conductor is attributed partly due to settlement of strands and partly due to non-elastic

elongation of metal when subjected to load. The manufacturer of conductor shall furnish the

amount of creep which will take place in 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 years along with the supporting

calculations. The calculations should be based on everyday temperature of 32 ºC and everyday

tension of 25% of UTS of conductor of 11/33 KV Lines.

5. TOLERANCES

The tolerances on standard diameter of Aluminium and Steel wires shall be as detailed in specific

technical requirements.

The cross-section of any wire shall not depart from circularity by more than an amount

corresponding to the tolerance on the standard diameter.

The details of diameters, lay ratios of Aluminium and steel wires shall be in accordance with the

Section-II "Technical Requirements".

6. SURFACE CONDITIONS

All Aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, and free from all imperfections, spills/and splits.

The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections

including spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks (protrusion of wires),

dents, pressmarks, cut marks, wire cross-over, over-riding looseness, pressure and/or unusual

bangle noise on tapping, material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots (on

account of reaction with trapped rain water etc.,), dirt, grit, etc. The surface of conductor shall be

free from points, sharp edges, abrasions or other departures from smoothness or uniformity of


surface contour that would increase radio interference and corona losses. When subjected to

tension upto 50% of the ultimate strength of the conductor, the surface shall not depart from the

cylindrical form nor any part of the component parts or strands move relative to each other in

such a way as to get out of place and disturb the longitudinal smoothness of the conductor.

7. JOINTS IN WIRES

7.1. Aluminium wires

During stranding, no Aluminium wire welds shall be made for the purpose of achieving the

required conductor length.

No joint shall be permitted in the individual Aluminium wires in the outer most layer of the

finished Conductor. However, joints in the 12 wire & 18 wire inner layer of the conductor are

permitted but these joints shall be made by the cold pressure butt welding and shall be such that

no two such joints shall be within 15 meters of each other in the complete stranded conductor.

7.2. Steel wires

There shall be no joints in finished steel wires forming the core of the steel reinforced Aluminium

conductor.

8. STRANDING

The wires used in construction of the stranded conductor, shall, before stranding, satisfy all

requirements of IS-398 (Part-II) 1996.

In all constructions, the successive layers shall be stranded in opposite directions. The wires in

each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded round the underlying wire or wires. The outer

most layer of wires shall have a right hand lay. The lay ratio of the different layers shall be within

the limits given under Section-II.

9. PACKING

9.1. The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable strong wooden drums provided with lagging of

adequate strength constructed to protect the conductor against any damage and displacement

during transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field. The drums

shall generally conform to IS-1778-1980 and latest version except as otherwise specified

hereinafter. The conductor drums shall be adequate to wind one standard length of 2500 meters of

WEASEL/RABIT/RACOON/DOG/PANTHERACSR conductor.

9.2. The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the conductor under a minimum

controlled tension of the order of 5KN. The conductor drums shall be provided with necessary

clamping arrangements so as to be suitable for tension stringing of power conductor.

9.3. The bidders should submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the bid. After

placement of letter of intent the Manufacturer shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing

of the drum for Employer's approval. After getting approval from the Employer, Manufacturer shall

submit 30 more copies of the approved drawings for further distribution and field use.

9.4. All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from defects that

may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-

termite/anti fungus shall be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a quality which is not


harmful to the conductor.

9.5. All flanges shall be 2-ply construction with 64 mm thickness. Each ply shall be nailed and clenched

together at approximately 90 degrees. Nails shall be driven from the inside face of the flange,

punched and then clenched on the outer face. Flange boards shall not be less than the nominal

thickness by more than 2 mm. There shall not be less than 2 nails per board in each circle.

9.6. The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental type. These

shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be closely butted

and shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of the battens shall be

rounded or chamfered to avoid damage to the conductor.

9.7. Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and the barrel

supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either end,

sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at the required

spacing.

9.8. Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand protruded of the flanges. All the nails used on the inner

surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of the barrel shall

generally be flushed with the top of the nuts.

9.9. The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with bitumen based paint.

9.10. Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof bamboo paper

shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum by means of a suitable

commercial adhesive material. The paper should be dried before use. Medium grade craft paper

shall be used in between the layers of the conductor. After reeling the conductor the exposed

surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with thin polythene sheet across the

flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage during transportation and handling

and also to prevent ingress of rain water during storage/transport.

9.11. A minimum space of 75 mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external protective

lagging and outer layer of the conductor. Outside the protective lagging, there shall be minimum of

two binders consisting of hoop iron/galvanised steel wire. Each protective lagging shall have two

recesses to accommodate the binders.

9.12. Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange edges with at

least 2 nails per end. The length of the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of the

battens. The nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have exposed sharp

edges or allow the battens to be released due to corrosion.

9.13. The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U-nails on one side of

the flanges.

9.14. Only one standard length of conductor shall be wound on each drum. The method of lagging to be

employed shall be clearly stated in the tender.

9.15. As an alternative to wooden drum Bidder may also supply the conductors in non-returnable painted

steel drums. The painting shall conform to IS:9954-1981,reaffirmed in 1992. Wooden/ steel drum

will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly the Bidder should quote the package.

10. LABELLING AND MARKING


The drum number shall be branded or gauged or stencilled into the flange. An arrow shall be

marked on the sides of the drum, together with the words "Roll this way". Each drum shall have

the following information provided on the outside of the flange stencilled with indelible ink.

i) Manufacturer's name and address.

ii) Contract/Specification number.

iii) Size and type of conductor.

iv) Net weight of the conductor.

v) Gross weight of the conductor and drum.

vi) Length of the conductor.

vii) Position of the conductor end.

viii) Drum and lot number.

ix) Name and address of the consignee.

x) Month and year of manufacture.

xi) The drum may also be marked with standard specification as per which the conductor is

manufactured.

11. STANDARD LENGTHS

11.1. The standard length of the conductor shall be 2500 metres. Bidder shall indicate the standard

length of the conductor to be offered by them. A tolerance of plus or minus 5% on the standard

length offered by the bidder shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall be

treated as random lengths.

11.2. Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard length and

total quantity of such random length shall not be more than 10% of the total quantity order. When

one number random length has been manufactured at any time, five (5) more individual lengths,

each equivalent to the above random length with a tolerance of +/-5% shall also be manufactured

and all above six random lengths shall be dispatched in the same shipment. At any point, the

cumulative quantity supplied including such random lengths shall not be more than 12.5% of the

total cumulative quantity supplied including such random lengths. However, the last 20% of the

quantity ordered shall be supplied only in standard length as specified.

11.3. Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, above the standard length, he can

manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars of offer. This is required for special stretches

like river crossing etc. The Employer reserves the right to place orders for the above lengths on the

same terms and conditions applicable for the standard lengths during the pendency of the

Contract.

12. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

A Quality Assurance Plan including customer hold points covering the manufacturing activities of

the material shall be required to be submitted by the tenderer to the Employer along with the

tender. The Quality Assurance Plan after the same is found acceptable, will be approved by the

Employer.

The contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan in true spirit. If desired by the

Employer, he shall give access to all the documents and materials to satisfy the Employer that the

Quality Assurance Plan is being properly followed.


13. TESTING

13.1. SELECTION OF TEST SAMPLES FOR TYPE TESTS

13.1.1. The samples shall be taken from a continuous length of conductor and subjected to all the tests

specified in clause 14.

13.2. SELECTION OF TEST SAMPLES FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS

13.2.1. Before dispatch from the works individual wire and finished steel coredAluminium conductor shall

be subjected to the tests as specified in IS:398 or any other authoritative standard.

13.2.2. Sample for individual wires for test shall be taken before stranding from outer ends of not less than

ten per cent of the spools in the case of Aluminium wire and ten per cent of the wire coils in the

case of steel wires. If samples are taken after stranding, they shall be obtained by cutting 1.2

meters from the outer ends of the finished conductor from not more than 10 per cent of the

finished reels.

13.2.3. The routine tests shall be same as acceptance test and shall be carried out on each coil.

14. TESTS

The following tests shall be carried out on sample/samples of conductor :

14.1 Type Tests

(i) Visual examination

(ii) Measurement of diameters of individual Aluminium and steel wires.

(iii) Measurement of lay ratio of each layer

(iv) Breaking load test

(v) Ductility test

(vi) Wrapping test

(vii) Resistance test on Aluminium wires.

(viii) DC resistance Test on Composite Conductor.

(ix) Galvanizing test

(x) Surface condition test

(xi) Stress Strain test

(xii) Procedure qualification test on welded joint of Aluminium Strands.

NOTE:-The type test reports shall not be older than FIVE years and shall be valid up to

expiry of validity of offer.

The above additional lists if not conducted earlier, shall be done under the subject project

package at no extra cost.

14.2 Acceptance tests and Routine tests

(i) Visual and dimensional check on drum.

(ii) Visual examination

(iii) Measurement of diameters of individual Aluminium and steel wires.

(iv) Measurement of lay ratio of each layer


(v) Breaking load test

(vi) Ductility test

(vii) Wrapping test

(viii) Resistance test on Aluminium wires.

(ix) DC resistance Test on Composite Conductor.

(x) Galvanizing test

14.3 Tests During Manufacture

The following tests during manufacture shall be carried out.

(i) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising,

(ii) Chemical analysis of Aluminium used for making Aluminiumstrands,

(iii) Chemical analysis of steel used for making steel strands,

14.4 Visual examination

The conductor shall be examined visually for good workmanship and general surface finish of

the conductor. The conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of Inspecting Officer.

The Inspector will initially check for Scratches, Joints etc., and that the conductor shall generally

conform to the requirements of the specifications/IS 398(Part-II)-1996.

14.5 Measurement of diameters of individual Aluminium and Steel Wires.

The diameters of individual Aluminium and Steel Wires shall be checked to ensure that they

conform to the requirements of this specification.

14.6 Measurement of lay-ratios

The lay-ratios of each layer of the conductor shall be measured and checked to ensure that they

conform to the requirements of this specification and IS:398 (Part-II)-1996.

14.7 Breaking load test

a) Breaking load test on complete conductor.

Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two places on a sample of

conductor of minimum 5m length between fixing arrangement suitably fixed on a tensile testing

machine. The load shall be increased at a steady rate upto 50% of minimum specified UTS and

held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to relative movement of

strands. Thereafter the load shall be increased at steady rate to 100% of UTS and held for one

minute. The Conductor sample shall not fail during this period. The applied load shall then be

increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.

b) Breaking load test on individual Aluminium and Galvanized steel wires.

This test shall be conducted on both Aluminium and Galvanized steel wires. The breaking load

of one specimen cut from each of the samples taken shall be determined by means of suitable

tensile testing machine. The load shall be applied gradually and the rate of separation of the

jaws of the testing machine shall be not less than 25 mm/min. and not greater than 100 mm. /

min. The ultimate breaking load of the specimens shall be not less than the values specified in

the Section-II.


14.8 Ductility Test

For the purpose of this test both torsion and elongation tests shall be carried out on galvanized

steel wires only.

14.9 Torsion Test

One specimen cut from each of the samples taken shall be gripped in two vices exactly 15 cms.

apart. One of the vices shall be made to revolve at a speed not exceeding one revolution per

second and the other shall be capable of moving longitudinally to allow for contraction or

expansion during testing. A small tensile load not exceeding 2 (two) percent of the breaking

load of the wire shall be applied to the samples during testing. The test shall be continued until

fracture occurs and the fracture shall show a smooth surface at right angles to the axis of the

wire. After fracture, the specimen shall be free from helical splits. The sample shall withstand a

number of twists equivalent to not less than 18 on length equal to 100 times the diameter.

When twisted after stranding the number of complete twists before fracture occurs shall be not

less than 16 on a length equal to 100 times the diameter of the wire. In case test sample length

is less or more than 100 times the stranded diameter of the strand, the minimum number of

twists will be proportioned to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be

rounded off to the next higher whole number. The fracture shall show a smooth surface at right

angles to the axis of the wire.

14.10 Elongation Test

The elongation of one specimen cut from each of the samples taken shall be determined. The

specimen shall be straightened by hand and an original gauge length of 200 mm. shall be

marked on the wire. A tensile load shall be applied as described in 1.1.4.6.2.1 and the

elongation shall be measured after the fractured ends have been fitted together. If the fracture

occurs outside the gauge marks, or within 25 mm. of either mark and the required elongation is

not obtained, the test shall be disregarded and another test conducted. When tested before

stranding, the elongation shall be not less than 4 percent and when tested after stranding, the

elongation shall be not less than 3.5 percent.

14.11 Wrapping Test

This test shall be conducted on both Aluminium and Galvanized steel wires.

14.11.1 Aluminium wires

One specimen cut from each of the samples of Aluminium wires shall be wrapped round a wire

of its own diameter to form a close helix of 8 turns. Six turns shall then be unwrapped and

closely wrapped in the same direction as before. The wire shall not break or show any crack.

14.11.2 Galvanized steel wires

One specimen cut from each of the samples of galvanized steel wire taken shall be wrapped

round a mandrel of diameter equal to 4 times the wire diameter to form a close helix of 8 turns.

Six turns shall then be unwrapped and again closely wrapped in the same direction as before.

The wire shall not break.


14.12 Resistance Test

This test shall be conducted on Aluminium wires only, conforming to procedure as per IEC:889.

The electrical resistance of one specimen of Aluminium wire cut from each of the samples taken

shall be measured at ambient temperature. The measured resistance shall be corrected to the

value corresponding to 20 degrees C. by means of following formula.

R20 =RT / [1+ alpha x (T-20)]

Where

R20 = Resistance corrected at 20 degrees C.

RT = Resistance measured at T degrees C.

alpha = Constant mass temperature coefficient ofresistance 0.004.

T = Ambient temperature during measurement

This resistance calculated to 20 degrees C. shall be not more than the maximum value specified

in section-II.

14.13 Galvanizing Test

This test shall be conducted on galvanized steel wires only. The uniformity of Zinc coating and

the weight of coating shall be in accordance with IS 4826-1979.

14.14 Surface Condition Test

A sample of the finished conductor for use in 11/33 KV system having a minimum length of 5

meters with compression type dead end clamps compressed on both ends in such manner as to

permit the conductor to take its normal straight line shape, shall be subjected to a tension of 50

percent of the UTS of the conductor. The surface shall not depart from its cylindrical shape nor

shall the strands move relative to each other so as to get out of place or disturb the longitudinal

smoothness of conductor. The measured diameter at any place shall be not less than the sum

of the minimum specified diameters of the individual Aluminium and steel strands as indicated

in Section-II.

14.15 Stress-Strain Test

The test is contemplated only to collect the creep data of the conductor from the manufacturer.

A sample of conductor of minimum 10 meters length shall be suitably compressed with dead

end clamps.

15. TEST SET-UP

15.1. The test sample shall be supported in a trough over its full length and the trough adjusted so

that theconductor will not be lifted by more than 10mm under tension. This shall be ascertained

by actual measurement.

15.2. The distance between the clamp and the sleeve mouth shall be monitored with callipers during

the test to ensure that, after the test, it does not change by more than 1mm + 0.1mm from the

value before the test.


15.3. The conductor strain shall be evaluated from the measured displacements at the two ends of the

gauge length of the sample. The gauge reference targets shall be attached to the clamps which

lock the steel and Aluminium wires together. Target plates may be used with dial gauges or

displacement transducers and care shall be taken to position the plates perpendicular to the

conductor. Twisting the conductor, lifting it and moving it from side-to-side by the maximum

amounts expected during the test should introduce no more than 0.3mm error in the reading.

16. TEST LOADS FOR COMPLETE CONDUCTOR

The loading conditions for repeated stress-strain tests for complete conductor shall be as

follows:

16.1. 1KN load shall be applied initially to straighten the conductor. The load shall be removed after

straightening and then the strain gauges are to be set At zero tension.

16.2. For non-continuous stress-strain data, the strain readings at 1KN intervals at lower tensions and

5 KN intervals above 30% of UTS shall be recorded.

16.3. The sample shall be reloaded to 30% of UTS and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted after

5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes during the hold period. The load shall be released then after

the hold period.

16.4. The sample shall be reloaded to 50% of UTS and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted after

5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes during the hold period. The load shall be released then after

the hold period.

16.5. Reloading upto 70% of UTS shall be done and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted after 5,

10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes. The load shall be released.

16.6. Reloading upto 85% of UTS shall be done and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted after 5,

10,15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes and the load shall be released then.

16.7. Tension shall be applied again and shall be increased uniformly until the actual breaking strength

is reached. Simultaneous readings of tension and elongation shall be recorded upto 90% of UTS

at the intervals described under Clause 16.6.

17. TEST LOADS FOR STEEL CORE ONLY

The loading conditions for repeated stress-strain tests for the steel core of ACSR shall be as

follows:

17.1. The test shall consist of successive applications of load applied in a manner similar to that for the

complete conductor at 30%, 50%, 70% and 85% of UTS.

17.2. The steel core shall be loaded until the elongation at the beginning of each hold period

corresponds to that obtained on the complete conductor at 30%, 50%, 70% and 85% of UTS

respectively.

18. STRESS-STRAIN CURVES

The design stress-strain curve shall be obtained by drawing a smooth curve through the 0.5 and

1 hour points at 30%,50% and 70% of UTS loadings. The presence of any Aluminium slack that

can be related to any observed extrusion entering the span from the compression dead ends


shall be removed from the lower ends of the design curves. Both the laboratory and standard

stress-strain curves shall be submitted to the Employeralongwith test results. The stress-strain

data obtained during the test shall be corrected to the standard temperature i.e. 20 deg.C.

19. DC RESISTANCE TEST ON COMPOSITE CONDUCTOR

On a conductor sample of minimum 5m length, two contact clamps shall be fixed with a pre-

determined bolt torque. The resistance of the sample shall be measured by a Kelvin double

bridge by placing the clamps initially zero meter and subsequently one meter apart. The test

shall be repeated at least five times and the average value recorded. The value obtained shall

be corrected to the value at 20 deg C as per clause no. 12.8 of IS:398 (Part-II)-1982/1996.The

corrected resistance value at 20 deg.C shall conform to the requirements of this specification.

20. PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST ON WELDED ALUMINIUM STRANDS.

Two Aluminium wires shall be welded as per the approved quality plan and shall be subjected to

tensile load. The breaking strength of the welded joint of the wire shall not be less than the

guaranteed breaking strength of individual strands.

21. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF ALUMINIUM AND STEEL

Samples taken from the Aluminium and Steel ingots / coils/ strands shall be chemically/

spectrographicallyanalyzed. The same shall be in conformity with the requirements stated in this

specification.

22. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF ZINC

Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically / spectrographically analyzed.The same

shall be in conformity with the requirements stated in this specification.

23. VISUAL AND DIMENSIONAL CHECK ON DRUMS

The drums shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to the

requirements of this specification.

24. REJECTION AND RETEST

24.1. In case of failure in any type test, the Manufacturer is either required to manufacture fresh

sample lot and repeat all the tests successfully once or repeat that particular type test three

times successfully on the sample selected from the already manufactured lot at his own

expenses. In case a fresh lot is manufactured for testing then the lot already manufactured shall

be rejected.

24.2. If samples are taken for test after stranding and if any selected reel fails in the retest, the

manufacturer may test each and every reel and submit them for further inspection. All rejected

material shall be suitably marked and segregated.

25. CHECKING AND VERIFICATION OF LENGTH OF CONDUCTOR

The contractor should arrange for inspection by the representative of the Employer specially

authorised for this purpose. At least 50% of the total number of drums of conductor subject to

minimum of two taken at random should be checked to ascertain the length of conductor.

Arrangements should be made available in the works of the manufacturer for transferring the


conductor from one reel to another at the same time measuring the length of the conductor so

transferred by means of a meter.

26. ADDITIONAL TESTS

The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable

nature carried out at Bidder's premises, at site, or in any other standard Laboratory in addition

to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself that the materials comply

with the specifications.

27. TESTING EXPENSES

27.1. The breakup of the testing charges for the type tests specified shall be indicated separately.

27.2. Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type test. They shall

ensure that adequate facilities are available in the laboratories and the tests can be completed in

these laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by them.

27.3. The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture

specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of the conductor, except for

the expenses of the inspector/Employer's representative.

27.4. In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type tests are required to be conducted then all the

expenses for deputation of Inspector/Employer's representative shall be deducted from the

contract price. Also if on receipt of the Manufacturer's notice of testing, the Employer's

representative does not find 'plant' to be ready for testing, the expenses incurred by the

Employer for redeputation shall be deducted from contract price.

28. TEST REPORTS

28.1. Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six copies alongwith one original. One

copy will be returned duly certified by the Employer only after which the commercial production

of the material shall start.

28.2. Record of Routine test reports shall be maintained by the Manufacturer at his works for periodic

inspectionby the Employer's representative.

28.3. Test certificates of Tests during manufacture shall be maintained by the Manufacturer. These

shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the Employer.

29. TEST FACILITIES

The following additional test facilites shall be available at the Manufacturer's works:

(i) Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing machine,

resistance measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer,etc.

(ii) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.

(iii) Finished Conductor shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on separate

rewinding machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per minute).The

rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system and be free of vibrations,

jerks etc with traverse laying facilities.


30. INSPECTION

30.1. The Employer's representative shall, at all times, be entitled to have access to the works and all

places of manufacture where conductor shall be manufactured and the representative shall have

full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Bidder's works, raw materials and process of

manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.

30.2. The Bidder shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and of the

progress of manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that arrangements can be made

for inspection.

30.3. The contractor will intimate the Employer about carrying out of the tests at least 45 days in

advance of the scheduled date of tests during which the Employer will arrange to depute his

representative/s to be present at the time of carrying out of the tests. Six (6) copies of the test

reports shall be submitted.

30.4. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily

inspected and tested, Unless the inspection is waived off by the employer in writing. In the later

case also, the conductor shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified

herein has been completed and approved by the employer.

30.5. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his

responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent

subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

30.6. At least 50% of the total number of drums subject to minimum of two in any lot put up for

inspection, shall be selected at random to ascertain the length of conductor by the following

method:

"At the works of the manufacturer of the conductor, the conductor shall be transferred from

one drum to another at the same time measuring its length with the help of a graduated pulley

and Cyclometer. The difference in the average length thus obtained and as declared by the

Bidder in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the conductor is found short during

checking".

31. SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS/VARIATIONS

If the tenderer has any exceptions to any of the clause/s laid down in this specification, these

should be clearly stated in the schedule of deviations / variations.

SECTION - II

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. SCOPE

This section of the specification covers climatic and isoceraunic conditions, specific technical

particulars, schedule of requirements & desired deliveries, for conductor for 11/33 kV lines.

2. CLIMATIC & ISOCERAUNIC CONDITIONS :

2.1Maximum Temperature


2.8 Average number of thunder storm

2.9 Altitude varying from sea level

2.10Basic horizontal Seismic Co-efficient(horizontal)

Basic vertical Seismic Co-efficient

2.11System Particulars

a) Line Voltage (kV)

b) Highest System Voltage (kV)

c) Number of Circuits

d) Frequency HZ

e) Neutral

f) Short circuit level (KA)

2. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

CONDUCTOR:

1. Conductor: Rabbit/Raccoon/Dog/Weasel/Panther ACSR

2. IS applicable: IS-398 (part-II) 1996 latest revision

3. Wire Diameter Rabbit Raccoon Wolf Weasel Panther

Aluminium (mm) 6/3.35 6/4.06 6/2.59 6/2.59 30/3.00

Steel(mm) 1/3.35 1/4.09 7/2.59 1/2.59 7/3.00

4. Number of strands:

Steel centre 1 1 1 1

1st steel layer - 6 6

1st Aluminium layer 6 6 6 6 12

2nd Aluminium layer 18

5. Sectional Area of

Aluminium (sq. mm.)

52.88 78.83 158.1 31.61 212.1

6. Total Sectional

Area(sq.mm.)

61.7 91.97 194.9 36.88 261.5

7. Overall diameter(mm) 10.05 12.27 18.13 7.77 21

8. Approximate

weight(Kg./Km.)

10.05 12.27 14.15 7.77 21

9. Calculated D.C 0.552 4.371 0.1828 0.9289 0.139

a) Conductor ºC.

2.2Minimum Temperature ºC.

2.3 i)Max. ambient temperature ºC

ii) Mean annual / every day temperature ºC

2.4Basic wind speed m/s

2.5Relative humidity

i) i) Maximum %

ii) Minimum %

2.6Average Rainfall (Max.) mm per annum

2.7a)Rainy months May to Sept.

15 Rainy days in a year (days)


resistance at 20

degrees C., maximum.

(Ohms/Km)

10. Ultimate tensile

strength (KN)

18.25 26.91 69.2 11.12 89.67

11. Final modulus of

elasticity (GN/sq.m)

79 79 75 79 80

12. Coefficient of linear

expansion x 10-6 perC

19.1 19.1 19.8 19.1 17.8

13. Lay ratio Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min

Steel core 6 wire layer 28

13

28

13

AluminiumIst layer 14

10

14

10

14

10

14

10

14

10

2nd layer

16

10

14. Technical Particulars

a. Diameter-mm

Standard(mm)

Maximum (mm)

Minimum (mm)

Rabbit Raccoon Wolf Weasel Panther

Al Steel Al Steel Al Steel Al Steel Al Steel

3.35 3.35 4.09 4.09 1.57 4.72 2.59 2.59 3.00 3.00

3.42 3.38 4.17 4.13 1.60 4.77 2.64 2.62 3.06 3.03

3.28 3.32 4.01 4.05 1.54 4.67 2.54 2.56 2.94 2.97

b. Cross-sectional area of

nominal diameter wire

(mm2)

8.814 8.814 13.14 13.14 1.936 17.50 5.269 5.269 7.069 7.069

c. Weight (Kg./Km) 68.75 23.82 102.48 35.51 15.10 47.30 41.09 14.24 55.13 19.11

d. Min. breaking load (KN)

Before stranding 11.58 1.43 17.27 2.08 2.70 2.78 6.92 0.89 9.29 1.17

After Stranding 11.00 1.36 16.4 1.98 2.57 2.64 6.57 0.85 8.83 1.11

e. D.C resistance at 20C

min. (Ohm/Km)

-3.265 -2.194 1.65 -5.49 -4.079

15. Zinc coating of steel core:

(i) Number of 1 minute dips: 3

(ii) Minimum weight of Zinc: 260 gms/sqm Coating

(iii) Process of Galvanizing: Hot dip.

(iv) Quality of Zinc : IS-209/1979 or latest edition.

16. Joints in strands

16.1 Steel : Not permitted


16.2 Aluminium: No joint shall be permitted in the Aluminium wires in the outer most layer of the

ACSR conductor. But permitted in the inner layers such that no two such joints are within 15

meters of each other in the complete stranded conductor.

15. Chemical composition of high carbon steel wire:

Element % Composition

i) Carbon 0.5 to 0.85

ii) Manganese 0.5 to 1.10

iii) Phosphorus Not more than 0.035

iv) Sulphur Not more than 0.045

v) Silicon 0.10 to 0.35

1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POLYMERIC 33 KV PIN INSULATOR 1.0 Scope

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer‘s works, transport to

site, storage, insurance, erection and commissioning of polymeric 33 KV pin insulator for

33 kV lines. 2.0 Standard

Polymeric compact insulator with suitable groove in upper pin and long threads in lower part of the

pin with nuts, suitable for 33 KV lines shall be conforming to IEC : 1109 with its latest amendments

and revision and having minimum mechanical failing load of 10 K.N. Insulators conforming to any

other internationally accepted standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standard

mentioned would also be acceptable. A high class quality, corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced

rod is the core of every insulator with ultimate mechanical strength at least twice the maximum

working load. 3.0 General Requirements

4.0 The composite polymer insulator should be uni-body design and injection molded directly to the rod and sealed to the end fittings with bead of silicon to give the insulator high dielectric strength and protect it from all environmental conditions. The design of the insulator shall be such that stress due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.

5.0 The insulator shall be in one piece.

The dimensions of the pins insulator shall be as follows:

33 KV a)Composite insulator length 310 mm b)Failing minimum load 10 KN c)Creepage distance (min) mm 925 mm d)Dry power frequency 1 min withstand voltage 70 kV (RMS) e)Wet power frequency 1 min withstand voltage 70 kV (RMS) f)Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage 170 Kvp

6.0 Tests

Pin shall comply with the following tests. 1.1 Type test:

a) Visual examination test b) Verification of dimensions c) Checking of threads d) Galvanizing test

e) Mechanical strength tests


1.2 Routine test:

a) Visual examination test 1.3 Acceptance test:

Checking of threads on heads a)Galvanizing test b)Mechanical test 7.0 Inspection

All tests and inspections or shall be carried out at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise agreed

by the purchaser and the manufacturers at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the

inspector or third party nominee representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge

to satisfy that the materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserved the

right to have the test carried out at his co.st by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute

regarding the quality of the materials supplied. 8.0 Marking

The pins shall be marked with name of manufacturer, year and name of project.


2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV COMPOSITE POLYMERIC DISC INSULATORS 90 KN

1.0 SCOPE

This specification cover the design, manufactures, testing at manufacturer's works,

transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of 33 kV

composite polymeric disc insulator for 33 kV line.

2.0 STANDARD

Strain insulators Tongue and Clevis type/ ball and socket type, suitable for 33 KV lines shall

be conforming to IEC : 1109 with its latest amendments and revision and having

mechanical failing load of 90 K.N. Insulators conforming to any other internationally

accepted standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned

would also be acceptable. A high class quality, corrosion resistant, fiberglass reinforced

rod is the core of every insulator with ultimate mechanical strength at least twice the

maximum working load.

Where the material is offered according to the inter-national accepted standard a copy of the

specification shall be attached with the tender.

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT:

The composite polymer insulator should be uni-body design and injection molded directly to

the rod and sealed to the end fittings with bead of silicon to give the insulator high

dielectric strength and protect it from all environmental conditions. The design of the

insulator shall be such that stress due to expansion and contraction in any part of the

insulator shall not lead to deterioration.

2.2 The insulator shall be in one piece.

2.3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS.: i. Maximum ambient temperature in shade : 40°C ii. Minimum daily average ambient air temperature :35°C iii. Maximum yearly average ambient air temperature : 30°C iv. Maximum ambient temperature :2°C v. Maximum relative humidity :93% vi. Average number of thunder storms days per annum : 45 days vii. Average number of rainy days per annum : 150 days viii. Average annual rainfall :2280 mm ix. Number of months of tropical monsoon conditions : 5 months x. Maximum wind pressure : 150 Kg/sq.m xi. Altitude not exceeding :1000 M

2.4 BASIC INSULATION LEVEL

The test voltage (minimum requirement) of the insulator shall be as follows:

a) Highest system voltage : 36 KV(rms)

b) Min. Creepage distance : 1050mm

c) Section length : 680mm

d) Rated mechanical tensile load : 70 KN

e) Wet frequency 1 min. withstand voltage : 85KV

f) Dry lighting impulse withstand voltage : 230KV

2.5 MARKING


Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:

a) Name or trade mark of the manufacturer

b) Month and year of manufacture

c) Minimum failing load in KN

d) Country of manufacture

e) ISI certificate mark and name of the project under "TDF 2010-11"

The marking on insulator shall be printed and shall be applied before suitably.

3 TEST

3.1 Type test

The following type tests shall be conducted on a suitable number of individual insulator unit,

components, materials or complete strings:

3.2 Verification of dimensions

3.3 Thermal mechanical performance test

3.4 Power frequency voltage withstand and flashover test (i) dry (ii) wet

3.5 Impulse voltage withstand and flashover test (dry)

3.6 Visible discharge test (dry)

3.7 RIV test (dry)

3.8 Mechanical failing Load Test (for pin insulator only)

3.9 24 hrs. Mechanical strength test (for strain I string insulator only)

4.0 Acceptance Tests

a) Visual examination

b) Verification of dimensions

c) Temperature cycle test

d) Galvanizing test

e) Mechanical performance test

f) Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling

g) Eccentricity test

h) Metallurgical test

i) Grain size

j) Inclusion rating

k) Chemical analysis

l) Microstructure

m) Mechanical failing load test (for Pin Insulator only)

n) Electro-mechanical strength test (for Strain insulator only)

o) Porosity test

p) Puncture test (for strain Insulator only)

4.1 Routine Tests

a. Visual Inspection

b. Mechanical routine test for Strain Insulator only)

c. Electrical routine test (for Strain Insulator only)

4.2 Tests During Manufacture


On all components as applicable

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing

b) Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle inspection for

malleable castings.

c) Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings

d) Hydraulic Internal Pressure tests On disc insulator shells

4.3 Test Reports

4.4 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6)' copies along with one

original. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Owner only after which the

commercial production of the concerned materials shall start.

4.5 Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One copy

shall be returned duly certified by the Owner, only after which the material shall be

despatch.

4.6 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at his works for

periodic inspection by the Owner's representative.

4.7 Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the Contractor. These

shall be produced for verification as and 'When desired by the Owner.

5.0 INSPECTION

5.1 The Owner's representative or third party nominee shall at all times be entitled to have

access to the works and all places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component

parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for

unrestricted inspection of the Contractor's and sub Contractor's works, raw materials,

manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.

5.2 The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Contractor only under packed

condition as detailed in the specification. The Owner shall select samples at random from

the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests.

5.3 After placement of award, the Contractor shall submit fully dimensioned insulator drawings

containing all the details, in four (4) copies to Owner for approval. After getting approval

from Owner and successful completion of all the type tests, the Contractor shall submit 20

more copies of the same drawing to the Owner for further distribution and field use at

Owner's end.

9.0 INSPECTION

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture. The

manufacturer shall afford the inspection representing the purchaser or third party

nominee all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is

being furnished in accordance with this specification.

Routine test shall be carried out for each drum of cables of all types and sizes. Following shall constitute

routine tests :

Conductor Resistance Test


Resistance Test

High Voltage Test at Room Temperature

1.1 While preparing cable schedules for control/protection purpose following shall be ensured:

i. Separate cables shall be used for AC & DC. ii. For different cores of CT & PT/CVT separate cable shall be used iii. At least one (1) cores shall be kept as spare in each copper control cable of 4C, 5C or 7C

size whereas minimum no. of spare cores shall be two (2) for control cables of 10 core or higher size.

iv. For control cabling, including CT/PT circuits, 4.0 sq.mm. size copper cables shall be used per connection

9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON EARTH PIPE

1.0 Scope

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection

and commissioning of the cast iron earth pipe for use on line &substation as earthing pipe

2.0 Standard

The Earth pipe shall comply with the Indian Standard specification IS: 1729/1964 and as amended from

time to time except where they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification. 3.0 Manufacture

Metal used for the manufacture of pipes shall be good quality cast iron.

Casting shall be stripped with all precautions necessary to avoid wrapping and shrinkage defects. They

shall be free from defects which effect the use of castings. By agreement between the purchaser

and the manufacturer, minor defects may be rectified.

Pipes shall be such that they could be cut, drilled or machines.

Bolts, buts &washers shall be made of Steel and well galvanized. The bolts shall be of 200 mm length,

16 mm diameter with 2(two) nos. plain washers, one locknut &one check nut. Threaded length of

the bolts should be 50 mm.

4.0 Sizes

Dimensions of pipe &socket shall be conform to the sizes shown below and as per drawing enclosed:

Nominal length of the pipe with socket 1800 mm

Nominal diameter of pipe 100 mm

External diameter of pipe 110 mm

Thickness of pipe 5 mm

Projection of spigot bead 3 mm

Width of spigot bead 15 mm

Internal dia of socket 129 mm

Thickness of socket 6 mm

Internal depth of socket 70 mm

Internal Radius of socket 5 mm

Width of grooves of socket 10 mm

External dia of grooves socket 155 mm

Depth of grooves of socket 5 mm

Nominal weight of pipe (Exclusive of ear) 21.67 Kg 5.0 Tolerance

The Tolerance of the 100 mm nominal diameter pipe shall be ±3.5 mm

The Tolerance of pipe thickness shall be - 15 percent

The Tolerance of length of the pipe shall be - ± 20mm

The Tolerance of weight of the pipe shall be - 10 Percent

Pipes weighing more than the nominal weight may be accepted provided they comply in every other


respect with the requirements of this standard.

6.0 TEST

Hammer test: Each pipe when tested for soundness by striking with a light hand hammer shall emit

a clear ringing sound.

Hydraulic test : If so required by the purchaser, pipe shall be tested hydraulically at a pressure of

0.4 kg/cm2without showing any sign of leakage, sweating or other defect of any kind. The pressure

shall be applied internally and shall be maintained for not less than 15 seconds. The tests shall be

conducted before coating of pipe.

7.0 Inspection

All tests and inspection shall be carried out at the place of manufacturers unless otherwise agreed by

the purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of purchase. A manufacturer shall afford the

inspector representing the purchaser or third party nominee all reasonable facilities without charge

to satisfy that the materials are being purchased as per specification. The purchaser reserves the

right to have the test carried out at his cost by an independent agency, whenever there is dispute

regarding the quality of materials supplied. All incoming consignment shall be checked at stores.

8.0 Coating

Normally pipes, unless specially ordered, shall be supplied free of coating on surfaces.

9.0 Marking

Each pipe shall have the Trade mark of the manufacturer and nominal size suitably marked on it. The

pipe marked with the ISI certificate mark, shall be preferred. The equipments shall be marked with

name of manufacturer, year and name of project.

10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE

a) Scope

This specification covers the manufacturing, testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage,

erection and commissioning of Galvanised Iron Wire of sizes 4 mm and 5 mm diameter.

1.0 General requirements

It relating to the supply of mild steel wire shall be as per IS: 1387/1967 and the wire shall be drawn from

the wire rods conforming to IS: 7887/1975.

The requirements for chemical composition for the wires shall conform to IS:7887/1975.

Mild steel wire for General Engineering purpose shall be of following sizes:

I) 4mm - diameter (8 SWG)

II) 5mm - diameter (6 SWG)

Tolerance permitted on the diameter of wire shall be as per Table -1 of IS:280/1978.

7.0 Climatic Conditions

The cross arms should be suitable for the climatic condition mentioned In these bidding documents:

8.0 Mechanical Properties

4.1 Tensile Test: Tensile strength of wire when tested in accordance with IS:

1521-1972, shall be within the limits given in Table-2 of IS: 280/1978. 4.2 Wrapping Test: Wires shall be subjected wrapping test in accordance with IS: 1755-1961.

The wire shall withstand without breaking or splitting. being wrapped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened.


9.0 Surface finish

a. The wire shall have galvanized finishes. The galvanized coating of steel wire shall

conform to the requirements for anyone of the types of coatings given in IS: 4826-1968 as per agreement with the purchaser.

b. The coating test for finishes other than galvanized, copper coated or tinned shall be subject to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.

c. Unless otherwise agreed to the method of drawing representative samples of the material and the criteria for conforming shall be as prescribed in Appendix (A) of IS: 280/1978.

d. All finished wires shall be well and cleanly drawn to the dimensions specified. The wire shall be sound, free from splits, surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges and other harmful surface defects.

e. Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitably wrapped.

10.0 Marking

Each coil of wire shall be marked legibly with the finish size of wire, lot number and trade

mark of the name of the manufacturer. The material may also be marked with the ISI

certification mark and name of the project TDF.

11.0 INSPECTION

Inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or third party nominee at any stage of

manufacture. The supplier shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative or

third party nominee at a reasonable time when the work is in progress. Inspection and

acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve

the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification

and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.

11. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DANGER NOTICE PLATE 33 kV

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers Danger Notice Plates to be displayed in accordance with

rule No.35 of

Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS.

Unless otherwise modified in this specification, Danger Notice [Plates shall comply

with IS:-1982

or the latest version thereof.

3.0 DIMENSIONS.

Size of Danger Notice Plates as follows are recommended

For display at 33KV installation - 250 x 200 mm.

The comers of the plate shall be rounded off.

The location of fixing holes as shown in Figs. 1 to 4 is provisional and can be

modified to suit the requirements at site.

4.0 LETTERINGS


All letterings shall be centrally spaced. The dimensions of the letters, figures and

their respective position shall be as shown in figs. 1 to 4. The size of letters in the words

in each language and spacing between them shall be so chosen that these are uniformly

written in the space earmarked for them.

5.0 LANGUAGES

I. Under Rule No. 35 of Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, the owner of every medium, and extra high voltage installation is required to affix permanently in a conspicuous position a danger notice in Hindi or English and in addition, in local language, with the sign of skull and bones.

II. The type and size of lettering to be done in Hindi is indicated in the specimen danger notice plates shown in fig: 2 and 4 and those in English are shown in fig. 1 and 3.

III. Adequate space has been provided in the specimen danger notice plates for having the letterings in local language for the equivalent of Danger, 33000 ‗Volts‘

6.0 MATERIAL AND FINISH

The plate shall be made from mild sheet of at least 1.6 mm thick and vitreous

enameled white, with letters, figures and the conventional skull and cross-bones in signal

red colour (refer 1S: 5-1978) on the front side. The rear side of the plate shall also be

enameled.

7.0 TESTS.

The following tests shall be carried out. i) Visual examination as per 18:2551-1982. ii) Dimensional check as per IS: 2551-1982. iii) Test for weather proofness as per IS: 8709-1977 (or its latest version).

8.0 MARKING.

Maker's name and trade mark and the purchaser's name shall be marked in such a

manner and position on the plates that it does not interfere with the other information.

9.0 PACKING.

The plates shall be packed in wooden crates suitable for rough handling and acceptable for

rail/road.‘

3.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 33/11kV POWER TRANSFORMER

1.0 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION:

1.1. : This specification is intended to cover design, manufacture, assembly testing at

manufacturer‘s works, supply and delivery of three phase 50HZ, 33/11 KV

Delta/Star, Vector Group DY 11, two windings copper would outdoor type, oil


immersed, naturally air cooled Power Transformer with off load tap changer for

10MVA , 5 and 2.5MVA transformer.

1.2. The transformer offered shall be complete with all parts and accessories which are

necessary for their efficient and satisfactory operation The Transformer and all

associated oil filled Equipment shall be supplied complete with insulating new oil

required for first filling including 10% extra oil for future use during commissioning.

The Transformer tank shall be dispatched completely filled with oil and the balance

oil shall be supplied in non returnable sealed drums along with the Transformers.

1.3. . Such parts and accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this

specification whether specifically mentioned or not. Main tank body may be delivered

in unpacked condition, but delicate parts like indicating meter, radiator, conservator,

Pressure Relief Valve, equalizer pipe, buchholz relay etc. shall be packed to avoid

damage due to transportation.

.

2.0 : ISOCERAUNIC CONDITION:

2.1. For the purpose of designing, the following condition shall be considered:

1. Maximum temperature of air in shade 40°C

2. Minimum temperature of air in shade 2°C

3. Maximum temperature of air in sun 45°C

4. Maximum humidity 100%

5. Average number of thunder storm days per 45 Days

annum 6. Maximum rainfall per annum 3500 mm

7. Average rainfall per annum 2200 mm

8. Wind pressure 97.8 Kg/m2

9. Altitude above MSL 100 to 1000 M

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

3.1. Unless otherwise stated, transformer shall be designed, constructed and tested in

accordance with provisions contained in latest revisions of following Indian

standards and Rules.

i) IS : 2026

ii) R.E.C. Manual 10/1976

iii) C.B. I.P. Manual on Transformer

Technical Report 1: Section : A.D. (Revised: 1987)

iv) C.B.I.P. Technical Report No. 72 (June: 1989)


v) Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 (Amended up to date)

vi) IS : 2099 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000 volt

vii) IS : 6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformer

viii) Specification for Transformer oil (IS-335 & IS-1866,1983)

ix) Other applicable Indian Standards.

4.0 GUARANTEES

4.1. The bidder shall guarantee among other things the following:

a) Quality and strength of the material used.

b) Adequate factors of safety for all parts of equipment to

withstand the mechanical and on electrical stresses

developed therein. These will be stated in the tender.

c) Suitability of the design and workmanship of the equipment

for the conditions envisaged in the specification.

d) Efficiencies, Temperature rise and other performance data

on equipment which shall be furnished in the tender.

5.0 WARRANTEES

5.1. The bidder shall be responsible for replacing at site free of cost any part or parts of

the equipment that may prove faulty or fail manufacturing defects on one or more of

the reasons given in clause 4.1 stated above within 5 (five) years commencing

from the date of commissioning

5.2. In case of failure of the transformer, the supplier shall take back the faulty

transformer from its plinth for repair at their own cost (or replace the transformer with

a new transformer) and deliver, at their own cost, unload at the destination sub-

station transformer plinth within 45 days, from the date of intimation of defects to the

satisfaction of the owner, at free of cost. If the repair/replacement will not be

completed within 45 days, then the supplier shall pay penalty @ 0.5% of the contract

price for each calendar week of delay from the end of 45 days from the date of

intimation of defects. Also, the Purchaser reserves the right for forfeiture of the total

Composite Bank Guarantee and all the Securities, available with ASEB, in case the

Supplier fails to pay the penalty by one month before the expiry of the guarantee

period. Also, this will be taken as adverse in all future tenders.

5.3. The bidder shall furnish copies of test certificates of materials used for manufacture

and also the test certificates of the tests conducted on the equipment after

manufacture. The contractor shall also furnish the test certificate of bought out

components for approval by the purchaser.


6.0 MISCELLANEOUS

6.1. Padlocks along with duplicate keys as asked for various valves, marshalling box etc.

shall be supplied by the contractor, wherever applicable.

6.2. Foundation bolt for wheel locking devices of Transformer shall be supplied by the

bidder.

7.0 DELIVERY SCHEDULE:

7.1. The equipment shall be delivered FOR Destination as per schedule specified in the

BPS

8.0 CONFLICT IN CLAUSE:

8.1. In case of any conflict between the Specific Technical Requirements and General

Technical Requirements the requirements indicated as Specific Technical

Requirement shall prevail over the General Technical Requirements

9.0 DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION

9.1. Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviation.

But any deviation felt necessary to improve utility, performance and efficiency of

equipment or to secure overall economy shall be mentioned in the ‗Schedule of

deviations‖ with full justification, supported by documentary evidence. Such

deviations, suggested, may or may not be accepted. But deviations, not mentioned

in the ―Deviation Schedule‖ will not be considered.

10.0 DRAWINGS INCORPORATING THE FOLLOWING PARTICULARS SHALL BE

SUBMITTED WITH THE BID:

10.1. The following drawings and details shall be furnished in triplicate along with the

bid :

10.2. General Arrangement outline drawing with plan, elevation and end views showing

various dimensions of transformer and its vital component including height of the

bottom most portion of bushing from the bottom of base channel and also indicating

thereon physical centre line and position of centre of gravity.

10.3. Details of various types of bushing.

10.4. Three copies of sketches for height of crane hook above ground for lifting and

untanking core, shipping dimensions, complete lists of fittings and devices, net

weights of core, winding, tank, radiator, oil, conservator and total weight, fixing

arrangement of transformer in foundation.


10.5. Illustrative & descriptive literature of the Transformer.

10.6. Maintenance and operation Instructions.

10.7. Type test certificates of similar transformers.

11.0 RATING AND GENERAL PARTICULARS:

11.1. Type: Core type, three phase, oil immersed, step down, two winding copper

wound transformer for outdoor installation.

11.2. Standard Rating:

Continuous with off circuit taps as mentioned in the schedule of requirement.

11.3. Continuous Maximum Rating and Overloads:

As regards maximum rating and temperature rise, all transformers shall comply with the

appropriate requirement of Indian Standards For the purpose of consideration of

maximum temperature rise of oil and winding, the following ambient temperatures are

assumed.

i) Cooling medium : Air

ii) Maximum Ambient Air temperature: 50 °C.

iii) Maximum daily average ambient Air temperature: 40 °C.

iv) Maximum yearly weighted average temperature: 32 °C .

11.4. The transformer may be operated without danger on any particular tapping at the

rated KVA provided the voltage does not vary by more than +10% of the voltage at

that tapping.

11.5. The transformer should be suitable for continuous operation with a

frequency variation of +3% from normal 50Hz. Combined voltage and

frequency variation should not exceed the rated V/f ratio by 10%

11.6. DUTY UNDER FAUALT CONDITION

11.7. It is to be assumed that normal voltage will be maintained on one side of the

Transformer when there is a short circuit between phases or to earth on the other

side.

11.8. The transformer may be directly connected to an underground or overhead line

and may be switched into and out of service together with or without its associated

incoming/outgoing line.

11.9. The thermal ability to withstand short circuit shall be Two seconds (2 Sec.)

without injury for 3 phase dead short circuit at the terminals.


12.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

SN Particulars

1. Rating 10MVA 5MVA 2.5

M

V

A

2. Number of Phases Three

3. Vector group Dyn-11

4. Type of installation Outdoor

5. Frequency 50HZ ( +/- )3%

6. Cooling Medium Insulating Oil

7. Type of Cooling ONAN

8. Highest continuous system

Voltage

High Voltage :36kV

Low Voltage :12kV

9. Winding Connection

10. Material Electrolytic Copper

11. High Voltage Winding DELTA

12. Low Voltage Winding STAR

13. Method of System Earthing Solidly grounded on LV side

10

M

V

A

5

M

V

A

2.5

MV

A

14. Type of Tap Changer ON

Lo

ad

OFF

Lo

ad

OFF

Lo

ad


15. Range of Tapping (+) 3% to (-) 9% in steps of 3% on

HV side

16. Type of Insulation and Insulation

Level

33kV 11kV

17. a) Type of insulation Uniform Uniform

b) One minute power frequency

withstand Voltage(kV rms)

70kV 28kV

c) Lightning Impulse withstand

voltage

170 75

18. Terminal Details

19. 33kV Termination (i) ACSR/AAAC Wolf conductor,

Bus, (or IPs tube as

applicable) for connecting to

bushing terminals.

20. 11 KV Termination Cable 300/630 mm2, 1-core Al.

Armoured XLPE Cable

21. Maximum Temperature rise over

ambient of 50° C

a) Temperature rise of top oil

40° C (measured by

Thermometer

b) Temperature rise of winding 45° C (measured by

resistance)

C) Maximum Winding

temperature in Deg. C

105° C

d) Maximum Permissible

value of Average

temperature of winding

after 3 sec Maximum

Permissible short circuit:

250° C

12.1. Over load capacity : As per IS: 6600

12.2. NOISE LEVEL AT RATED VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY: As per NEMA

Pub TR-1.

13.0 GUARANTEED LOSSES


1. Impedance at rated MVA at

75° C without (-) ve

tolerance

8.35% 7.15% 6.25%

2. No Load Loss 6.0KW 4.0KW 2.1KW

3. Load Loss at 75° C 44.0KW 24KW 14.0.0KW

13.1. Tolerance of losses shall be guided by the relevant clauses of relevant IS

standard. The bidder shall state both no load loss and load loss at rated

voltage and frequency and loss figures shall be firm and guaranteed.

14.0 Evaluation of Losses:

14.1. For the purpose of comparison of bids, the capitalized cost of iron loss (KW) and

load losses (KW) shall be added to the quoted price of transformer at the following

rates.

Iron loss per KW – Rs. 287 834.00

Copper loss per KW – Rs. 86349.00

14.2. If any or all actual losses after test are found to exceed the guaranteed value, the

penalty will be imposed on the excess loss over the corresponding guaranteed loss

(any or all). The penalty shall be calculated for the excess of no load loss and for the

excess of the load losses at rates specified above. For fraction of a KW the penalty

shall be applied prorate basis. If the test figure of. losses are less than the

guaranteed value, no bonus will be allowed. Any changes in the figure assigned for

transformer losses will not be permitted after opening of bids and bid evaluation will

be carried out on the basis of information made available at the time of bid opening.

15.0 SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS

15.1. Manufacturer shall submit theoretical calculations in support of the ability to

withstand short circuit on consideration of highest value that may

16.0 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATES

16.1. Copies of performance certificates of sImilar Equipment supplied to various

utilities shall have to be furnished along with Tender

17.0 LIST OF PAST SUPPLIES

17.1. The bidder shall furnish documents in support of Supply, Delivery of similar

Equipment indicating thereon names of the organization, quantity ordered, quantity

supplied along with tender.


18.0 DESIGN, STANDARDIZATION AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION FEATURES

18.1. .All material used shall be best quality and of the class most suitable for working

under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature and

atmospheric conditions without distortion or deterioration or the setting up of undue

stresses which may impair suitability of the various parts for the work which they

have to perform.

18.2. Large parts, particularly removable ones, shall be interchangeable. Pipes and

pipe fittings, screws, studs, nuts and bolts used for external connections shall be as

per the relevant standards. Steel bolts and nuts exposed to atmosphere shall be of

hot deep galvanized

18.3. Nuts, bolts and pins used inside the transformers and tap changer compartments

shall be provided with lock washers or locknuts. Exposed parts shall not have

pockets where water can collect.

18.4. Internal design of transformer shall ensure that air is not trapped in any location.

Material in contact with oil shall be such as not to contribute to the formation of acid

in oil. Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.

18.5. Labels, indelibly marked shall be provided for all identifiable accessories like

relays, switches, current transformers etc. All label plates shall be of in corrodible

material.

18.6. All internal connections and fastening shall be capable of operating under

overloads and over-excitation, allowed as per specified standard without injury.

18.7. Transformers and accessories shall be designed to facilitate proper operation,

inspection, maintenance and repairs. No patching, plugging, shimming or other,

such means of overcoming defects, discrepancies or errors will be accepted.

19.0 CORES :

19.1. Core shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled non-aging grain oriented

silicon steel laminations having magnite coating as insulation. Successful bidder will

offer the core for inspection and/or approval by the purchaser during manufacturing

stage.

19.2. Manufacturer’s call notice for the purpose should be accompanied with the

following documents as applicable as a proof towards use of prime core materials:

i) Invoice of the supplier

ii) Mill‘s Test Certificate

iii) Packing Lists

iv) Bill of landing

v) Bill of entry Certificate to Customs Core materials shall be procured either from


the core manufacturer or through their accredited marketing organisation of

repute. Bidder should preferably have in-house Core cutting facility for

proper monitoring and Control on quality. The materials used for insulation

shall have high inter lamination resistance and rust inhibiting property. It shall

not have any tendency to absorb moisture or to react with insulating oil.

19.3. The assembled core shall be securely clamped on the limbs and yoke with

uniform pressure so as to minimise noise emission form it.

19.4. The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a

copper strap. The bottom clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the

following methods

(i) by connection through vertical tie rods to the top

structure

(ii) by direct metal to metal contact with the tank

base by the weight of the core and windings,

(iii) by a connection to the top structure on the same

side of core the main earth connection to the

tank.

19.5. All parts of the cores shall be robust design capable of withstanding any shocks

to which they may by subjected during lifting, transport, installation and service.

19.6. Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable the core and winding to be lifted.

19.7. Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of the core and winding

relative to the tank during transport and installation or while in service.

19.8. The supporting frame work of the cores shall be so designed as to avoid the

presence of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the

drain valve or cause trapping of air during filling.

19.9. The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be

such as to withstand a voltage of 2000 VAC at 50HZ for one minute

.

20.0 FLUX DENSITY OF CORE

20.1. The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yokes at principal (normal)

tapping and at rated frequency shall not exceed 1.6 Tesla (16000 lines per sq.cm) at

normal voltage and 1.9 Tesla (19000 lines per sq.cm) under overvoltage condition

as specified in this specification.

20.2. Prior to inspection and testing of the Transformer the supplier shall submit on

request following curves of the core manufacturer.

i) Flux density vs Core loss.

ii) Flux density vs Excitatioin


21.0 WINDING:

21.1. All windings shall be fully insulated. 12.02 Power transformer shall be designed

to withstand the impulse and power frequency test voltages specified in clause no.

9.01.

21.2. The windings shall be designed to reduce to a minimum the out of balance

forces in the transformer at all voltage ratios.

21.3. The insulation of Transformer winding and connections shall be free from

insulating material liable to soften, ooze out shrink or collapse and shall be non-

catalytic and chemically inactive to transformer oil during service.

21.4. The stacks of windings shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before final

assembly. Adjustable device shall be provided for taking up any possible shrinkage

of coils in service.

21.5. All the insulating materials to be used in the transformer shall preferably be of

class- A insulation as specified in Indian Standards. The test certificate of the raw

materials shall be made available by the Transformer manufacturer on request

during inspection and testing.

21.6. The coil clamping arrangement and the finished dimensions of any oil ducts shall

be such that it will not impede the free circulation of oil through the ducts.

21.7. The windings and connection of transformer shall be braced to withstand shocks

which may occur during transport or due to switching short circuit and other transient

conditions during service.

21.8. Coil clamping rings, if provided shall be of steel or suitable insulating material.

Axially laminated material other than bakelised paper shall not be used.

22.0 INTERNAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS:

22.1. General : All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual

core laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be

maintained at fixed potential.

22.2. Earthing of coil clamping rings : Where coil clamping rings are of metal at

earth potential, each ring shall be connected to the adjacent core clamping structure

on the same side of transformer as the main earth connection.

23.0 TANKS:

23.1. Construction : Conventional type tank shall be constructed. The Transformer

tank and cover shall be fabricated from good commercial grade low Carbon steel

suitable for welding and of adequate thickness. The tanks of all transformers shall be

complete with all accessories and shall be designed so as to allow the complete

transformer in the tank and filled with oil, to be lifted by crane or jacks, transported


by rail, road without overstraining any joint and without causing subsequent leakage

of oil.

23.2. The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding vaccum gauge pressure

68.0 KN per Sq, metres ( 500 mm. of HG).

23.3. The under carriage of the tank shall be made of channel of suitable size and

design. The base of each tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move

the complete transformer unit by skidding in any direction without injury when using

plate or rails.

23.4. Where the base is of a channel construction, it shall be designed to prevent

retention of water. Tank stiffeners shall be designed to prevent retention of water.

23.5. Wherever possible the Transformer tank and its accessories shall be designed

without pockets wherein gas may accumulate. Where pockets cannot be avoided,

pipes shall be provided to vent the gas into the main expansion pipe.

23.6. All joints other than those which may have to be broken shall be welded when

required they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted with

suitable oil tight gaskets which shall give satisfactory service under the operating

conditions and guaranteed temperature rise conditions. Special attention shall be

given to the methods of making hot oil tight joints between the tank and the cover as

also between the cover and bushing and all other outlets to ensure that the joints

can be remade at site satisfactorily.

24.0 TANK COVER

24.1. :Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength and shall not distort when lifted.

Inspection openings shall be provided as necessary to give easy access to bushings

or changing ratio or testing the earth connection. Each inspection opening shall be of

ample size for the purpose for which it is provided. The tank cover and inspection

cover shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement.

24.2. The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets for thermometer and for the bulbs of

Oil and Winding temperature indicators. The thermometer pocket shall be fitted with

a captive screwed top to prevent the ingress of water. Protection shall be provided,

where necessary, for each capillary tube. The pocket shall be located in the position

of maximum oil temperature and it shall be possible to remove the instrument bulbs

without lowering the oil in the tank.

24.3. Turrets should provided on tank cover to house the bushings. The turrets of both

HV & LV bushings should be connected through pipes with main tank Buchholtz

Relay pipe to drive out trapped air or should have air release plug to drive out

trapped air as the case may be.

25.0 OFF LOAD TAP CHANGER.

25.1. The transformers shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the tap

changing type on the HV side for HV variation of +3% to (-) 9% in equal 5 steps of

3.0% for varying its effective transformation ratio whilst the transformers are off-load.


The tap changing device shall be off-circuit type. The tap changing shall be carried

out by means of an externally operated tapping switch capable of being located and

locked in any required position.

25.2. The location of tap changing device shall be such that an operator can very

easily change the tap, while standing on the ground without the aid of any climbing

platform. A warning plate indicating that switch shall not be operated in ―ON‖ position

is to be provided.

25.3. The contact resistance between the contact points should be less than 20µΩ.

The manufacturer should show the resistance to the inspector at the time of

inspection.

26.0 CONSERVATOR VESSELS.

26.1. Conservator vessels : The conservator should be air cell/ atmoseal type to

prevent direct contact of Transformer oil with atmospheric air for retarding oxidation

contamination of oil. The Air cell shall be made from suitable material with inner

coating resistant to transformer oil & outer coating resistant to ozone & weathering.

26.2. The conservator shall be provided with necessary valves to drive out the air in

the space between conservator wall & air cell during filling of oil, drain valves for

complete draining of oil and cut off valves etc.

26.3. The conservator complete with necessary valves shall be provided in such a

position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the transformer from H.V &

L.V SIDE.

26.4. The conservator shall be a capacity to meet the requirement of expansion of the

total cold oil volume in the Transformer & cooling equipment.

26.5. The conservator shall be designed so that it can drain oil completely by means of

the drain valve provided when mounted. One end of the conservator shall be bolted

into position so that it can be removed for cleaning purpose.

26.6. The conservator shall be provided with different valves for filling of oil manually at

site.

27.0 OIL GAUGES

27.1. Normally one Magnetic type oil gage shall be provided. The oil level at 30 Deg.

C. shall be marked on the guage.

27.2. CONNECTION : The oil connection from the transformer tank to the conservator

vessel shall be arranged at a raising angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal up to

the Buchholtz Relay and shall consist of pipe with inside diameter 50 mm./80 mm.

as per capacity of the Transformer and as per IS:3639.

27.3. Two valves shall be provided between the conservator & Transformer main tank

to cut off the oil supply to the transformer after providing a straight run of pipe for at

least a length of five times the internal diameter of the pipe on the tank side ofthe

Gas and Oil actuated Relay and at least three times the internal diameter of the pipe

on the conservator side of the Gas and Oil actuated Relay. The valves should be


fitted on both side of the Gas and Oil Actuated Relay.

28.0 BREATHER :

28.1. Each conservator vessel shall be fitted with a glass container type breather in

which silicagel is dehydrating agent and so designed that the passage of air through

the silicagel the external atmosphere is not continuously in contact with the oil.

.

28.2. The moisture absorption indicated by a change in colour of the tinted crystals can

be easily observed from the distance.

28.3. All breathers shall be mounted at approximately 1400 mm above ground level

and shall be connected to the air cell of the conservator through pipe for the purpose

of breathing during contraction or expansion of the air cell.

29.0 BUSHINGS

29.1. Bushings for 36 KV and below shall be of solid porcelain type. These bushings

shall be suitable for bare ACSR conductor connections.

29.2. The bushing shall have sufficient insulation to avoid leakage to ground and shall

be so located as to provide adequate electrical clearance between bushing or

various voltages and between bushings and grounded parts. The insulation class of

the high voltages neutral bushing shall be properly co-ordinated with the insulation

class of the neutral of the high voltage winding.

29.3. Stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the bushing insulator

shall not lead to the development of defects. Outdoor insulators and fittings shall be

unaffected by atmospheric conditions due to weather, fuses, ozone, acids, dust and

rapid changes of air temperature. Any stress shield shall be considered as integral

part of the bushing assembly.

29.4. Porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal and where necessary gaskets

shall be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping

surface in contact with gasket shall be accurately grounded and free from glaze

29.5. Fixing material used shall be of suitable quality and properly applied and shall not

enter into chemical action with the metal parts or cause fracture by contraction

expansion in service. Cement thickness shall be as small and even as possible and

proper care shall be taken to centre and locate individual parts correctly during

cementing. All porcelain insulators shall be designed to facilitate clearance.

29.6. Each porcelain bushing or insulator, and paper bushing shall have marked upon

it the manufacturer‘s identification mark, and such other marks as may be required

to assist in the representative selection of batches for the purpose of the sample

tests.

29.7. Clamps and fittings shall be made of steel and galvanized. The bushing flanges

shall not be re-entrant type (shape) which may trap air.


29.8. Each bushing shall be so coordinated with the transformer insulation, that the

flashover will occur outside the tank.

29.9. All porcelain used in bushings shall be of wet process, homogeneous and free

from cavities or other flaws. The glazing shall be uniform in colour (brown) and free

from blisters, burns and other defects. Porcelain shall be thoroughly vitrified and

shall be impervious to moisture.

29.10. All bushing shall have puncture strength greater than dry flashover value.

29.11. Creepage distance will be kept 27 mm/KV. Bushings may be provided with

weather shield.

29.12. The bidder is requested to give the guarantee withstand voltage for the above

and also furnish a calibration curve with different settings of the co-ordination gap to

enable the purchaser to decide the actual gap settings. Tenderer‘s

recommendations are also invited to this respect. During spark gap flashover, the

arc shall remain away from the housing insulator.

29.13. Each terminal (including neutral) shall be distinctly marked and coloured for

phase voltage and phase rotation on the primary secondary and tertiary sides in

accordance with the diagram of connection supplied with the transformer, the

system of marking shall conform IS 2026-1962 amended upto date.

29.14. Stress due to expansion and contraction in any part of the bushing shall not lead

to deterioration.

29.15. Bushing shall be designed and tested to comply with the applicable standards.

29.16. Bushings rated for 400A and above shall have non-ferrous flanges and hardware.

29.17. Fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized.

29.18. Bushing shall be so located on the transformer that full flashover strength will be

utilized. Minimum clearances as required for the BIL shall be realized between live

parts and live parts to earthed structures.

29.19. All applicable routine and type tests certificates of the bushings shall be furnished

for approval.

29.20. Bushings shall be supplied with bimetallic/terminal connectors/ clamp suitable for

fixing to bushing terminal and the PURCHASER‘S specified conductors. The

connectors/clamp shall be rated to carry the bushing rated current without exceeding

a temperature rise of 55° C over an ambient of 40° C. the connector/ clamp shall be

designed to be corona free at the maximum rated line to ground voltage.

29.21. Bushing of identical voltage rating shall be interchangeable.

29.22. Each bushing shall be so coordinated with the transformer insulation that all

flashover will occur outside tank.


30.0 FILTER AND DRAIN VALVES, SAMPLING DEVICES AND AIR RELEASE PLUGS :

30.1. Each Transformer shall be fitted with the following :

30.2. The filter and drain valves as specified.

A drain valve as below shall be fitted to each conservator. For diameter upto 650

mm : Size of the valve 15 mm : for diameter above 650 mm : Size of the valve

25 mm.

Suitable oil sampling device shall be provided at the top and bottom of the main

tank. The sampling device shall not be fitted on the filter valves specified

above.

One 15mm air release plug on the main tank of the Transformer.

30.3. All other valves opening to atmosphere shall be fitted with blank flanges.

Valves shall be of forged carbon steel upto 50 mm size and of gun metal or of cast iron

bodies with gun metal fittings for sizes above 50 mm. They shall be of full way type with

screwed ends and shall be opened by turning counter clock wise when facing the hand

wheel. There shall be no oil leakage when the valves are in closed position.

30.4. Each valve shall be provided with an indicator to show the open and closed

position and shall be provided with facility for padlocking in either open or closed

position. All screwed valves shall be furnished with pipe plugs for protection.

Padlocks with duplicate keys shall be supplied along with the valves.

30.5. All valves except screwed valves shall be provided with flanges having machined

faces drilled to suit the applicable requirements. Oil tight blanking plates shall be

provided for each connection for use when any radiator is detached and for all

valves opening to atmosphere. If any special radiator valve tools are required, the

Contractor shall supply the same.

30.6. Each transformer shall be provided with following valves on the tank so located

as to completely drain the tank.

Two filter valves on diagonally opposite corners, of 50 mm size.

Oil sampling valves not less than 8 mm at top and bottom of main tank

30.7. Valves between radiators and tank.

30.8. Valve prior to and after the Buchholz Relay.

31.0 COOLING PLANT

31.1. General :Radiators shall be so designed as to avoid pockets in which moisture


may collect and shall withstand the pressure tests.

31.2. The radiator tubes / fins shall be seamless, made of mild steel having as

minimum wall thickness of approx. 1.2mm and a clean bright internal surface free

from dust and scale. They shall be suitably braced to protect them from mechanical

shocks, normally met in transportation and to damp the modes of vibration

transmitted by the active part of the transformer in service.

31.3. Each cooler unit shall have a lifting eye.

31.4. Radiator Valves: The butterfly or similar metal valves shall be provided for

isolating detachable radiator assembly.

31.5. One cock each at the bottom of radiator stack shall be provided for draining oil

from radiator stacks.

31.6. Air release plug each at the top of radiator stack shall be provided for release of

air from radiator stack.

31.7. Removable blanking plates shall be provided to permit the blanking off the main

oil Connection of each cooler.

31.8. Radiator fixing bands in top & bottom of radiators are to be provided to minimise

the vibration of the same.

32.0 LIFTING AND HAULAGE FACILITY :

32.1. Each tank shall be provided with Lifting lugs suitable for lifting of transformer

complete with oil.

32.2. A minimum of four jacking lugs, in accessible positions to enable the transformer

complete with oil to be raised or lowered using hydraulic or screw jacks .

32.3. The minimum height of the lugs above the base shall be as follows

(a) for transformers up to and including 10 tones weight-300mm

(b) for Transformers above 10 tones weight – 500 mm

32.4. Suitable haulage holes shall be provided.

33.0 INSULATING OIL :

33.1. The Transformer and all associated oil filled Equipment shall be supplied

complete with insulating new oil required for first filling including 10% extra oil for

future use during commissioning. The Transformer tank shall be dispatched

completely filled with oil and the balance oil shall be supplied in non returnable

sealed drums along with the Transformers.

33.2. The Insulating oil shall conform to the requirement of IS:335.

34.0 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE :


34.1. Pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient sizes for rapid release of

pressure that may by generated within the tank, and which might result in damage to

the equipment. The device shall operate at a static pressure of less than the

hydraulic test pressure for transformer tank. Means shall be provided to prevent

ingress of rain.

34.2. It shall be mounted on the cover of the main tank and shall be designed to

prevent gas accumulation.

34.3. Spring loaded setting type Pressure Relief Valve having suitable opening Port

hole according to the capacity of the transformers should be provided.

34.4. The pressure relief valve should have provision of visual indication for opening of

the valve and also Contract/Micro Switch arrangement for alarm/Tripping Function.

35.0 AXLES AND WHEELS :

35.1. The Transformer shall be provided with flanged bi-directional wheels as

mentioned below :

Flanged wheel suitable for use on a 1435 mm / 1676 mm guage track.

.

35.2. The wheels shall be suitable for being turned through an angle of 90 Deg. and

locked in that position when the tank is jacked up.

35.3. All wheels shall be detachable and shall be made of Cast Iron or Steel. Suitable

locking arrangement shall be provided to prevent the accidental movement of the

transformer.

36.0 CLEANING & PAINTING

36.1. Before painting or filling with oil all galvanised parts shall be completely cleaned

and free from rust, scale and grease and all external surface cavities on castings

shall be filled by metal deposition.

36.2. The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil filled chambers and internal

structural steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and rust by sand

blasting or other approved method. These surfaces shall be painted with hot oil

resisting varnish or paint. Unexposed welds need not be painted.

36.3. Except for nuts, bolts and washers, which may have to be removed for

maintenance purposes, all external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats

of paint.

36.4. The primary coat shall be applied immediately after cleaning. The second coat

shall be of oil paint of weather resisting nature and preferably of a shade or colour

easily distinguishable from the primary and final coasts shall be applied after the

primarycoats have been touched up where necessary.


36.5. The final coat shall be of glossy oil and weather resisting non fading paint of Dark

Admiralty Grey shade no. 632 of IS:5.

36.6. Primer paint shall be ready made zinc chrome as per IS: 104: Intermediate and

final costs of paint shall be as per IS: 2932.

36.7. All interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and kiosks except those which have

received anti-corrosion treatment shall receive three coats of paint applied to the

thoroughly cleaned metal surface as per procedure mentioned above. The final coat

shall be of a light coloured anti-condensation mixture.

36.8. Any damage to paint work incurred during delivery shall be made good by the

manufacturer by thoroughly cleaning the damage portion and applying the full

number of coats of paint that had been applied before the damage was caused.

37.0 EARTHING TERMINAL

37.1. Two earthing terminals capable of carrying the full amount of lower voltage short

circuit current of transformer continuously for a period of 5 Second Provision shall

be made at positions close to each of the bottom two corners of the tank for bolting

the earthing terminals to the tank structure to suit local condition.

38.0 TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICE:

38.1. Oil temperature indicator with two electrical contacts for alarm and trip

purposes, shall be provided with anti vibration mounting. The oil temperature

indicator shall be housed in the marshalling box.

38.2. The winding temperature indicator with two electrical contacts for alarm & trip

purposes shall be provided with anti vibration mounting. The winding temperature

indicator shall be housed in the marshalling Box.

38.3. The Oil and Winding temperature indicator should be of renowned make

preferably of ―Perfect Control‖ or ―Precimeasure‖. The scale on the dial of the

thermometer should be 0°C to 150°C. The angular displacement of thermometer

should be 270 Deg.

38.4. The signaling contact of WTI & OTI shall be set to operate at the following

temperature:

OIL : Alarm-85 °C, Trip – 95 ° C

WINDING : Alarm-100 °C, Trip – 110 °C

38.5. The tripping contacts of indicator shall be adjustable to close the winding

temperature indicator between 60 Deg.C and 120 Deg.C. The alarm contacts of

indicator shall be adjustable to close between 50 deg.C & 100 Deg.C.

38.6. All contacts shall be adjustable on a scale and shall be accessible on removal of


the cover. The Temperature indicators shall be so designed that it shall be possible

to check the operation of contacts and associated Equipments.

38.7. For measuring winding temperature a heater coil fed from a C.T. has to be

provided on the pocket for winding temperature indicator bulb. The connection from

C.T. to heater should be through a link arrangement on the tank cover suitably

housed in a weather proof box so that C.T. current and heater coil resistance can be

checked. WTI C.T. secondary should be of 5 Amps, rating.

38.8. Accuracy class of both OTI and WTI shall be ±1% or better.

39.0 MARSHALLING BOX

39.1. A sheet steel 3.15mm thick vermin proof, well ventilated and weather proof

marshalling box of a suitable construction shall be provided for the

transformer ancillary apparatus. The box shall have domed or sloping roofs

and the interior & exterior painting shall be in accordance with painting clause

specified. The degree of protection shall be IP-55.

39.2. The marshalling box shall accommodate.

Winding and oil temperature indicator.

Terminal Blocks and gland plates for incoming and outgoing Cables.

One space heater operated by 220 V.A.C. Aux. Supply, Cubicle illuminating lamp with

door switch.

39.3. All incoming cables shall enter the kiosk from the bottom and the gland

plate shall not be less than 450 mm from the base of the box. The gland plate

and associated compartment shall be sealed in suitable manner to prevent the

ingress from the cable trench

39.4. All the above equipment shall be mounted on panels and back of panel

wiring shall be used for Interconnection. The temperature indicators shall be

so mounted that the dials are visible by standing at ground level.

39.5. Door of the compartment shall be provided with glass window of adequate

size. Ventilation louvers shall be provided.

39.6. The schematic diagram of the circuitry inside the marshalling box be

prepared and fixed inside the door

40.0 GAS AND OIL ACATUATED RELAYS

40.1. Each transformer shall be provided with gas and oil actuated Relay (Buchholtz

Relay) equipment conforming of IS:3637 double float type with one set of alarm

contacts, one set of trip contacts and a testing pet cock. The contacts shall be wired

with a P.V.C. armoured cable.


40.2. A machined surface shall be provided on the top of Relay to facilitate the setting

of Relay and to check the mounting angle in the pipe and cross level of the Relay.

40.3. The pipe work shall be so arranged that all gas arising from the Transformer shall

pass into the gas and oil actuated Relay. The oil circuit through the Relay shall not

form a delivery path in parallel with any circulating oil pipe.

41.0 RATING DIAGRAM AND PROPERTY PLATES :

41.1. The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer tank at a suitable height so

that the particulars could be read by standing at ground level.

41.2. A rating plate bearing the data specified in the relevant clauses of IS:2026

including figures of temperature rise of oil and winding and high voltage test values.

that the equipment belongs to APDCL with reference of purchase order is also to be

indicated.

41.3. A diagram plate showing the internal numbering of taps, tapping switch

connection of windings and also the voltages vector relationship in accordance with

IS:2026 and in addition a plan view of the transformer giving the correct physical

relationship of the terminals. No load voltage shall be indicated for each tap. Details

of C.T particulars w.r.o phase, Neutral &WTI CT.

42.0 CENTRE OF GRAVITY :

42.1. : The centre of gravity of the assembled transformer shall be low and as near the

vertical centre line as possible. The transformer shall be stable with or without oil.

42.2. If the centre of gravity is eccentric relative to track either with or without oil, its

location shall be shown on the outline drawing.

.

43.0 FOUNDATION :

43.1. The tenderer shall furnish foundation plan of the transformer showing the fixing

arrangement of the transformer so that the purchase may be able to finalise the

foundation drawings.

44.0 TEST AND INSPECTION :

44.1. Routine Tests :

44.2. All transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests at the

manufacturer‘s works. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the details

specified in IS:2026.

i) Measurement of winding resistance.

ii) Measurement of turns ratio for all sets wndings on each tap


iii) Polarity and phase vector relationship.

iv) Measurement of no load loss and no load current.

v) Measurement of impedance voltage at normal , maximum and minmum

tap

vi) Measurement of insulation resistance between windings and between

windings and earth

vii) Measurement of load loss.

viii) Induced over voltage withstand test.

ix) Separate source voltage withstand test.

x) Oil Leakage gas collection, oil surge and voltage test on gas and oil actuated relay for on

load tap changer.

xi) Magnetic balance test.

xii) Testing of Phase & Neutral C.T., as applicable, in accordance with provisions in the

relevant I.S.

xiii) Oil leakage test of tnansformer tanks at a pressure equals to the normal pressure plus 35

KN/ sq.M measured at the base of tank.

44.3. Type Test

44.4. In addition to routine Tests mentioned above the transformer shall be subjected

to all kinds of Type and Acceptance Test in accordance with Relevant I.S. (IS:2026)

with latest amendment if any.

44.5. Bidder should submit Type Test report from NABL/Govt. approved

Laboratories along with their offer having identical technical parameters as

that of the tendered item failing which their offer may not be technically

accepted.

44.6. However, if it is found that the bidder has submitted Type tests Report but

those have not been conducted on identical Design of equipment/material as

per specification of APDCL, the same may be accepted subject to the

following conditions: APDCL at his discretion request the successful bidders

to conduct Type Tests on identical design as per specification

44.7. . Such Type tests/special tests, if required to be carried out at NABL/Govt.

approved Laboratories in presence of APDCL engineers for which no extra

cost shall be charged to the APDCL.

44.8. However, the bidders who have not submitted such Type Test/Dynamic Short

Circuit Test report but if their offer is considered technically acceptable by the


purchasers on the basis of other credentials, they will have to carry out such tests at

NABL/Govt. approved Laboratories in presence of APDCL engineers before

effecting physical delivery against Purchase Order for which no extra cost shall be

charged to the APDCL. Routine Test have to be carried out in presence of

APDCL engineers before carrying out type test.

45.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING

45.1. Inspection and testing as already mentioned the equipment shall be subjected to

routine and other acceptance tests as per provisions in the relevant I.S.

45.2. The APDCL reserves the right to send its Engineers if so desires to witness

manufacturing process and to reject either raw materials or finished products found

to be not complying with the requirement of the specification and also shall have the

right to select any/all equipment from the lot offered for tests.

45.3. The manufacturer shall give at least (21) twenty one days’ advance notice

regarding readiness of such inspection and testing and shall submit six sets of the

works test certificates of the materials/equipment offered for inspection and testing

indicating probable date of inspection and testing.

45.4. The manufacturer shall arrange all possible facilities for such inspection and

testing at any time during the course of manufacture free of cost.

46.0 TEST CERTIFICATE

46.1. Five copies of the approved Test Certificates as mentioned above are to be

furnished to the APDCL before dispatch of the equipment.

47.0 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS TO BE SUBMITTED BY SUCCESSFUL BIDDER

47.1. The bidder shall furnish, within fifteen days after issuing of letters Award, six

copies each of the following drawings/documents incorporating name of project and

transformer rating for approval.

i. Detailed overall general arrangement drawing showing front and side

elevations and plan of the transformer and all accessories including

radiators and external features with details of dimension, spacing of

wheels in either direction of motion, net weights and shipping weights,

crane lift for untanking, size of lugs and eyes, bushing lifting

dimensions, clearances between HV and LV terminals and ground,

quantity of insulating oil etc.

ii. Foundation plan showing loading on each wheel and jacking points

with respect to centre line of transformer.

iii. GA drawing/details of bushing and terminal connectors.

iv. Name plate drawing with terminal marking and connection diagrams.

v. Wheel locking arrangement drawing.


vi. Transportation dimension drawings.

vii. Interconnection diagrams.

viii. Over fluxing withstand time characteristics of transformer.

ix. GA drawing of marshalling box.

x. Control scheme/wiring diagram of marshalling box.

xi. Technical leaflets of major components and fittings.

xii. As built drawing of schematic, wiring diagrams etc.

xiii. Setting of oil temperature indicator, winding temperature indicator.

xiv. Completed technical data sheets.

xv. HV/LV conductor bushing.

xvi. Bushing assembly.

xvii. Bi-metallic connector for connection to ―Wolf‖/PANTHER ACSR/AAAC

conductor

xviii. Radiator type assembly.

47.2. All drawings/documents, technical data sheets and test

certificates/results/calculations shall be furnished.

47.3. Any approval given to the detailed drawings by the purchaser shall not

relieve the contractor of the responsibility for correctness of the drawing and

in the manufacture of the equipment. The approval given by the purchaser

shall be general with overall responsibility with contractor.

47.4. Installation, operation and maintenance manual of transformer, associated

equipment like buchholtz Relay, temperature indicators, oil level indicator etc.

The manual shall clearly indicate the installation method, check-ups and tests

to be carried out before and after commissioning of the transformer.

47.5. One copy of manual, set of approved drawings shall be submitted to the

CGM(PPD)/APDCL before dispatch of the Transformer.

47.6. In addition one set of approved drawing, manual for transformer shall be

send to the respective consignee officer in water proof folder at the time of

delivery of the transformer.

48.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

48.1. Bidder shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars of equipment offered as per


Schedule ‗B‘ To be provided along with final NIT specification),

49.0 ACCESSORIES

49.1. All accessories as specified in the schedule A are to be provided. Any other part

necessary for smooth operation of the transformer if omitted it is the manufacturers

responsibility to include the same.

50.0 SPARE PARTS:

50.1. The Tenderer shall submit a recommended list of spare parts for five years of

operation along with item wise price for each item of spares as stated in Schedule B


SCHEDULE – A

FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

The following fittings and accessories shall be supplied with each Transformer :

1. Outdoor type bushing – 11V-3 Nos. and LV-4 Nos.

2. Conservator with aircell and supporting bracket or structure as the case may be.

3. Isolating valve for conservator in between conservator and Buchholtz Relay and in

between Buchholtz relay and main tank..

4. Conservator valves for driving out air between air cell & wall of conservator & connection to

breather.

5. Conservator drain valve.

6. Dial type oil level indicator complete with alarm contact.

7. Silica gel breather with oil seal and connecting pipe. The breather shall be accessible for

inspection from ground.

8. Spring loaded setting type pressure relief Valve having suitable opening Port. Hole &

provision of visual indication for opening of the valve & Alarm/Trip contact arrangement.

9. Access/inspection holes with bolted cover for access to inner ends of bushing.

10. Cover lifting eyes.

11. Lifting eyes for core frame with windings.

12. Tap changing arrangement with hand wheel for Off-Load tap-

13. Air release plugs on top of cover and pressure equalizer pipe for bushing turret.

14. Upper filter valve and bottom filter valve.

15. Drain valve.

16. Top and bottom oil sampling devices. Provision for oil sample collection during process of

filtration should be made.

17. Lifting lugs.

18. Jacking pads with handling holes at four corners.

19. Transport lugs.

20. Under carriage base channel.


21. Tank earthing terminals – 2 Nos.

22 Buchholtz relay double float type with one set of alarm contacts, one set of trip contacts

and testing pet cock. The contacts should be wired with a PVC armoured cable.

23. Dial thermometer for winding temperature with alarm contacts and Trip contacts.

24. Dial thermometer for oil temperature with alarm contacts and Trip Contacts.

25. An additional pocket for inserting thermometer for oil temperature indication.

26. Weather proof control cabinet for marshalling terminal connections from protective and

indicative devices. The cabinet shall be provided with incandescent filament lighting,

heater and plugs etc.

28. Rating plate, as per I.S.S.

29. Diagram Plate : As per clause 28.

30. Property label.


SCHEDULE – B

SPARE PARTS:

The mandatory spare parts shall include but not be limited to the following for each rating of

transformer.

(i) Bushings:

a. High Voltage - 1 No.

b. Low Voltage - 1 No.

c. Neutral Bushing - 1 No.

(ii) Complete set of gaskets for all - 1 Set

openings on the tank requiring gasket.

(iii) Magnetic oil level gauge with low oil - 1 No.

level alarm contacts.

(iv) Oil temperature indicator with alarm - 1 No.

and trip contacts and maximum reading pointer.

(v) Winding temperature indicator with alarm and trip - 1 No.

contacts and maximum reading pointer

(vi) Set of all types of valves comprising one in each type. - 1 Set

(vii) Silicagel breather - 1 No.

(viii) Buchholz Relay - 1 No.

Note: The quantities indicated above are for each transformers.


3.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 36 KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This section of specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly under

stringent quality control at every stage of manufacturing, testing at

manufacturer's works before dispatch, supply and delivery at destination store

and supervision of erection, testing and commissioning of 36 KV outdoor type

vacuum circuit breakers at various substations in SEB.

1.2 The scope of supply shall also include necessary special tools and plants

required for erection, maintenance and necessary spares, required for normal

operation and maintenance of the circuit breakers for a period of five years.

1.3 The circuit breakers should be complete in all respects with insulators, bimetallic

connectors, interrupting chamber, operating mechanism control cabinet,

interlocks, auxiliary switches indicating devices, supporting structures,

accessories, etc., described herein and briefly listed in the schedule of

requirements. The spares/attachments which are meant necessary for the

smooth functioning of the equipment and specifically are not mentioned here

shall be assumed to be included the scope of supply.

2.0 STANDARDS

2.1 The circuit breaker shall conform in all respects to the requirements of latest

issue of IS/IEC specifications except for modifications specified herein. The

equipment manufactured according to any other authoritative standards which

ensure an equal or better quality than the provision of IS/IEC specifications shall

also be acceptable. The salient point of difference between the proposed

standard and provision of these specifications shall be clearly brought out in the

tender. A copy of English version of such specifications shall be enclosed with

the tender.

2.2 The list of standards mentioned in this specification and to which the circuit

conform is given below:

1. IEC-56 High Voltage A.C. Circuit Breakers

2 IEC-137 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000 volts

3. IEC-71 Insulation Co-ordination

4. IEC-694 Common clauses for high voltages switchgear and control gear

standards

5. IEC-815 Specification for Creepage distance

6. IS-13118 Specifications for high voltage alternating current

circuit breakers 7. IS-2099 High voltages porcelain bushings

8. IS-4379 Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders

9. IS-3072 Installation and maintenance of switchgear

10. IEC-267 Guide for testing of circuit breakers with respect to out

of phase switching 11. IS-802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead

transmission lines


12. IEC-17A

5tudy Group

Dec.1981

Sealing of interrupters I breakers

13. IS-1554 PVC insulated cables upto and including 1000 volts

14. IS-5 Colors for ready mixed paints and channels

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITONS

The breakers and accessories to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the tropical conditions specified in this bidding

document.

4.0 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

4.1 Auxiliary electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following

supply system.

a. Power Devices (like drive motors) 415 V, 3 phase 4 wire 50 hz, neutral grounded

AC supply

b. DC Alarm, Control and Protective Devices 110 V DC,

c. Lighting 240 V, single phase 50 Hz AC supply

4.2 Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the Purchaser at the

terminal point for each circuit breaker for operation of accessories and auxiliary

equipment. Bidder's scope includes supply of interconnecting cables, terminal

boxes, etc. The above supply voltage may vary as indicated below and all

devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over the entire range of

voltages

1) AC Supply Voltage + 10% /-- 15%

Frequency ± 5%

2) DC Supply - 15% to + 10%

5.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF 36 KV/OUTDOOR VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

5.1 The vacuum type circuit breaker shall have vacuum interrupters, designed to

provide a long contact life at all currents upto rated making and breaking current

during switching operation: The vacuum interrupters sealed for life shall be

encapsulated by porcelain insulators for out door installation requirement of the

circuit breakers. The offered breakers shall be suitable for out door operation

under climatic conditions specified without any protection from sun, rain and dust

storm.


5.2 The vacuum interrupters of each phase shall be housed in a separate porcelain

insulator. The three identical poles shall be mounted on a' common base frame

and the contact system of three poles should be mechanically linked to provide

three pole gang opening/closing for all type of faults.

i. The performance of breakers shall be adequately proven by type tests

for the designed rating at internationally reputed independent testing

station.

ii. The offered equipment shall be practically maintenance free over a

long period.

iii. All mechanical parts and linkages shall be robust in construction and

maintenance free, over at least 30,000 switching operations except for

lubrication of pins/articulated joints at interval of 5 years or 5000

operations.

iv) Similar parts shall be strictly interchangeable without special adjustment of

individual fittings. Parts requiring maintenance shall be easily accessible, without

requiring extensive dismantling of adjacent parts.

v) The operating mechanism will be self maintained and of proper operation

endurance not less than the mechanical life of circuit breaking unit. It shall be

spring operated type described hereinafter.

vi) The circuit breaker shall be supplied complete with all auxiliary equipment meant

necessary for the safe operation, routine and periodic maintenance. All internal

wiring including those of spare auxiliary contacts shall be complete and wired

upto terminal blocks situated near cable gland plate.

vii) The breaker shall be totally restrike free under all duty conditions and shall be

capable of performing the duties without opening resistor. The details of any

device incorporated to limit or control the rate of rise of restriking voltage across

the circuit breaker contacts shall be stated.

viii) The breaker shall be reasonably quiet in operation and the noise level shall not

exceed 140 decibels.

ix) The breaker shall be suitable for three phase reclosing operation.

x) An operation counter, visible from the ground level even with the mechanism

housing closed shall be provided.

6.0 VACUUM INTERRUPTER ASSEMBLY

6.1 Each pole of the circuit breaker shall be provided with vacuum interrupter, one for

each phase, hermetically sealed for life and encapsulated by ceramic insulators.

The interrupter shall be provided with steel chromium are chamber to prevent

vaporized contact material being deposited on the insulating body. A further

shield giving protection to the metal bellows shall also follow the travel of the

moving contacts to seal the interrupter against the surroundings atmosphere.


6.2 It shall have high and consistent dielectric strength of vacuum unaffected by

environment and switching operations. Bronzed joints should ensure retention of

vacuum for life time. It shall have low and stable contact resistance due to

absence of oxidation effects and shall ensure low power loss. The arcing voltage

shall be low with minimum contact erosion.

6.3 The manufacturer of VCB should use their own Vacuum interrupter so that the

drive mechanism is matched perfectly with that of the requirement of Vacuum

Interrupter.

6.4 The vacuum bottles should be capable of withstanding minimum 100 full short

circuit operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. The vacuum bottles, capable

of withstanding less than 100 full short circuit faults, would not be considered and

therefore should not be offered.

6.5 A manufacture‘s type test reports / literature for vacuum bottles, may, therefore

be supplied along with tender in duplicate.

6.6 Vacuum Interrupters of China make should not be offered.

7.0 FIXED AND MOVING CONTACT

7.1 The fixed and moving contacts of the breaker have to ensure permanent full

contact during closing without unusual maintenance. All making and breaking

contacts shall be hermetically sealed and free from atmospheric effects.

7.2 The contacts metallurgy and geometry shall be such that there is minimum

contact burning and wear. Main contact shall have ample area and contact

pressure for carrying the rated current and rated short time current without

excessive temperature rise which may cause pitting or welding of the contacts.

7.3 The main contacts should have low contact resistance. The contact should be

self cleaning type, i.e., the layer of copper oxide should be cleaned during

rubbing of contacts. The contact area should be well defined, spring used for

contact shall be of gradually rising characteristic i.e., they should be soft. The

contacts should not provide contact grip, ie., electro-magnetic forces should not

grip the contacts and oppose the opening process. It would be desirable to have

separate main contacts and arcing contacts in order to have longer life of the

contacts. The contours of the energized metal parts of the breaker shall be such

as to eliminate areas or points of high electrostatic flux concentration. Surfaces

shall be smooth with no projection or irregularities which may cause visible

corona. No corona shall be visible in complete darkness when the equipment is

subjected to the specified test voltage.

7.4 The circuit breaker units shall be suitable for installation on outdoor R.C.C.

foundations. Ground clearance of the live parts of the breakers should be 3700

mm from foundation. The circuit breakers shall be spring operated.


8.0 RECOVERY VOLTAGE AND POWER FACTOR

8.1 The circuit breaker shall be capable of interrupting rated power with recovery

voltage equal to the rated maximum line to line service voltage at rated frequency

and at a power factor equal to or exceeding 0.15.

9.0 RESTRIKING RECOVERY and LINE CHARGING INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

9.1 The complete data for the phase factor, amplitude factor, etc., for rate of rise of

restriking voltage shall be furnished in the tender.

9.2 The circuit breaker shall be designed so as to be capable of interrupting line

charging currents without undue rise in the voltage on the supply side without

restrike and without showing sign of undue strains.

9.3 The maximum permissible switching over voltage shall not exceed 2.5 p.u. The

guaranteed over voltage, which will not be exceeded while interrupting the rated

line charging current for which the breaker is designed to interrupt shall also be

stated. The results of the tests conducted along with the copies of the

oscillographs to prove ability of the breakers to interrupt the rated as well as

lower values of the line charging current shall be furnished with the tender.

10.0 TRANSFORMER CHARGING CURRENT BREAKING CAPACITY

10.1 The breaker shall be capable of interrupting inductive currents, such as those

occurring while switching off unloaded transformers, without giving rise to undue

over voltage and without restrikes. The maximum over voltage value, which will

not be exceeded under such conditions, shall be stated in the tender.

11.0 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR SHORTLINE FAULTS

11.1 The interrupting capacity of the breaker for short line faults shall be stated in the

tender. The details of the test conducted for proving the capability of the breaker

under a short line fault occurring from one phase to earth conditions shall also be

stated in the tender. The rated characteristics for short line faults shall be in

accordance with stipulation contained in clause 8.0 of IEC-56(2)-1971.

12.0 AUTOMATIC RAPID RECLOSING and OUT OF PHASE SWITCHING

12.1 36 KV circuit breaker shall be suitable for 3 pole rapid reclosing. The dead time of

the breaker shall be adjustable and the limits of the adjustment shall be stated in

the tender.


12.2 The circuit breaker shall be capable of satisfactory operation even under

conditions of phase opposition that may arise due to faulty synchronization. The

maximum power that the breaker can satisfactorily interrupt under "Phase

Opposition" shall be stated in the bid".

13.0 TEMPERATURE RISE

13.1 The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment when in service

at side and under continuous full load conditions and exposed to the direct rays

of the sun shall not exceed the permissible limits fixed by IEC. When the

standards specify the limits of temperature rise these shall not be exceeded

when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature specified in the

approved specification.

13.2 The limits of temperature rise shall also be corrected for altitude as per IEC and

stated in the bid.

14.0 INSULATORS SUPPORTS AND HOUSING

14.1 The basic insulation level of the external insulator supporting shall be as stated in

the "Technical Parameters" and these shall be suitable for use under climatic

conditions as stated elsewhere in the specification. The porcelain used shall be

homogenous, free from cavities and other flaws.

14.2 The insulators shall be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength

and rigidity for satisfactory operation under conditions specified above.

14.3 All bushings of identical rating shall be interchangeable. The puncture strength of

bushing shall be greater than the flash over value. The design of bushing shall be

such that the complete bushing in a self-contained unit and no audible discharge

shall be detected at a voltage upto a working voltage (Phase Voltage) plus 10%.

The support insulator shall conform to IEC-137.

14.4 Minimum clearance between phases, between live parts and grounded objects

shall be as per IS-3072-1975 and should conform to Indian Electricity Rules-

1956. The minimum creepage distance for severely polluted atmosphere shall be

27 mm/KV.

14.5 . The air clearance of bushing should be such that if the bushings were tested at

an altitude of less than 1000 meters, air clearance would withstand the

application of higher voltages (IS-2099-1973 para 6.1). In order to avoid

breakdown at extremely low pressures the support insulators should not be

covered by moisture and conducting dust. Insulators should therefore be

extremely clean and should have anti-tracking properties. Sharp contours in

conducting parts should be avoided for breakdown of insulation. The insulators

shall be capable to withstand the seismic acceleration of 0.5 g in horizontal

direction and 0.6g in vertical direction.


15.0 OPERATING MECHANISM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

15.1 The operating mechanism shall be stored energy type and capable of giving

specified duty of the breaker The breaker shall also pass the operational test

which ascertain the capabilities of operating mechanism. The operating

mechanism shall be capable to perform the following functions efficiently.

i) To provide means where the circuit breaker can be closed rapidly, without hesitation

at all currents from zero to rated making current capacity.

ii) To hold the circuit breaker in closed positions by toggles or latches till the

tripping signal is received.

iii) To allow the circuit breaker to open without delay immediately on receiving

tripping signal.

iv) Operating mechanism should also be suitable for three phase auto reclose duty.

The closing spring shall be automatically charged by motor immediately after

closing operation.

v) In case of failure of supply to the spring charging motor, the spring shall be

chargeable by hand crank.

vi) The contact pressure spring and tripping spring shall be chargeable during

closing operation to ensure the breaker is ready to open.

vii) Mechanically ON/OFF indicator, spring charged indicator and operation counter

shall be provided on the front of the control cubicle. For tripping, the spring

provided shall ensure the trippings.

16.0 Tripping/Closing Coils

16.1 The circuit breakers shall be provided with two trip coils and one closing coil per

breaker. First trip coil shall be utilized for tripping the breaker on main protection

fault detection. Whereas second trip coil shall be used to trip the breaker when

first trip coil fails to trip the breaker and backup protection comes into operation

and shall also be used to trip the breaker on command.

16.2 The trip coils shall be suitable for pre-closing and after closing trip circuit

supervision. All the breakers shall have provision for independent electrical

operation of trip coils from local as well as remote through local/remote selector

switch. The breaker shall be provided with suitable protection device against

discrepancies in the operation of individual pole.

16.3 Closing coil shall operate correctly at all value of voltage between 85% and 110%

of the rated voltage. Shunt trip coils shall operate correctly under all operating

conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity and at all values

of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of rated voltage.

16.4 Trip Free Features


a. When the breaker has been instructed to close by manual

instructions by pushing of push button, the operating mechanism

will start operating for closing operations. If in the mean time a

fault has taken place, the relay provision shall be such that it

should close the trip circuit simultaneously interrupting the live

circuit of closing coil which has been instructed for close

command.

b. The trip free mechanism shall permit the circuit breaker to be

tripped by the protective relay even if it is under the process of

closing. An antipumping device to prevent the circuit breaker

from reclosing after an automatic opening shall be provided to

avoid the breaker from pumping i.e., anti pumping relay should

interrupt the closing coil circuit.

17.0 Controls

17.1 The circuit breaker shall be controlled by a control switch located in the control

room. The control arrangement shall be such as to disconnect the remote control

circuits of the breaker, when it is under test.

17.2 Local control devices, selector switch and position indicator shall be located in

weather and vermin-proof cabinet.

17.3 The circuit breaker control scheme shall incorporate trip circuit supervision

arrangement. Local/remote selector switch shall be provided for all breakers for

selection of "Local" control/remote control. Provision shall be made for local

manual, electrical and spring controls. Necessary equipment's for local controls

shall be housed in the circuit breaker cabinet of weather-proof construction. In

addition to this, a hand closing device for facilitating maintenance shall also be

provided.

17.4 Each circuit breaker shall have a mechanical open/closed and spring charge

indicator in addition to facilities for provisions for semaphore indicators for

breakers which are required for the mimic diagram in the control room.

17.5 Lamps for indicating, 'close/open' position of the breaker shall also be provided.

17.6 Mechanical indicator, to show the 'open' and 'close' position of the breaker shall

be provided in a position where it will be visible to a man standing on ground with

mechanism housing open. An operation counter, visible from the ground even

with the mechanism housing closed, shall be provided. Electrical tripping of the

breaker shall be performed by shunt trip coils.

17.7 Operating mechanism and all accessories shall be enclosed in control cabinet. A

common marshalling box for the three poles of the breaker shall be provided,

along with supply of tubing, cables from individual pole operating boxes to the

common marshalling box, local.

18.0 SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM and MOTOR


18.1 The motor compressed spring mechanism shall consist of a closing spring which

is wound or compressed by an electric motor immediately after the breaker

closes. The closing action shall also wind or compress a tripping springs shall be

wound.

18.2 After the breaker has tripped, the tripping spring shall remain in the released

position as long as the breaker is open, but the closing spring shall remain wound

and ready for closing operation. Spring charging motor shall be standard single

phase universal motor suitable for 220 volts supply.

i) Operating voltages for closing/tripping coils shall be 110 Volts DC.

ii) Operating voltages for heater elements shall be 220V AC 50 HZ. Other features of

the spring operated mechanism shall be as follows.

18.3 The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the

operating to close and latch the circuit breaker against the rated making current

and also to provide the required energy for tripping mechanism in case the

tripping energy is derived from the operating mechanism.

18.4 The mechanism shall be capable of performing the rated operating duty cycle of

0-0.3Sec-CO-3 Min-CO as per IEC-56.

18.5 The spring charging motor shall be AC/DC operated and shall not take more than

30 sec., to fully charge the closing spring made for automatic charging. Charging

of spring by the motor should not - interfere with the operation of the breakers.

18.6 The motor shall be adequately rated to carry out a minimum of one duty cycle.

Also provision shall be made to protect the motor against overloads.

18.7 In case of failure of power supply to spring charging motor, the mechanism

shall be capable of performing one open-close-open operation.

18.8 Mechanical interlocks shall be provided in the operating mechanism to prevent

discharging of the closing springs when the breaker is already in closed position.

Provision shall be made to prevent a closing operation to be carried out with the

spring partially charged.

18.9 Facility shall be provided for manual charging of closing springs.

19.0 CONTROL CABINET

19.1 The switchgear operating mechanism, the control equipment such switch for

closing and tripping the breakers, various control relays, antipumping device,

timer for adjusting breaker reclosing, a set of terminal blocks for wiring

connections, MCB's for disconnecting the control auxiliary power supplies.

Including relays, etc., shall be enclosed in a cabinet to 'be mounted on a suitable

structure at a convenient working height at the end of the breaker in the outdoor

switchyard. The supporting structure and the enclosure shall be capable of

withstanding the typical tropical climatic conditions, change of ambient

temperature, severe dust-storms, very high relative humidity those are prevailing

at the site of location of switchgear .


19.2 The enclosure shall be made out of stretched level steel plates not less than 3.15

mm thick and of light section structural steel. It should be weather proof as well

as vermin proof and conforming to IP: 55 degree of protection.

19.3 Each cabinet section shall have full width and full length hinged doors mounted

on the front that swing fully open. The doors shall be provided with latches to

securely hold it with the cabinet. Doors shall be of sturdy construction, with

resilient material covering, to provide dust protection and prevent metal to metal

contact except at the latch points. Filtered ventilation shall be provided along with

the rigid supports for control and other equipment, measuring instruments,

mounting cabinet members and equipment shall not restrict easy access to

terminal blocks for terminating and testing external connection or to equipment

for maintenance.

19.4 All screws and bolts used for assembling and mounting wire and cable

termination, supports, devices and other equipment shall be provided with lock

washers or other locking devices. All metal parts shall be clean and free of weld

splatter, rust and mill scale prior to application of double coat of zinc chromate

primer which should be followed by an Polyurethane paint to serve as base and

binder for tile finishing coat. The exterior of the cubicle shall be painted matty

grey to shade NO.692 of IS-5 or shade No.631 and interior to white shade.

Sufficient quantity of paints shall also be supplied along with the cubicle to

restore at site any damage during transportation. The mounting structure shall be

galvanized and shall be as per IS-802-11-1978.

19.5 Suitable heaters shall be mounted in the cabinet to prevent condensation.

Heaters shall be controlled by thermostat ON/OFF switches and fuses shall be

provided. Heaters shall be suitable for 240 V AC supply voltage.

19.6 At least one 20 watts fluorescent tube fixture and lamp holder working on 240V,

50 c/s AC supply shall be provided in each switchgear control cubicle section and

shall be located to provide adequate interior lighting of the cubicle. Ballasts shall

be rated at not less than 0.90 power factor. A single pole 20 Amp. ‗T‘ rated

lighting switch shall be provided for each cubicle, flush-mounted on the left end.

One duplex 220 volt convenience outlet shall be provided inside each door or

pair of doors inside each cubicle. The lighting and convenient outlet circuits shall

be completely wired in conduit and terminated on cubicle terminal blocks.

19.7 Unless otherwise specified control wire shall be stranded tinned copper stranded

wire with 1.1 KV PVC insulation conforming to the requirements of IS-1554.

All the control circuit and secondary wiring shall be wired completely and brought out

preferably to a vertical terminal block ready for external connections in the control

cabinet. The control wire shall not be of cross-section less than 2.5 mm2 copper.

19.8 All spare auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker shall be supplied wired upto

terminal block.At least 20 number spare terminals shall be provided over and

above the number required. All wiring termination on terminal blocks shall be

made through lugs. For current and DC supply circuits disconnecting sturdy type

terminal blocks will be provided. For other control circuits, non-disconnecting

snap on type terminal blocks shall be provided.

All wires shall be identified with non-metallic sleeve or tube type markers at each


terminations.

19.9 Terminal blocks shall be made up of molded non-inflammable plastic material

with blocks and barriers molded integrally have white marking strips for circuit

identification and moulded plastic covers.

19.10 A ground bus of copper bar not less than 6 mm by 25 mm shall be provided

along the inside of the front or rear of the each cubicle and equipment rack. The

ground bus shall be bolted to the frame of each panel in such a way as to make

good electrical contact with each panel or section. Lugs shall be provided for

connection of the ground bus to the station ground bus/earth mat.

20.0 ACCESSORIES

20.1 Each circuit breaker assembly shall be supplied with the following accessories.

i) Line and earthing terminals and terminal connectors.

ii) Control housing with:

a) One auxiliary switch with adequate number of auxiliary contacts, but not less than 12 nos. (6

No + 6 NC) for each breaker. These shall be over and above the No. of contacts used for

closing, tripping and 'reclosing' and interlocking circuit of the circuit breaker. All auxiliary

contacts shall be capable of use as "Normally closed" or "Normally open" contacts. Special

auxiliary contacts required for the reclosing circuit if any, shall also be provided. There shall

be provision, to add more auxiliary contacts at a later date, if required.

b) Operation counters

c) Position indicator (Close/Open)

d) Necessary cable glands

e) Fuses

f) Manual trip device and local test push buttons

g) Terminal blocks and wiring for all control equipment and accessories

h) Adequate number of heaters for continuous operation to prevent moisture condensation in

the housing of operating mechanism

i) Selector switch for local/remote control.

21.0 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE

21.1 The circuit breakers shall be supplied complete with necessary galvanized steel

supporting structures, foundation and fixing bolts, etc., the galvanizing shall be as


per IS. The mounting of the breaker shall be such as to ensure the safety of the

operating staff and should conform to Indian Electricity Rules, 1956. Minimum

ground clearance of live part from ground level shall be 4000 mm inclusive

of foundation (300mm above GL).

21.2 The bidder shall submit detailed design calculations and detailed drawings in

respect of supporting structures suitable for the equipment offered. The tenders

shall specify the loads which shall be transmitted to the equipment foundation

under most adverse operating conditions of the breaker.

21.3 Facility to earth the circuit breaker structure at two points shall be provided.

22.0 GALVANISING

All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers, support channels,

structures, shall; be hot dip galvanized conforming to latest version of 18:2629 or any

other equivalent authoritative standard.

23.0 CABLE TERMINATION

Suitable cable glands for terminating the multi-core cable shall be provided wherever

required.

24.0 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS AND EARTH TERMINALS

24.1 Each circuit breaker connected with incoming and outgoing feeders shall be

provided with solder less clamp type bimetallic connectors suitable for

ACSR/AAAC conductor mentioned in 'Technical Parameter'

25.0 INTERTERLOCKS

25.1 Necessary interlocks to prevent closing or opening of the breaker under low

pressure of the contact spring and devices for initiating alarm shall be provided.

Provision shall also be made to enable electrical interlocking with the isolators

associated with the breaker to prevent opening or closing of the isolators.

26.0 TYPE TESTS

26.1 Type test certificates for the following tests, as per IS:13118 or IEC 62271-100

with latest amendment thereof, from any of the NABL accredited Laboratory shall

invariably be furnished

a. Short circuit duties test

b. Short time withstand current and peak withstand current tests


c. Temperature rise test

d. Mechanical endurance test

e. Lightning impulse voltage withstand test

f. Power Frequency withstand voltage test (dry & wet)

g. Single Capacitor bank switching test

h. Degree of protection IP-55 as per IS:13947:93(Part-I)/IEC 60529:89

26.2 Type test certificates must accompany drawing of type tested equipment, duly

sealed & signed by type testing authority.

26.3 Type tests should not have been conducted on the equipment earlier than 3

years from the date of opening of bids.

26.4 In case of any change in design/type of breaker already type tested and the one

being offered against this specification, the Employer reserves the right to

demand repetition of some or all tests without any extra-cost at NABL accredited

lab.

27.0 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TEST :-

27.1 Employer shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of

manufacture where the Circuit Breakers are being manufactured and the Bidder

shall provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Bidder/manufacturer‘s

works, raw materials, manufacture of all the accessories and for conducting

necessary tests as detailed herein. The Employer reserves the right to insist for

witnessing acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items. The

Bidder/manufacturer shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out items

and raw material also, at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled breaker

27.2 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material

has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

27.3 Bidders shall indicate the inspections and checks carried out at various stages of

manufacture of the circuit breakers. Complete record of stage inspection would

be kept by the Bidder/manufacturer and this record should be made available for

inspection by the representative of the Employer. Bidder/manufacturer should

indicate the manufacturing programme and the The Employer will have a right to

depute inspecting officers during the manufacture of the equipment. The

Employer reserves the right to carry out stage inspections at all stages, for which

advance intimation shall be given and all necessary cooperation shall be

rendered by the manufacturer.

27.4 At the time of inspection, Bidder/manufacturer shall identify each and every

item/accessories of the particular Circuit Breaker under testing. Unless all the

items are identified, the manufacture will not be treated as complete. Various


tests stipulated in IS/IEC shall be performed in the presence of the Employer‘s

engineers or when the inspection waiver has been given, in such a case, testing

shall be done at the manufacturer's works as per IS/IEC stipulations and same

should be confirmed by documentary evidence by way of Test Certificate which

shall be got approved by the Employer.

27.5 It is expected that before circuit breaker is finally offered for inspection, internal

testing of the same for various important parameters are already done. Routine

test report for such tests shall also accompany the letter of inspection call so that

the Inspecting Officer at the time of inspection may verify the parameters brought

out in the preliminary report. Details of all tests should be clearly brought out.

27.6 In case for any reason, inspection is not completed or equipment is not found to

be complete with all accessories as per confirmation given with the letter of

inspection call, the Employer will reserve the right to recover complete cost of

deputation of inspecting team to the works of the manufacturer.

27.7 Acceptance of any quantity of circuit breaker & its accessories shall in no way

relieve the successful bidder of his responsibility for meeting all the requirement

of this specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such

equipments are later found to be defective.

28.0 RATING PLATES & SURFACE FINISH PAINTING & GALVANISING:-

28.1 Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a detailed rating plate. Details on the

rating plate shall be as per ISS and shall also indicate manufacturer name, serial

no., order no. and month & year of dispatch.

28.2 All interiors and exteriors of tanks, mechanism, enclosures, cabinets and other

metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion,

greases or other adhering foreign matter. All steel surfaces in contact with

insulating oil, as far as accessible, shall be painted with not less than two coats of

heat resistant, oil insoluble, insulating paint.

28.3 All metal surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of zinc

chromate and two coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner or hot dip

galvanized or two packs of aliphatic polyurethane finished paint. All metal parts

not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resistant material. All

machine finished or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable preventive

compound and suitably wrapped or otherwise protected. Paints shall be carefully

selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather within the limits

specified.

28.4 Paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal

handling. All external paintings shall be as per shade no. 697 or any other

suitable shade of IS:5 or polyurethane paint

28.5 All ferrous parts & steel structure including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and

spring washers, support channels, structures, etc. shall be hot dip galvanized or

stainless steel or electro-galvanized.


29.0 DOCUMENTATION:

29.1 List of Drawings and Documents: Bidders shall furnish four sets of relevant

descriptive and illustrative published literature, pamphlets and following drawings

for preliminary study;

(a) General outline drawings showing dimensions and shipping weights.

(b) Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit breaker

including operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts with lifting dimensions for

maintenance.

(c) All drawings & data typical and recommended schematic diagram for control

supervision & reclosing shall be annotated in English. .

(d) Schematic diagrams of breaker offered for control supervision and reclosing.

(e) Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support structures.

(f) Short circuit oscillogram & certificates for similar type tested breakers. General

arrangement of foundation and structure mounting plan including weights of varnish

components and impact loading data for foundation design.

(g) Type test reports.

29.2 Successful bidders shall, within two weeks of placement of order, submit four

sets of final version of all the above drawings for the Employer's approval. The

Employer shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the

Bidder/manufacturer within two weeks. Bidder/manufacturer shall, if necessary,

modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for the

Employer's approval within two weeks from the date of comments. After receipt

of the Employer's approval, the Bidder/manufacturer shall, within three weeks,

submit 4 prints per breaker and two set of good qualities reproducible of the

approved drawings for the Employer's use.

29.3 Successful bidders shall also furnish two sets each of bound manuals covering

erection, commissioning, operation and maintenance instructions and all relevant

information and drawings pertaining to the main equipment as well as auxiliary

devices along with each breaker. Marked erection drawings shall identify the

component parts of the equipment as shipped to enable erection by the

Employer‘s own personnel. Each manual shall also contain one set of all the

approved drawings, type test reports as well as acceptance reports of the

corresponding consignment dispatched.

29.4 Manufacturing of equipments shall be strictly in accordance with the approved



Employer.

29.5 Approval of drawings/work by the Employer shall not relieve the bidders of any of

his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation

of the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of the

applicable standards rules and codes of practices. Equipment shall conform in all

respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest

revisions of relevant standards at the time of supply and the Employer reserves

the right to reject any equipment or material which, in his judgment, is not in full

accordance therewith.

30.0 PACKING AND FORWARDING:

30.1 Equipment shall be prepared for ocean shipment (foreign equipment) or rail road

transport (local equipment). Equipment shall be packed in suitable crates in such

a manner to protect it from damage and withstand handling during transit.

Bidder/manufacturer shall be responsible for and make good at his own expense

any or all damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and

inadequate packing and handling. Easily damageable materials shall be carefully

packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary,

proper arrangement for lifting such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any

material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the

Bidder/manufacturer without any extra cost. Each consignment shall be

accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following information:

(a) Name of the consignee.

(b) Details of consignment.

(c) Destination.

(d) Total weight of consignment.

(e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.

(f) Handling and unpacking instructions.

(g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package and spare material.

31.0 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT AND BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

31.1 Bidders must furnish following information along with technical bid. A list of all the

accessories which will be supplied with the breakers should be furnished. While

furnishing the list of accessories, items which will be manufactured by the

Bidders and balance items, which will be procured from sub-

Bidder/manufacturers should be clearly identified and stipulated in the bid.


32.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

32.1 It is obligatory on the part of bidders to furnish Guaranteed Technical Particulars

enclosed with the bid document duly filled in complete in all respects. In case

Guaranteed Technical Particulars duly filled in complete in all respects is not

furnished, the bid may be treated as non-responsive


3.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR

TRANSFORMERS & FEEDERS

1.0 SCOPE

1.1. This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, shop

testing, inspection and testing at works, transport to site, insurance, storage,

erection and commissioning of Control, Relay, Alarm and Annunciation Panels for

33/11 KV, Substations.

1.2. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and

construction of equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to

high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of

performing in continuous commercial operation acceptable to the purchaser, who will

interpret in a manner the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have

the power to reject any material which in his judgment is not in accordance

therewith. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary

for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be

within the scope of Bidder's supply, irrespective of whether these are specifically

brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS

All equipment provided under this specification shall in general conform to the latest

revision/amendment etc. of the following:

Sl

N

o

.

Standard Title

1 IS: 3231, IEC 255 Part-I to III,

BS: 89

Electrical relays for power

system protection.

2 IS: 1248; IS: 2419; BS: 89 Indicating instruments

3 IS-13010; IS: 722(Part-I to IX)

IEC 521; BS 3T

Energy meters

4 IS: 4237 General requirement of

switchgear and control gear

for voltages not exceeding 1

KV

5 IS: 375 Marking arrangement for

switchgear, busbars, main


connection & auxiliary wiring.

6 IS: 8686, IEC-255 Part V &VI

IEC 801-4

Specification for static protective

relays and tests

7 IEC 337; IEC: 337-1; IS: 6875 Control switches ( LV switching

devices for control and

auxiliary circuits)

8. IS: 2516 MCCB sand load break switches

having a break capacity of 30

KVA rms at 415 V.

9 IS: 4047 Fuse switching units

10 IS: 2208 HRC fuse links

11 IS: 2705; IEC-185 Current transformers

12 IS: 3156; IEC: 186 Potential transformers

13 IS: 8623 Factory built assemblies of

switchgear & control gear for

voltages upto & including

1000V AC & 1200 V DC

14 IEC: 439 Low voltage switchgear and

control gear assemblies

15 IS: 4237 General requirement of

switchgear & control gear for

voltages not exceeding

1000V

16 IS: 2147 Degree of protection provided by

enclosures for low voltage

switchgear and control gear

17 IS: 5028 Aluminium alloy bars

18 IS: 1897 Copper strips for electrical

purpose

19 IS: 3618; IS : 6005 Code of practice for phosphate

20 IS: 4064 Air break switches, air break

disconnectors, air break

disconnectors & fuse

combination units for

voltages not exceeding 1000

V AC or 1200 V DC.


21 IS: 9224 Part II HRC cartridge fuses

22 IS: 5578 Guide for making of insulated

conductors

23 IS: 2032 Graphical symbols

Ref-abbreviations

Name and Address

24 IEC Institution Electro Technical

Bureau. Central dale

commission Electro

Technique International.

1. Rue de vermbe Geneva

Switzerland

25 ISO International Organization for

standardization. Danish

Board of

Standardization..Danish

Standardizating Sruat

Aurehoeqvaj-12 DK- 2990,

Heel prup Denmark

26 IS Bureau of Indian Standard

Standards Manak Bhawan 9,

Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,

New Delhi- 110 002, India.

2.1. Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative Standards, which

ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also

be considered. When the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other

standards, salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standard

specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule.

Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished

along with the offer.

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

3.1. The climatic and isoceraunic conditions at site under which the equipments shall

operate satisfactorily under the tropical conditions specified in this bidding

documents.

3.2. The reference ambient temperature assumed for the purpose of this specification


are as follows:

i. Maximum ambient

temperature

: 40° C

ii. Maximum average daily

ambient temperature

: 35° C

iii. Maximum average yearly

ambient temperature

: 30° C

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

4.1. The details of Current Transformer are given below:

Core

N

o

.

Accur

ac

y

cl

as

s

Burden Minimum knee

point

voltage as

per

Formula

Purpose

33 KV side Transformer CT Ratio: 400-200/5-5 A

1 5 P 20 20 VA ---- O/L & E/L

Protection

2 PS ---- Min. Vk = 250 V

Max. Im=

0.03 A

Transformer

differential

protection

3 0.5,

Fs

<

5

15 VA ------ Metering

33 KV side Feeder CTs Ratio: 400-200/5-5 A

11 KV side Transformer CT Ratio: 400-200/5-5 A


4.2. Breakers for HV & LV sides of transformer

HV side breaker : VCB, Outdoor

LV (11KV ) side breaker : Vacuum type, Indoor/Outdoor

Rating of closing coil &

Trip coil : 110 V DC,

Number of auxiliary contact : 6 N/O and 6 N/C

Both HV & LV breakers are provided with two sets of trip coils( Each set common to all three

phases)

5.0 Drawing, Manuals, Literatures etc.

5.1. The tenderer shall furnish along with his tender fully dimensioned drawings of the

equipments offered, along with illustrated and descriptive literatures, for various

component parts like relays, meters, control switches etc. to enable the purchaser

for proper evaluation of the offer. The tenders shall also be accompanied with the

schematic drawings showing protection, indicating metering schemes etc

5.2. Soon after the award of the contract and before proceeding with the manufacturing

works, the successful tenderer shall furnish drawings in quadruplicate which shall

include but not limited to the followings for approval of the purchaser:

i) Principal layout drawings for the Boards showing the equipments on the

1 5 P 10 20 VA ---- O/L & E/L

Protection

2 PS ---- Min. Vk = 200 V

Max. Im=

0.03 A

Transformer

differential

protection

3 0.5 15 VA ------ Metering

11 KV side Feeder CT Ratio: 400-200/5-5 A


panels with dimensions. A list of the equipments mounted on each panel

shall be prepared and tabulated in the same drawings. The drawings shall

also show the constructional details, foundation details indicating foundation

bolts, cable entries etc.

ii) Elementary control drawings and other schematics for the equipments

furnished, including protection, metering, annunciating and indicating circuit,

breaker control ,circuits etc. All wires terminals shall be clearly marked and

numbered as per general practice.

iii) Single line and three line diagrams showing all AC and D.C power

connections and all secondary connectors for relays, meters etc.

iv) Internal wiring diagrams of all the panels and boards giving internal wiring

connections for all the equipments in the panels. The drawings shall also

clearly indicate the connections to be made at site or to the external

equipments or between boards etc. with wires terminals marked properly.

v) After approval of the drawings the tenderer shall furnish six copies of the

each of the final drawings along with the literatures, instruction manuals etc.

for purchaser's reference.

5.3. In addition to the above the successful bidders shall supply three sets each of the

following relevant equipments supplied to each substation:

a. All final drawings mentioned above.

b. Literature describing construction, operation, adjustment, testing, calibration,

maintenance of all protective and auxiliary relays, instruments, control switches etc.

c. List of spare parts giving identification numbers of the parts.

6.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

6.1. Control & Relay panels: Detailed Description

The control and relay panels shall be of Simplex type. Each Simplex panel shall consist

of a vertical front panel with equipment mounted thereon and having wiring access

from the rear. It shall have double leaf door with lift off hinges at the back for panels

of width more than 800 mm. Doors shall have handles with built-in locking facility.

7.0 Constructional Features

7.1. Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin

proof. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-51 in

accordance with IS:2147.


7.2. Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural

frames enclosed completely with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled

sheet steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the

panels such as bass frame, front sheet and door frames, and 2.0 mm for sides, door

top and bottom portions. There shall be sufficient reinforcement' to provide level

Surface resistance to vibration and rigidity during transportation and installation.

7.3. All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gaskets all around with neoprene

gaskets. Ventilation louvers to be provided having screens and filters. The screens

shall be made of brass wire mesh.

7.4. Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat

appearance inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from

outside, with all exterior surfaces true and smooth.

7.5. All necessary anchor bolts and other materials required for foundation of panels

shall be supplied

7.6. Cable entries to the panel shall be from the bottom. The plates of the panel shall be

fitted with removable gland plates for fixing the cable glands. Necessary number of

cable glands of sizes to suit owner's external cables to the panels shall be supplied

by the bidder. Cable glands shall be screwed type, and shall be suitable for PVC

cables. Cable gland plate fitted in the bottom of the panel shall be connected to the

earthing Panel / Station through a flexible braided copper conductor rigidly.

7.7. Relay panels of modern, modular construction would also be acceptable.

7.8. The total height of the panel shall be 2250 mm. The depth of the panel shall be 600

mm. The panels shall have suitable width required for mounting of all the

equipments on the front panel.

7.9. The panels shall match with the existing panels in APDCL substations, the details of

which will be furnished to the successful bidder. Matching includes height , depth of

the panels, colour matching and mimic matching' and arrangement of equipment on

the front.

8.0 Mounting

8.1. All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the

terminal blocks ready for external connection. The equipment on front of panel shall

be mounted flush.

8.2. Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be

accomplished individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are

readily accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking shall be clearly

visible.

8.3. The contractor shall carry out cutouts, mounting and wiring of the free issue items

supplied by others, if any which are to be mounted in this panel in accordance with

the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings. Cutouts if any, provided for

future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off.


8.4. The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less

than 750 mm from the bottom of the panel. The center lines of relays, meters and

recorders shall be not less than 450 mm from the bottom of the panel.

8.5. The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to

give a neat and uniform appearance. Likewise the top lines of all meters, relays and

recorders etc., shall be matched.

8.6. No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.

8.7. All the equipment connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to

minimize the risk of fire and damage which may be caused by fire.

9.0 Panel Internal Wiring and Other Accessory Equipment

9.1. Panels shall be supplied completely. with interconnecting wiring provided between

all electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices and

terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels.

When panels are arranged to be located adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring

and connections between the panels shall be furnished and the wiring shall be

carried out internally. These adjacent inter panel wiring shall be clearly indicated in

the drawing furnished by the contractor.

9.2. All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, stranded copper

conductor wires with PVC insulation and shall be heat resistant grade and vermin

and rodent proof. The minimum size of the stranded copper conductor used for

internal wiring shall be as follows:

i) All circuits except current transformer and potential transformer circuits one multi strand

2.5 Sq. mm per lead

ii) Current transformer circuit : one 4.0 Sq. mm per lead. The minimum number of strands

per conductor shall be three.

9.3. All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible

and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters and

troughs shall be used for this purpose.

9.4. Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits,

annunciation circuits and other common services shall be provided near the top of

the panels running throughout the entire length of the panels.

9.5. Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned copper ring

type lugs which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulted sleeves shall be

provided at all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules

marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each

wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is

disconnected from terminal blocks

9.6. All wires directly connected to trip circuit of breaker or device shall be distinguished

by the addition or red coloured unlettered ferrule. Number 6 and 9 shall not be

included for ferrule purposes.


9.7. Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be

preferred for inter panel wiring. Interconnections to adjacent panel shall be brought

out to a separate set of terminal blocks located near the slots or holes meant for

taking the inter connecting wires. Arrangements shall permit easy inter connections

to adjacent panels at site and wires for this purposes shall be provided by contractor

looped and bunched properly inside the panel.

9.8. The Successful bidder shall be solely responsible for the completeness and

correctness of the internal wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected

equipment.

10.0 Terminal Blocks

10.1. All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on

terminal blocks preferably vertically mounted on the side of each panel. Terminal

blocks shall be 1100 V grade and have 10 amps continuous rating ,complete with

insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Terminal block

design shall include a white fibre markings strip with clear plastic slip-on terminal

covers. Markings on the terminal strips shall correspond to wire number and terminal

numbers on the wiring diagrams.

10.2. Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads

shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. Also current transformer

secondary leads shall be provided with short-circuiting and earthing facilities.

10.3. At- least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare

terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.

10.4. Unless otherwise specified. terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the

following conductors of purchasers cable on each side

i. All circuits except current and potential transformer circuits : minimum of one

of 2.5 sq.mm copper.

ii. All CT and PT circuits: minimum of two of 4.0 mm square copper.

10.5. There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first row of terminal

blocks and associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance between two rows of

terminal blocks shall be minimum, of 150 mm.

10.6. Arrangement of the terminal block assembles and the wiring channel within the

enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run parallel and in close

proximity along each side of wiring duct to provide for convenient attachment of

internal panel wiring. The side of the terminal block opposite the wiring duct shall be

reserved for purchaser's external cable connection. An adjacent terminal block shall

also share this fired wiring corridor. A steel strip shall be connected between

adjacent terminal block rows at 450 mm intervals for support of incoming cables.

10.7. The number and sizes of the Purchaser's multi-core incoming cable will be

furnished to the Contractor after placement of the order. All necessary cable

terminating accessories such as gland plates, packing glands, crimp type tinned

copper lugs supporting clamps .and brackets, wiring troughs and gutters etc., for

purchaser's cable shall be included in contractor's scope of supply.


11.0 Painting

11.1. All sheet steel work shall be phosphated, in accordance with the 18:6005 "Code

of Practice for phosphating iron and steel". Oil, grease, dirt and sweat shall be

thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by

picking with dilute acid followed by washing with running water rinsing with a slightly

alkaline hot water and drying.

11.2. After phosphating thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clear water followed

by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate

coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoved type zinc

chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while the second coat shall be

stoved .

11.3. After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall

be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied

after completion of tests. The exterior Colour of the paint shall be selected by the

purchaser at a later date.

11.4. Each coat of primer and finished paint shall be of a slightly different shade to

enable inspection of the painting. The powder coat paint shade should Air Craft

Grey (IS : 5) and thickness of 50-60 microns.

A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after

installation of the panels.

11.5. In case the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting procedure

like electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted along with offer/bid for

purchaser's review and approval.

12.0 Mimic Diagram

12.1. Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact representation of the

system shall be provided in the front of control panels.

12.2. Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of anodized aluminum or plastic of

approved fast Colour material which shall be screwed on to the panel and can be

easily cleaned. Painted overlaid mimic is also acceptable. The mimic bus shall be 2

mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be 10 mm for bus bars and 7 mm for

other connections.

12.3. Mimic bus Colour will be decided by the Purchaser and shall be obtained from

the Purchaser by the successful Bidder.

12.4. When semaphore indicators are used for isolator position they shall be so

mounted in the mimic that the isolator closed position shall complete the continuity of

mimic.

12.5. Indicating lamp, one for each phase for each bus shall be provided on the mimic

to indicate bus charged condition.

13.0 Name Plates and Markings


13.1. All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted

inside the panels shall be provided with individual nameplates with equipment

designation engraved. Also on the top of each panel, on front as well as rear side,

large and bold nameplates shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation.

13.2. AlI front mounted equipment shall be also provided at the rear with individual

name plates engraved with tap numbers corresponding to the one shown in the

panel internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring. The nameplates shall be

mounted directly by the side of the respective equipment in a visible manner and

shall not be hidden by the equipment wiring.

13.3. Nameplates shall be made of non-rusting metal or any other suitable material.

Nameplates shall be black with white engraving lettering. The nameplates inscription

and size of nameplates and letters shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval.

13.4. Each instrument and meter shall be prominently marked with the quantity

measured e.g. kV, A, MW, etc. All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked

with manufacturer's name, manufacturer's type, serial number and electrical rating

data.

13.5. Each switch shall bear clear inscription, identifying its function e.g. "BREAKER"

,"52 A‘‘, "AMMETER" etc. Similar inscriptions shall also be provided on each device

whose function is not otherwise identified. If any switch device does not bear this

inscription separate name plate giving its function shall be provided for it. Switch

shall also have clear inscription for each position indicating e.g. "TRIP-NEUTRAL-

CLOSE", "ON-OFF", "R-Y-B-N:-OFF", etc.

14.0 Miscellaneous Accessories and Supporting Steel

14.1. Plug point- An AC 240 Volts, single phase, 5A, 50 HZ AC plug point shall be

provided in the interior of each cubicle with "ON-OFF" Switch for connection of hand

lamps.

14.2. Interior lighting: Each panel shall be provided with a CFL lighting fixture rated for

240 volts, single phase, 50 HZ supply for the interior illumination of the panel during

maintenance. The fittings shall be complete with switch fuse unit and switching of

the lighting shall be controlled by the respective panel door switch.

14.3. One DC emergency lamp is to be fitted and should be complete with switch fuse

unit.

14.4. Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,

distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control signaling,

lighting and space heater circuits. MCBs for the incoming circuits and fuses for sub-

circuits shall be provided. Selection of the main and sub-circuit fuse rating shall be

such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuit for

relaying and metering shall be protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge

type conforming to IS : 2208 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. All accessible live

connection to fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation

indicators for indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints

of the fuse rating and voltage.


14.5. Supporting Steel: All necessary foundation anchor bolts and other parts of

supporting and fastenings, of the panels shall be supplied by the contractor.

15.0 Earthing

15.1. All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely screwed. Location of

earth bus shall ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under various

switching conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of the bus

bar shall be at least 25 x 6 mm copper flat.

15.2. When several panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be

made continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be

included in the scope of supply of contractor. Provision shall be made for extending

the earth bus bars to future adjoining panels on either side.

15.3. Provision shall be made on each earth bus bars of the end panels for connecting

purchaser's earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this

purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of contractor. The wire or screens

should be clearly bonded and earthed at the gland plate.

15.4. All metallic cases of relays, instruments and panel mounted equipment shall be

connected to the earth bus preferably by independent copper wires of size not less

than 2.5 Sq.mm. The colour code of earthing wires shall be green. Earthing wire

shall be connected on terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering shall

not be permitted.

15.5. Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to

other devices where the loop is broken shall not be permitted. However, looping of

earth connections between equipment to provide alternative paths to earth bus shall

be provided.

15.6. VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only

at the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made

through links so that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing

continuity of earthing system for other groups.

16.0 Metering Instruments: Instruments and Meters

16.1. All instruments, meters, recorders and transducers shall be enclosed in dust

proof, moisture resistant, black finished cases and shall be suitable for tropical use.

They shall be calibrated to read directly the primary quantities. They shall be

accurately adjusted and calibrated at works and shall have means of calibration,

check and adjustment at site. All accessories including test switches and test plugs,

where applicable shall be furnished. Their elements shall be shock resistant and

shielded from external magnetic fields.

16.2. . Ammeters:

16.2.1. All ammeters shall be of digital type and provided with direct reading triple range

scale. Scale value of ammeters shall be equal to 1 to 1.3 times the rated primary

current of the associated current transformer feeding it. The rated current shall be

5.0 Amp. Accurate reading of ammeter shall be possible at the lowest limit of 5 % of

the rated current. Accuracy class 1.0 as per IS: 1248


16.3. Voltmeter:

16.3.1. All voltmeters shall be of digital type direct reading scale. The maximum scale

value of voltmeters shall be 50% in excess of the primary voltage of the associated

PTs. The rated voltage of the voltmeter shall be 110 volts A.C., accuracy class 1.0

as per IS: 1248.

16.4. Watt meters

16.4.1. Digital watt meters wherever specified shall be 3 phase, 4 wire three element

type provided with direct reading scales. The scale values of wattmeter shall be as

per ratio of the measuring cores of respective CTs and PTs. The current coils shall

be rated for 5/1 ampere and voltage coils for 110 volt continuous. The wattmeters

shall be suitable for circuits with unbalanced loads to be usually met with in

commercial service. Accuracy class will be 1.0 as per IS: 1248.

16.5. . Energy Meters :

16.5.1. Energy meters shall be static type conforming to IEC 687 and suitable for bi-

directional power flow. The static meter shall measure active and reactive energy

both import and export, by 3 phases 4 wire principle suitable for ba1anced /

unbalanced 3 phase load. Accuracy of meter shall. be 0.2 for active energy and 0.5

for reactive energy. The active and reactive energy shall be directly computed in CT

& VT primary values and stored in four different registers as MWH (E), MWH(I),

MVARH (E) and MVARH (I) along with a plus sign for export and minus sign for

import. CT secondary is 5 A the appropriate ratios of meters shall compute the

energy sent out/received, from/to the station bus bar during each successive 15

minute block and store in the respective registers. Meter shall display on demand

the energy sent out! received during the previous 15 minute block. Further the

meter shall continuously integrate the energy readings of each register upto that

time. All these readings shall be displayed on demand. Cumulative reading of each

register ·shall be stored in non-volatile memory at the end of each hour of day

starting from 01 hours. These readings shall be stored for a period of 40 days

before being erased. The static meter shall have built in clock and calendar having

an accuracy of 1 minute per month or better. Date / time shall be displayed on

demand.

16.5.2. Each meter shall have a unique identification code provided by purchaser and

shall be marked permanently on the front and also on the non-volatile memory. The

voltage monitoring of all the three voltages shall be provided.

16.5.3. The meter shall normally operate with power drawn from VT supplies. Power

supply to the meter shall be healthy even with a single phase VT supply. An

automatic back up shall be provided by a built in life time battery and shall not need

replacement for at least ten years with a continuous VT interruption of even two

years. Date and time of VT interruption and restoration shall be automatically stored

in non-volatile memory.

16.5.4. The meter shall have an optical port at the front of the meter for data collection by

a hand held device. The meter shall have means to test MWH accuracy and for

connecting it to time of day tariff equipment.

16.5.5. The meter should have optical port for local communication. RS 232 and RS 485


port should be incorporated along with Ethernet port.

16.5.6. The bidder is to provide the software for meter for downloading and up loading to

base computer along with one hand held common meter reading instrument along

with software.

16.5.7. The meter should preferably be either Secure or L & T make as per

APDCL‟s specification.

17.0 Relays:

17.1. All relays shall conform to the requirements of 18:3231 or other applicable

approved standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi flush mounting on the

front with connections from the rear. Relays shall be rectangular in shape and shall

have dust tight, dull' black or egg shall black enamel painted cases with transparent

cover removable from the front.

17.2. All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type / modular cases with

proper testing facilities. The testing facilities provided on the relays shall be

specifically stated in the bid. Necessary test plugs shall be supplied loose and shall

be included in Contractor's scope of supply. Test block and switches shall be located

immediately below each relay for testing. As an alternative to test block and test plug

arrangements the Bidder shall also quote alternative testing facility of protective

relays by providing a push button which when pressed connects the testing

equipment to the relay coils and injects current in the coil and automatically

disconnects the trip circuits and on operation of relay gives a signal that the

equipment and the circuits are correct.

17.3. The purchaser reserves the right for accepting anyone of the above two testing

facilities. Unless otherwise specified all auxiliary relays and timers shall be supplied

in non-draw out cases/plug in type modular cases.

17.4. All AC relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz AC Voltage operated relays

shall be suitable for 110 Volts VT secondaries and current operated relays for 5 Amp

CT secondaries as specified in this specification. DC auxiliary relays and timers shall

be designed for 110 V DC voltage and shall operate satisfactorily between 70 % and

110% of rated voltage. Voltage operated relays shall have adequate thermal

capacity for continuous operation.

17.5. The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of the

protection scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary relays and

timers required for interlocking schemes for multiplying of contacts/suiting contact

duties of protective relays and monitoring of control supplies and circuits, lockout

relay monitoring of circuits etc., and also required for the complete protection

schemes described in the specification shall be provided.

17.6. All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of potential free

isolated output contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts as

required to complete the scheme. Contacts shall be silver faced with spring action.

Relay cases shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential free

external connections to the relay coils and contacts including spare contacts. Relay

case size shall be so chosen as not to introduce any limitations on the use of

available contacts on the relay due to in-adequacy of terminals. Paralleling of


contacts, if any, shall be done at the terminals on the casing of the relay.

17.7. All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers except the lock out relays and

interlocking relays specified shall be provided with self-reset type contacts. All

protective relays and timers shall be provided with externally hand reset positive

action operation indicators, provided with inscription, subject to purchaser's

approval. All protective relays which do not have built in hand reset operation

indicators shall have additional auxiliary relays with operating indicators for this

purpose. Similar separate operating indicator (auxiliary relays) shall also be provided

in the trip circuits of protections located outside the board such as bucholz relays,

temperature protection, fire protection. etc.,

17.8. Timers shall be done of the electromagnetic or solid state type. Pneumatic timers

are not acceptable. Short time delays in terms of milliseconds may be obtained by

using copper slugs on auxiliary relays. In such case it shall be ensured that the

continuous rating of the relay is not affected. Time delay in terms of milliseconds

obtained by the external capacitor resistor combination is not acceptable.

17.9. No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is de-

energized shall be employed in the circuits.

17.10. Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the

purpose of testing and maintenance.

17.11. All relays shall withstand a test voltage 2.5 kVrms voltage,50Hz for one second.

17.12. Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be of

shunt reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following, shall be strictly

ensured:

i. The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently shorter than that of the trip

coil or trip relay in series with which it operates to ensure definite operation of the flag

indicator of the relay.

ii. Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or more relays operate

simultaneously.

iii. Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit satisfactory operation of the trip

coil on trip relays when the DC supply voltage is minimum.

17.13. All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated

pair of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for purchaser's use.

17.14. For numeric relays the following requirements shall be met with :

17.14.1. Numerical relay shall have both RS 485 and RS 232 communication

ports. And ten numbers digital IO. Relay software is required.

17.14.2. The numerical relays shall be completely numerical with protection

elements realized using software algorithm.

17.14.3. The relay should have high immunity to electrical and electromagnetic

interference. Relay should confirm to following mandatory type test for safe


operation of relay :

a. High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 610 – 4-1

b. Fast transient disturbance test as per IEC 61000 – 4-4

c. Electrostatic discharge as per IEC 61000 – 4-2

d. Radio frequency interference as per ANSI C 37.90.2

e. Impulse test as per IEC 6100 – 4-3

18.0 Annunciation System:

18.1. Alarm annunciation system shall be provided for the control board by means of

visual and audible alarm in order to draw the attention of the operator to the

abnormal operating conditions or the operation of some protective devices. The

annunciation equipment shall be suitable for operation with 110 V DC voltage.

18.2. The visual annunciation shall be provided by \ annunciation facia, mounted flush

on the top of the panels. The audible alarm shall be provided by alarm buzzer and

bell for trip and non-trip alarm respectively.

18.3. The annunciator fascia shall be provided with translucent plastic window for

alarm point with minimum size of 35 mm x 50 mm. The facia plates shall be

engraved in black lettering with respective inscriptions which will be furnished to the

Bidder by the purchaser.

Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and size of

the let6tering shall not be less than 5 mm.

18.4. Each annunciation window shall be provided with two white lamps in parallel to

provide safety against lamp failure. Long life lamps shall be used. The lamp circuit

shall include series resistor of adequate rating. The cover plate of the facia windows

shall be flush with the panel and shall be capable of easy removal to facilitate

replacement of lamps. The transparency of cover plates and wattage of the lamps

provided in the facia windows shall be adequate to ensure clears visibility of the

inscriptions in the control room having high illumination intensity (500 lux) from the

location of the operator's desk.

18.5. TRIP AND NONTRIP facia shall be differentiated. All TRIP facia shall have red

colour and all NONTRIP facia shall have white colour.

Sl

.

Alarm condition Fault

contact

Visual

Annun

ciation

Audible

An

nun


N

o

.

ciat

ion

1 Normal Open Off Off

2 Abnormal Close Flashing on

3 Acknowledge push

button is pressed

Close

open

Steady on

Steady on

Off

Off

4 Reset push button is

pressed

Close On Off

5 Lamp test push

button pressed

Open Steady on Off

18.6. Visual and audible annunciation for the failure of DC supply to the annunciation

system shall also be provided and this annunciation shall operate on 240 volts AC

supply with separate fuses. On failure of the power supply to the annunciation

system for more than 3 seconds (adjustable setting) an indicating lamp shall light up

and a bell shall sound. A separate push button shall be provided for cancellation of

this audible alarm alone but the indicating lamp shall remain steadily lighted till the

supply to the annunciation system is restored. The sound of the audible alarm (bell)

provided for this annunciation shall be different from the audible alarm provided for

this annunciation system.

18.7. A separate voltage check relay shall be provided to monitor the failure of supply

(240 V AC) to the scheme mentioned above. If the failure of supply exists for more

than 2 to 3 seconds, this relay shall initiate visual and audible annunciation. The

annunciation system described above shall meet the following additional

requirements.

18.8. The annunciation system shall be capable of catering to all simultaneous signals

at a time.

i) One self resetting push button shall be provided on each panel for testing in fascia

window lamps. Push buttons for testing flasher and audible alarm circuit of annunciation

supply failure· monitoring shall also be provided. These testing circuits shall be so

connected that while test is being done it shall not prevent the registering of any new

annunciation that may land during the test.

iii) One set each of the following push buttons shall be provided on each panel.

a) Reset push button for annunciation system;

b) Accept push button for annunciation system.

iv) The annunciation shall be repetitive type and shall be capable of registering the fleeting

signal. For fault contacts which open on a fault, it shall be possible at site to change


annunciators from "close to fault" and vice versa.

v) The annunciator shall be suitable for operation with normally open fault contacts which

close on a fault. For fault contacts which open a fault, it shall be possible at site to

change annunciators from "close to fault" and vice versa.

vi) Only electro-magnetic relay type alarm and annunciation relay schemes are acceptable

and static type annunciation schemes are not acceptable. Contactors are not acceptable

for annunciation system.

19.0 Switches

19.1. Control and Instrument switches shall be rotary operated type with escutcheon

plates clearly marked to show operating position and circuit designation plates and

suitable for flush mounting with only switch front plate and operating handle

projecting out. Handles of different shapes and suitable inscriptions on switches aS

per clause 6.8 shall be provided as on aid switch identification.

19.2. The selection of operation handles for the different types of switches shall be as

follows:

1 Breaker & isolator switches Pistol grip, black

2 Selector switches Oval or knob, black

3 Instrument switches Round, knurled, black

4 Protection transfer switch Pistol grip, lockable & black

19.3. The control switch of breaker and isolator shall be of spring return to neutral type.

The spring return type shall be provided with target which shall indicate the last

operation of the switch. The control springs shall be strong and robust enough to

prevent inadvertent operation due to light touch. The spring return type switch shall

have spring return from close and trip positions to "after close" and "after trip"

positions respectively.

19.4. Instrument selection switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put) type.

Ammeter selection switches shall make-before-break type contacts so as to prevent

open circuiting of CT secondaries when changing the position of the switch. They

shall be of 5 position type viz R-Y-B-N-Off. Voltmeter transfer switches for AC shall

be suitable for reading all line-to-line and line-to neutral voltages for non-effectively

earthed systems and for reading all line to line voltages for effectively earthed

systems .

19.5. Lockable type of switches which can be locked in particular positions shall be

provided when specified. The key locks shall be fitted on the operating handles.

19.6. The contacts of all switches shall preferably open and close with snap action to

minimize arcing. Contacts of switches shall be spring assisted and contact faces

shall be with rivets of pure silver. Springs shall be used as current carrying parts.


19.7. The contact combination and their operation shall be such as to give

completeness to the interlock and function of the scheme. The contact rating of the

switches shall be as follows:

Contact Rating in Amps

110 V DC 240 V AC

a) Make and carry continuously 10 10

b) Make and carry for 0.5 Sec. 30 30

c) Break

i) Resistive load 3 7

ii) Inductive load with L/R= 40 0.2 7

20.0 Indicating Lamps

20.1. Indicating lamps shall be panel mounting type with rear terminal connections.

Lamps shall be of LED type. Lamps shall have translucent lamp covers to diffuse

light coloured red, green, amber, dear white or blue as specified. The lamp cover

shall be of screwed type, un-breakable and moulded from heat resisting material.

20% of lamps actually used on the boards and 10% of the lamp bases of various

colour actually used shall be supplied in excess to serve as spares.

20.2. The wattage and resistance of the lamps shall be as follows:

110 V -5 to 7 W - 1000 to 2000 Ohms

20.3. Bulbs and lenses shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from the front

of the panel. Tools, if required for replacing the bulbs and lenses shall also be

included in the scope of supply.

20.4. The indicating lamps with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a

continuous basis.

21.0 Position Indicators

21.1. Position indicators of 'SEMAPHORE' type shall be provided when specified as

part of the mimic diagrams on panels for indicating the position of circuit breakers,

isolating/earthing switches etc. The indicator shall be suitable for semi-flush

mounting with only the front disc projecting out and with terminal connection from the

rear. Their strips shall be of the same colour as the associated mimic.

21.2. Position indicator shall be suitable for either AC or DC operation as specified.

When the supervised object is in the closed position, the pointer of the indicator shall

take up a position in line with the mimic bus bars, and at right angles to them when

the object is in the open position. When the supply failure to the indicator occur the


pointer shall take up an intermediate position to indicate the supply failure. The

rating of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W.

21.3. The position indicators shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous

basis.

22.0 Trip Circuit Supervision Relays

22.1. Trip circuit shall be supervised by means of relays. The scheme shall

continuously monitor each trip coil in both pre-close and after-close of the breaker.

The scheme shall detect. i) Failure of DC supply to each trip coil. il) Open circuit of

trip circuit wiring and iii) Failure of mechanism to complete the tripping operation.

22.2. Also 2 Nos. indicating lamps to act in conjunction with trip circuit supervision

relays for healthy trip indication of 2 sets of trip coils shall be supplied.

22.3. Necessary external resistors for trip circuit supervision relays shall be supplied.

23.0 Flag Relays Shall Have

i) Hand reset flag indication

ii) Two elements

iii) Have necessary NO/NC contacts for each element/coil to meet scheme

requirements.

24.0 Detailed Description of Protections

The protection, auxiliary relay and timers and other equipment that are required to be

provided are included in the detailed equipment schedule of panels vide Annexure.-I of

this specification The detailed description of Back up protection and the associated

equipment is described below:

The setting ranges of relays given in specification are indicative. The setting ranges of the

equipment offered, if different from the ones specified, shall also be acceptable if they

met the functional requirements.

The bidder shall quote the protection equipment, meeting the following requirements.

33/11 KV, TRANSFORMER

a) Differential Protection

It shall have

ii) Triple pole high speed percentage biased differential type.

iii) An operating time not more than 30 milli Secs. At 5 times operating current setting of


20%.

iv) Three instantaneous high set over current units

v) Second harmonic restraint feature and fifth harmonic by pass/restraint feature and

also be stable under normal over fluxing conditions.

vi) an operating current setting of 20% or less,

vii) Suitable for rated current of 5A and 1 Ampere

viii) Adjustable bias setting range of 20% to 50%

ix) Two bias windings per phase

x) Stable on heavy through faults

xi) Include necessary separate interposing CTs for angle and ratio correction or have

internal features in the relay to take care of angle and ratio correction.

xii) Shall be of numerical type.

b) Over current and earth fault protection 33 KV 2.5 MV A transformer

The relay should be triple pole non-directional with IDMT characteristics. It should either be

numeric or electromagnet type, however offer for Areva make Micom series of relay will

be preferred.

c) Auxiliary relays for transformer protection devices

Auxiliary relay required for bucholtz trip and alarm, HV winding temperature trip & alarm, LV

winding temperature trip & alarm, oil temperature alarm & trip and low oil level alarm,

PRV trip, shall be provided. Each auxiliary relay shall have 2 pairs of contacts and one

hand reset flag indicators. The auxiliary relays may be of non-draw out type

d) Inter Tripping Relays

1 No. inter trip relay to trip HV and LV breakers of the transformer and to isolate the

transformer from supply shall be supplied. The inter trip relay shall be of high speed and

shall be provided with hand reset operation indicator and 4 NO + 2 N/C hand reset

contacts for 33 KV breaker and 13 NO + 3 N/C hand reset contacts for 11 KV breaker.

The protection scheme shall function as follows:

a) Differential relays operated: both HV, and LV breakers trip.

b) OIC & E/F on HV operated: both H.V and LV breakers trip.

c) Buchholz Relay Operated: both H.\( & L.V. breakers trip.

d) Winding temperature trip contact closed: both HV & LV. breakers trip.


e) Oil temperature - alarm only.

f) PRV Operated: both H.\( & L.V. breakers trip.

24.1. Relay and Control Panels for 33 kV Feeders

Following meters, relays etc shall be provided in the feeder panel, However. any other items

which are not specifically mentioned in this specification but are required to complete the

scheme and for satisfactory operation of scheme shall also be deemed to be included in

this specification.

1) PROTECTIVE RELAYS:

Over current relay 2 Nos

Earth fault relay 1 No

Relays for OIC and E/F protection shall

I. be of numeric non-directional type

II. be of triple pole type with two outer elements for O/C and the other for-E/F

protection.

III. be with IDMT characteristics with a definite minimum time of 3 sec at 10 times

settings.

IV. have a variable setting range of 50-200% for over current and 20-80% for earch

fault.

V. be rated for 5/1 ampere

VI. include hand reset flag indicator

2) INSTRUMENTS AND METERS

Following meters and instruments shall be provided in the panel:

a) One no. Ammeter Digital Type

b) One no. Voltmeter Digital Type

c) One no Watt meter of digital type

d) Electronic Trivector meter ( as per specification)

3) CONTROLS

Following control switches shall be provided in the panel:


a) One no., three position (i.e. trip-neutral-close) breaker control switch.

b) One no. Ammeter- selector switch.

c) Push button for trip circuit healthy indication.

d) Selector switch for voltmeter

4) INDICATION AND ALARMS

Following indicating arrangement shall be provided in the feeder panel:

a) Indicating lamps for CB ON/OFF positions 2 nos.

b) Indicating lamp for TRIP CIRCUIT HEALTHY CONDITION 2 No

c) Indicating lamp labeling Breaker Spring changed 1 No

d) Indicating lamp for low SF6 1 No

e) Indicating lamp for SF6 CB lockout 1 No

f) Mimic diagram indicating the relevant position of the single

Line diagram of the sub-station incorporating the semaphore

Indicators for circuit breakers 1 No.

Isolators 2 Nos.

and Earth switch 1 No.

g) Indicating lamp for Auto-trip indication with accept push button 1 No.

25.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY

Auxiliary supplies which shall be made available in substation are as follows:

a) A.C. supply 415 V/240 volts, 50Hz three/single phase

b) D.C. supply: 110 Volts

26.0 INSPECTION





the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification

and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found defective.


3.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER(OUTDOOR).

1.0 SCOPE :-

1.1. This specification covers design, manufacturing, testing, of 11 KV Porcelain Clad

Vacuum Circuit Breakers complete with all accessories required for its satisfactory

operation for the Sub T transmission solidly grounded system. The Breaker shall be

used for FeederControl/ protection in the system.

2.0 TYPE AND RATING :-

2.1. The circuit breaker shall be suitable for outdoor operation under the climatic

conditions as specified in Tender Specification without any protection from sun

and rain. The 11 KV circuit breakers shall have the following rating:-

SN Particulars Values

1. Number of Poles 3

2. Nominal System Voltage 11kV

3. Highest System Voltage 12kV

4. Frequency 50 Hz

5. Interrupting capacity at nominal system voltage 500MVA

6. Rated continuous Current 630A

7. Short Circuit current 25kA for 1sec

8. Lightning Impulse Voltage 75 kVp

9. One min power frequency withstand voltage 28kV rms

10. Total break-time for any current up to the

rated breaking current

5 cycles

11. Control Circuit Voltage 110Volt DC

12. Operating Duty for gang operation O-0.3sec.-CO-3 min-

CO

13. Minimum Clearances


14. a) Phase to Phase 280mm

15. b) Phase to Earth 190mm

16. c) Live part to ground 2750mm

17. Minimum Creepage distance 300mm

2.2. The above is minimum requirement. The suppliers may offer their standard design

keeping in view the minimum requirements.

2.3. The circuit breakers shall comply with the requirements of IS:13118(1991) or IEC

62271-100 with latest amendment thereof

3.0 VACUUM INTERRUPTER

3.1. The design of the vacuum interrupter shall be such that it gives trouble free operation

under normal load and fault conditions throughout the life of the equipment. As the

efficiency of the breaker depends on the degree of vacuum inside, it has to be ensured

by the that manufacturer that the it is maintained consistently during service. To know

the residual life of vacuum interrupter, an indicator/means to indicate status of

contact erosion should be provided.

3.2. Insulating ceramic body of the interrupter should have high mechanical strength and it

should be capable of withstanding high temperature without any significant

deterioration in its mechanical and electrical properties.

3.3. The metal/alloy used for the fixed and moving contacts shall have very low resistivity

and low gas content. They should be resistant to arc erosion and the contact should

have no tendency to get cold welded under the high vacuum in the interrupter.

3.4. The interrupter design should ensure rapid de-ionization of the gap so that normal

electrical strength of the gap is restored instantaneously.

3.5. The metallic bellow or any other similar vacuum sealing arrangement should be

provided at the moving contact and should have a long fatigue life.

3.6. Manufacturer‘s catalogue of vacuum bottle, indicating all the details shall essentially

be submitted.

4.0 INSULATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER

4.1. The insulation to ground, the insulation between open contacts and the insulation

between phases of the completely assembled circuit breaker shall be capable of

withstanding satisfactorily di-electric test voltage corresponding to specified basic

insulation level in the standard.


5.0 INSULATORS

5.1. Basic insulation level of the insulator and insulating porcelains shall be as specified

and porcelain shall be homogenous and free from cavities and other flaws. They shall

be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory

operation under conditions specified above. All insulators of identical ratings shall be

inter-changeable. The puncture strength of the insulators shall be greater than the

flash over value.

6.0 OPERATING MECHANISM

6.1. The circuit breaker shall be designed for remote control from the control room and in

addition there shall be provision for manual operation of circuit breakers during

maintenance and for local tripping and closing by normal means.

6.2. The circuit breakers shall have operation counter and mechanical ―open‖ and ―closed‖

indicator, in addition to facilities for remote electrical indication. An operation counter

shall also be provided in the common operating mechanism. The mechanical indicator

and operation counter shall be located in a position where it shall be visible to a man

standing on the ground level with the mechanism housing doors are in closed position.

6.3. The operating mechanism shall be of the spring charging type, by electric control

under normal operation. The mechanism shall be trip free electrically and

mechanically. Mechanism shall also be capable of performing satisfactorily, the re-

closing duty cycles.

6.4. All working parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant materials and all

bearings which require greasing shall be equipped with pressured grease fittings. The

mechanism shall be strong, quick in action and removable without disturbing other

parts of the circuit breaker.

6.5. Mechanism and breaker shall be such that the failure of any spring will not prevent

tripping and will not cause tripping or closing.

6.6. Operating mechanism should be motor operated spring charged type preferably

without chain drive.

6.7. Motor for spring charging shall be suitable to perform satisfactorily for input supply

voltage of 230V AC 50 Hz with a variation of (+) 10 and (-)20 percent. A.C. motor

should have overload protection.

6.8. Provision should also be made for mounting of mechanism box at an adequate height

and gear ratios shall be so chosen that one man should be able to charge the spring,

without any additional efforts.


6.9. The mechanical arrangement should be provided to facilitate manual tripping of circuit

breaker for emergency trip under emergent condition i.e. failure of DC supply, trip coil

burnt, mechanism being defective while arc quenching media is healthy

7.0 MOTORS:

7.1. Motors shall be single phase self-starting induction motor of appropriate capacity for

satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for driving equipment.

7.2. Motors shall be of self ventilated type having TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled)

enclosure. Depending upon the capacity and loading conditions Bidder/manufacturer

shall design suitable grease lubricated or oil lubricated bearings for above motors.

Bearing shall be so constructed that the loss of grease and its creeping along with

shaft into motor housing is prevented. It shall also prevent dirt and water from getting

into the motor.

7.3. Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent above

the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point and the motor

shall not be overloaded at any operating point of driven equipment that will arise in

service.

7.4. Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in expected life span

when operated continuously in the system having the particulars as given in principle

parameters.

7.5. All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on-line starting. These shall

be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed along with the driven

equipment without exceeding acceptable winding temperature even when supply

voltage drops down to 80% of the rated voltage.

8.0 CONTROL CUBICLE

8.1. A common control cubicle shall be provided to house electrical controls, monitoring

devices and all other accessories, except those which must be located on individual

poles. Cubicle shall be IP-55 of gasketed weather-proof construction, fabricated from

sheet steel of minimum 2.5 mm. thickness. The cubicle shall have front access door

with lock and keys. Space heater, internal illumination lamp, 3-pin 5A socket with

individual ON-OFF switches.

8.2. For local operation following shall be provided: -

a) LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch

b) TRIP/NORMAL/CLOSE control switches with pistol grip handle.

8.3. The control circuits shall be designed to operate on 110 DC and it shall be possible to

adopt to work on other voltages by simply changing the operating coils.

8.4. Shunt tripping coils shall be designed to operate satisfactorily within 70% to 110%


and shunt closing coil within 85% to 110% of the rated DC voltage.

8.5. AC Power supply for auxiliaries will be available at 230V single phase 50 Hz.

8.6. Necessary cable glands for the cables of the operating mechanism shall be provided.

The cables used for operation are un-armoured 2.5 sq. mm. copper control cables of

1100 V grade. Cable glands provided may therefore be suitable for 1 no. 7 core and 2

nos. 4 core unarmoured 2.5 sq. mm. copper control cable.

8.7. Circuit breaker shall be provided with trip free mechanism so that tripping instructions

could over-ride the closing instructions. An additional tripping coil shall also be

provided in the trip circuit. The second coil shall have separate tripping lever

arrangements in the mechanism, so as to avail full advantage of second trip coil. Also

the two trip coils shall have separate DC circuits, so that in the event of any short

circuit/ damage in any one of the trip coil, supply is available in the other one.

8.8. Circuit diagram of control circuit of VCB along with operating instructions (DO‘S/

DON‘T) shall be embossed on metallic plate duly laminated and the same shall be

fixed on the rear door of the control cubicle from inside.

9.0 WIRING

9.1. Wiring shall be completed in all respects to ensure proper functioning of the control,

protection, monitoring and interlocking schemes.

9.2. All wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade PVC insulated stranded copper

conductor of 2.5 sq. mm.

9.3. Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing wire

numbers as per wiring diagram.

9.4. Wire termination shall be done with crimping type connectors with insulating sleeves.

Wires shall not be spliced between terminals.

9.5. All spare contacts of auxiliary switches etc. shall be wired up to terminal blocks in the

control cubicle.

10.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS

10.1. Terminal blocks shall be of 1100V grade, box clamp type ELMEX 10 sq.mm or

approved equivalent. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminals.

Spare terminals, equal in number to 20% of active terminals, shall be provided.

10.2. Terminal block shall be such located that it allows easy access. Wiring shall be

so arranged that individual wires of an external cable can be connected to consecutive

terminals.


11.0 TERMINAL CONNECTORS

11.1. All circuit breakers shall be provided with 6 nos. terminal connectors suitable to

receive Dog ACSR/AAA conductors. Clamps shall be designed adequately to take

care of any bimetallic effect. Terminal connectors shall be tested for short circuit

current capability, temperature rise.

11.2. Terminal connector shall also meet the following requirements:

a) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured & tested as per IS:5561.

b) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp

edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

c) No part shall be less than 12 mm thick.

d) Nuts, bolts & washers used in the current path shall be stainless steel.

e) Bimetallic strips/sleeve copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2mm shall be cast

integral with Aluminum body.

f) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact

resistance.

g) Terminal connectors should be made of A6 Aluminum Alloy and manufactured by gravity

die-casting process only. Sand die-casted connectors are not acceptable.

h) Size of terminal connector for which the clamp is designed and also rated current under

site conditions shall be embossed/ punched on each part of clamps, except hardware.

i) Conductor shall be tightened by at least four bolts. Conductor hold length must not be less

than 60 mm.

j) Surface of clamps to be tightened by bolts should be flat in shape, so that it may be

possible to open the nuts and bolts by normal spanners. Therefore, any type of groove in

the clamp body for fixing of nuts should be avoided.

k) Portion of clamp to hold the conductor should be flat and straight and not zigzag in

construction at both the sides, so that heating of clamp by throttling action of current may be

avoided.

l) Space of at least 50% of diameter of nuts should be available after hole at both the sides of

conductor holding portion for better mechanical strength.

12.0 AUXILIARY CONTACTS

12.1. Eight numbers each of auxiliary contacts both of the normally open and normally

closed types shall be provided in each circuit breaker for use in remote indication and

control scheme of the circuit breaker and for providing safety interlocking. Special


contacts for use with trip coils which permit for relative adjustment with respect to the

travel of the circuit breaker shall also be provided. Wherever required, there shall be

provision to add more auxiliary contacts at a later date, if required. All auxiliary

contacts shall be placed in a weather proof casing and current rating of the contacts

shall be as mentioned in the bid. Provision shall be available to convert these spare

―normally-open‖ contacts to ―normally-closed‖ type and vice versa.

13.0 ACCESSORIES

13.1. Circuit breaker shall be supplied as a complete unit with internal wiring installed

and terminated in mechanism box and equipped with the following accessories :-

(i) Motor operated spring charged mechanism : 1 No.

(Motor voltage - 230 V AC, 50 Hz)

(ii) Trip coil suitable for 30 V DC : 2 Nos.

(iii) Closing coil suitable for 30 V DC : 1 No.

(iv) Pistol grip C.B. Control switch having : 1 No.

Trip /normal /close position

(v) Local/remote selector switch : 1 No.

(vi) Spring Charged indicator : 1 No.

(vii) Manual operating handle for maintenance : 1 No.

(viii) Facility for manual charging of spring : 1 No.

(ix) Operation counter : 1 No.

(x) Auxiliary contacts (8 NO - 8 NC) : 1 Set

(xi) Anti pumping device suitable for 30 V DC : 1 No.

(xii) Bimetallic terminal connectors suitable for : 6 Nos.

connecting WOLF /RACCOON ACSR/AAA conductor.

(xiii) Cubicle illuminating lamp with protective : 1 No.

cage and on/off switch

(xiv) Spare terminals block : 20% of the Total active terminals

(xv) Mechanical ON/OFF Indicator : 1 No.


(xvi) MCB for both AC and DC supply : 1+1 No.

(xvii) Space heater with thermostat and : 1 No.

ON/ OFF switch

(xviii) 3-Pin 5 A socket with on/off switch : 1 Set

(xiv) Earthing terminals : 2 Nos.

(xx) Foundation Bolts : As per requirement

(xxi) Cable glands : As per requirement

13.2. Other accessories which are not specified above, but are required for efficient

and trouble free operation of breaker, should also be provided without any extra cost.

14.0 MOUNTING OF CTs

14.1. The offered steel structures for breakers should also have adequate strength to

accommodate 3 nos. CTs on it with provision of suitable supports from ground.

15.0 TEMPERATURE RISE

15.1. The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment, when in

service at site, under continuous full load conditions, exposed to the direct rays of the

sun, shall not exceed 45˚ C above ambient temperature. The limits of temperature rise

shall be as per relevant standard.

.

16.0 TYPE TESTS

16.1. Type test certificates for the following tests, as per IS:13118 or IEC 62271-100

with latest amendment thereof, from any of the NABL accredited Laboratory shall

invariably be furnished

a. Short circuit duties test

b. Short time withstand current and peak withstand current tests

c. Temperature rise test

d. Mechanical endurance test

e. Lightning impulse voltage withstand test

f. Power Frequency withstand voltage test (dry & wet)

g. Single Capacitor bank switching test


h. Degree of protection IP-55 as per IS:13947:93(Part-I)/IEC 60529:89

16.2. Type test certificates must accompany drawing of type tested equipment, duly

sealed & signed by type testing authority.

16.3. Type tests should not have been conducted on the equipment earlier than 3

years from the date of opening of bids.

16.4. In case of any change in design/type of breaker already type tested and the one

being offered against this specification, the Employer reserves the right to demand

repetition of some or all tests without any extra-cost at NABL accredited lab.

17.0 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TEST :-

17.1. Employer shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of

manufacture where the Circuit Breakers are being manufactured and the Bidder shall

provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Bidder/manufacturer‘s works, raw

materials, manufacture of all the accessories and for conducting necessary tests as

detailed herein. The Employer reserves the right to insist for witnessing

acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items. The Bidder/manufacturer shall

submit the routine test certificates of bought out items and raw material also, at the

time of routine testing of the fully assembled breaker

17.2. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material

has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

17.3. Bidders shall indicate the inspections and checks carried out at various stages of

manufacture of the circuit breakers. Complete record of stage inspection would be

kept by the Bidder/manufacturer and this record should be made available for

inspection by the representative of the Employer. Bidder/manufacturer should indicate

the manufacturing programme and the The Employer will have a right to depute

inspecting officers during the manufacture of the equipment. The Employer reserves

the right to carry out stage inspections at all stages, for which advance intimation shall

be given and all necessary cooperation shall be rendered by the manufacturer.

17.4. At the time of inspection, Bidder/manufacturer shall identify each and every

item/accessories of the particular Circuit Breaker under testing. Unless all the items

are identified, the manufacture will not be treated as complete. Various tests stipulated

in IS/IEC shall be performed in the presence of the Employer‘s engineers or when the

inspection waiver has been given, in such a case, testing shall be done at the

manufacturer's works as per IS/IEC stipulations and same should be confirmed by

documentary evidence by way of Test Certificate which shall be got approved by the

Employer.

17.5. It is expected that before circuit breaker is finally offered for inspection, internal

testing of the same for various important parameters are already done. Routine test

report for such tests shall also accompany the letter of inspection call so that the

Inspecting Officer at the time of inspection may verify the parameters brought out in

the preliminary report. Details of all tests should be clearly brought out.

17.6. In case for any reason, inspection is not completed or equipment is not found to


be complete with all accessories as per confirmation given with the letter of inspection

call, the Employer will reserve the right to recover complete cost of deputation of

inspecting team to the works of the manufacturer.

17.7. Acceptance of any quantity of circuit breaker & its accessories shall in no way

relieve the successful bidder of his responsibility for meeting all the requirement of this

specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipments are later

found to be defective.

18.0 RATING PLATES & SURFACE FINISH PAINTING & GALVANISING:-

18.1. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a detailed rating plate. Details on the

rating plate shall be as per ISS and shall also indicate manufacturer name, serial no.,

order no. and month & year of dispatch.

18.2. All interiors and exteriors of tanks, mechanism, enclosures, cabinets and other

metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, greases

or other adhering foreign matter. All steel surfaces in contact with insulating oil, as far

as accessible, shall be painted with not less than two coats of heat resistant, oil

insoluble, insulating paint.

18.3. All metal surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of zinc

chromate and two coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner or hot dip galvanized

or two packs of aliphatic polyurethane finished paint. All metal parts not accessible for

painting shall be made of corrosion resistant material. All machine finished or bright

surfaces shall be coated with a suitable preventive compound and suitably wrapped or

otherwise protected. Paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and

extremes of weather within the limits specified.

18.4. Paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal

handling. All external paintings shall be as per shade no. 697 or any other suitable

shade of IS:5 or polyurethane paint

18.5. All ferrous parts & steel structure including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and

spring washers, support channels, structures, etc. shall be hot dip galvanized or

stainless steel or electro-galvanized.

19.0 DOCUMENTATION:

19.1. List of Drawings and Documents: Bidders shall furnish four sets of relevant

descriptive and illustrative published literature, pamphlets and following drawings for

preliminary study;

(a) General outline drawings showing dimensions and shipping weights.

(b) Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit breaker

including operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts with lifting dimensions for


maintenance.

(c) All drawings & data typical and recommended schematic diagram for control

supervision & reclosing shall be annotated in English. .

(d) Schematic diagrams of breaker offered for control supervision and reclosing.

(e) Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support structures.

(f) Short circuit oscillogram & certificates for similar type tested breakers. General

arrangement of foundation and structure mounting plan including weights of varnish

components and impact loading data for foundation design.

(g) Type test reports.

19.2. Successful bidders shall, within two weeks of placement of order, submit four

sets of final version of all the above drawings for the Employer's approval. The

Employer shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the

Bidder/manufacturer within two weeks. Bidder/manufacturer shall, if necessary, modify

the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for the Employer's

approval within two weeks from the date of comments. After receipt of the Employer's

approval, the Bidder/manufacturer shall, within three weeks, submit 4 prints per

breaker and two set of good qualities reproducible of the approved drawings for the

Employer's use.

19.3. Successful bidders shall also furnish two sets each of bound manuals covering

erection, commissioning, operation and maintenance instructions and all relevant

information and drawings pertaining to the main equipment as well as auxiliary devices

along with each breaker. Marked erection drawings shall identify the component parts

of the equipment as shipped to enable erection by the Employer‘s own personnel.

Each manual shall also contain one set of all the approved drawings, type test reports

as well as acceptance reports of the corresponding consignment dispatched.

19.4. Manufacturing of equipments shall be strictly in accordance with the approved


Employer.

19.5. Approval of drawings/work by the Employer shall not relieve the bidders of any of

his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the

drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of the applicable

standards rules and codes of practices. Equipment shall conform in all respects to high

standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant

standards at the time of supply and the Employer reserves the right to reject any

equipment or material which, in his judgment, is not in full accordance therewith.

20.0 PACKING AND FORWARDING:

20.1. Equipment shall be prepared for ocean shipment (foreign equipment) or rail road


transport (local equipment). Equipment shall be packed in suitable crates in such a

manner to protect it from damage and withstand handling during transit.

Bidder/manufacturer shall be responsible for and make good at his own expense any

or all damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing

and handling. Easily damageable materials shall be carefully packed and marked with

the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting

such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the

packing cases shall be supplied by the Bidder/manufacturer without any extra cost.

Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the

following information:

(a) Name of the consignee.

(b) Details of consignment.

(c) Destination.

(d) Total weight of consignment.

(e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.

(f) Handling and unpacking instructions.

(g) Bill of material indicating contents of

each package and spare material.

21.0 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT AND BOUGHT OUT ITEMS:

21.1. Bidders must furnish following information along with technical bid. A list of all the

accessories which will be supplied with the breakers should be furnished. While

furnishing the list of accessories, items which will be manufactured by the Bidders and

balance items, which will be procured from sub-Bidder/manufacturers should be

clearly identified and stipulated in the bid.

22.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

22.1. It is obligatory on the part of bidders to furnish Guaranteed Technical Particulars

enclosed with the bid document duly filled in complete in all respects. In case

Guaranteed Technical Particulars duly filled in complete in all respects is not

furnished, the bid may be treated as non-responsive


3.6 SPECIFICATION FOR INDOOR CONTROL PANELS for 11kV OUTDOOR VCB

1.0 SCOPE

1.1. This section contains the technical specification for the multi circuit indoor control,

indication, relay and metering panels for control of associated line or transformer through

outdoor switchgear at various 33/11 KV sub-stations. The control and relay panels and

other requirements specified under this section shall be complete in themselves with all

main and auxiliary relays, annunciation relay, fuses, links, switches, wiring, labels,

terminal blocks, earthing terminals, base frame, foundation bolts, illumination, cable

glands etc.

2.0 PANEL FINISH AND COLOUR

2.1. The purchaser has standardized that the colour finish shall be opaline green as per color

no. 275 of BS:381C (1948). Equivalent colors as per relevant Indian Standards or any

other standard are also acceptable. This color finish shall be applied to all the exterior

steel work of the panels. The exterior finish shall be semi glossy only and shall not be

fully glossy. The interior of the panels shall be painted with egg shell white.

3.0 PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND INSTRUMENTS

3.1. The protective relays shall be manufactured, tested and supplied with the guaranteed

particulars, as per following Indian Standard Specifications with latest amendment

thereof :-

(i) IS-3842 (Part-I):1967 : Application guide for electric relays for A.C. Systems over- current

relays for Feeders and Transformers

(ii) IS-3842 (Part-IV):1967 : Application guide for electric relays for A.C.system thermal

protection relays

(iii) IS-3231 (1965) : Electric relay for power system protection

(iv) IS-1885 (Part-I&II) : Electro-technical vocabulary Electrical relays & Electrical power

system protection

(v) IS-4483 : Preferred panel cut-out

(vi) IS-1248 : Indicating instruments

(vii) All indicating instruments shall conform to IS-722 or BS-89 or any equivalent or better

international standards...

The equipment meeting any other authoritative standards which ensures equal or better

quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Equipment for


which Indian Standards are not available the relevant British Standards and IEC

recommendations will be applicable. The bidder has to submit copies of all applicable

standards other than Indian along with the offer.

4.0 TYPE/ ACCEPTANCE TEST CERTIFICATES FOR RELAYS:-

4.1. Following type test certificates of relays as per IS: 3231 or any equivalent international

standard are required to be submitted by the bidder:-

(i) Performance test and operating characteristic tests

(ii) Thermal requirement test

(iii) Accuracy test

(iv) Re-set value test

(v) Re-set time test

(vi) Over shoot time test

(vii)Rated burden & impedance test

(viii)Insulation requirement test

(ix) Mechanical requirement test

(x) Contact performance test

5.0 PANEL CUT OUT AND DIMENSIONS:-

5.1. The panels shall be fabricated from 2mm steel sheet free from all surface defects. The

panels shall have sufficient structural re-enforcement to ensure a plane surface to limit

vibration and to provide rigidity during dispatch and installation. All control panels and

switchgear cubicles shall be made absolutely vermin-proof. Pre-treatment & painting of

panels shall be done as per the procedure detailed in this schedule.

5.2. The panels shall have the following dimensions :-

Height 1475 mm

Depth 300 mm

Width 600 mm

No deviation in height and depth is permitted. However, to accommodate instruments, relays,

control and indication gadgets of different make, increase in panel width alone is

permitted, subject to specific approval of purchaser.


5.3. The preferred panel cut out dimensions for mounting of the relays shall be as per Indian

Standard Specification IS-4483 (Part - I & II).

5.4. Design, material selection and workman-ship shall be such as to present a neat

appearance, outside and inside with no works of welds, rivets, screw or bolts head

apparent from the exterior surface of the Control Panels.

6.0 PANEL LIGHTING:-

6.1. For interior illumination, 11/15 Watt CFL operating at 230V AC 50 Hz with On/Off switch

shall be provided in each panel. The lamp/tube shall be located at the ceiling and

guarded with protective cage. The On/Off switch shall be mounted on one of the

sidewalls and shall be easily accessible.

6.2. One 3 pin-5 Amp. receptacle socket with On/Off switch and fuse shall be provided in

each control panel.

7.0 INDICATING LAMPS:-

7.1. The indicating lamps should be supplied with low voltage protection circuit (LVGP) and

surge suppressor circuit having LED indication. Lamp assembly should be of fire

retardant glass epoxy PCB, industrial heat resistant, fire resistant, non- hygroscopic

DMC material, polycarbonate lens in desired color shades of Red, Green, Amber, Yellow

etc. the intensity of light should be minimum 100 mcd at 20 mA.

8.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY:-

8.1. For each Control Panel, the purchaser will provide the following :-

i) 230V (+10% to -20%) single phase 2-wire, 50Hz neutral grounded A.C.supply, frequency

variation

±4%

ii) 110V (+ 10% to -15%) D.C. supply

9.0 CONTROL WIRING:-

9.1. The supplier shall provide complete wiring up to the terminal block for the equipment,

instrument devices mounted in the control panel strictly according to the wiring diagram

prepared by the supplier based on the purchaser‘s information and schematic diagram

and get approved from the purchaser.

9.2. The wiring shall be complete in all respects so as to ensure proper functioning of control,

protection and metering schemes. All unused potential free contacts of relays and

switches if any shall be wired up to the terminal block.

9.3. The Control Panels shall be supplied completely wired, ready for purchaser‘s external

connections at the terminal blocks.


9.4. For CT circuits, the wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade PVC insulated stranded

copper conductor of size 2.5 sq.mm.

9.5. For PT and for control circuits the wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V Grade PVC

insulated stranded copper conductor of size 1.5 Sq.mm.

9.6. Color coded wires should be used to facilitate easy tracing, as under:-

i) Three Phase A.C. Circuit: - Red for R Phase, Yellow for Y Phase, Blue for B Phase Black

for Neutral,and Green for earthing.

ii) Single Phase A.C. Circuit:-Red for Phase, Black for Neutral & Green for Earthing.

iii) D.C. Circuit: - Red for Positive, Yellow for Negative.

iv) Control Wiring: - Gray for annunciation and other control circuits.

(f) Each wire shall be identified at both ends with wire designation number by plastic ferrules,

as per wiring diagram based on latest revision of IS-375 to denote the different circuit

functions.

(g) All wire termination shall be made with compression type connectors. Wires shall not be

tapped or spliced between terminal points. All wire shall have crimp type termination and

direct connection at any place is not at all required.

(h) All series connected devices and equipment shall be wired-up in sequence. Loop-in/loop-

out system of wiring shall be avoided, as far as possible and the common buses shall

normally be made through the terminal block for better reliability of testing and

maintenance.

(i) Fuses and links shall be provided for isolation of individual circuit from the bus wires

without disturbing the other circuits and equipments.

(j) The DC trip and DC voltage supplies and wiring to main protective gear shall be

segregated from these for back up protection and also for protective apparatus for special

purposes. Each such group shall be fed through separate fuses, either direct from main

supply fuses or the bus wires.

(k) Since, a number of wires will run from one point to another, it is desired that the support

arrangement should be adequate and neat. The conventional method of bunching of wire

should not be adopted, since the same may create problems in case any wire is to be

removed. The wires should be accommodated in plastic channel with sliding plastic cover

mounted inside the panel, suitably. Inspection/removal of wires should be possible by

sliding the covers.

(l) Blank plastic channels should be provided by the sides of the panel to accommodate the

incoming cables from switchyard through the cable glands.

(m) The circuit diagram of control circuit along with operating instructions (DO/DO‘NT)

embossed on metallic plate duly laminated shall be provided on rear side of the door.

10.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS:-


10.1. Multi-way terminal blocks complete with necessary binding screws and washers

for wire connections and marking strips for circuit identification shall be provided for

terminating the panel wiring and outgoing cables. The terminal block shall be suitable for

receiving at least 2x2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductor wire per terminal.

10.2. Terminal blocks shall have shorting and disconnection facilities. The panel-side

and outgoing wires should be dis connectable just by opening the disconnecting links,

which slide up/down or left/right without dislodging the wires from their position.

However, disconnectable type terminal connectors with shorting facility may be limited to

CT & PT circuits only.

10.3. Instrument transformer wires shall be terminated through suitably mounted test

terminal blocks for site testing facility.

10.4. The terminal blocks shall be grouped according to circuit functions and each

terminal block group shall have at least 20% spare terminals. Adjacent rows of terminal

block shall be spaced not less than 100 mm apart. These shall be mounted vertically at

the sides of the cubicle and set obliquely towards rear doors to give easy access of

terminating end to enable ferrule number to be read without difficulty. The bottom of

terminal blocks shall be spaced at least 200 mm the cable gland of incoming multi-core

cables.

11.0 CABLE ENTRY:-

11.1. The control panel shall have provision of cable entry from the bottom. The box

base shall have 3 mm thick cover.

11.2. The cover plate of base box for 11 KV and 33 KV MULTI CIRCUIT C&R panels,

shall be provided with 3 cable glands for 7 core, 5 cable glands for 4 core and 3 cable

glands for 2 core 2.5 sq.mm unarmored copper control cable.

11.3. The gland plate shall be covered with dummy plate. The bidder has to provide all

required material to ensure IP55 protection. The purchaser will arrange for necessary

floor opening, below the panel and fixing of gland plate for control cable entry to suit the

supplier‘s requirement.

11.4. The wiring through terminal blocks shall be such located so that it is convenient

for floor opening.

11.5. For fixing cable glands on the box base cover, detachable gland plates of 4 mm

thick shall be mounted at least 100 mm above the floor level.

11.6. The cable gland plate and rear door shall be properly rubber gasketted to ensure

IP-55 protection.

11.7. Rigid supports shall be provided along the terminal block for holding plastic

channel. Suitable clamps shall also be provided in plastic channel for holding cables.

12.0 GROUNDING:-

12.1. 25mm x 6mm x 250mm copper ground bus shall be provided inside the panel for


effectively grounding all metal structures. Each continuous length of ground bus shall

have provision of two terminals at two separate points for connection to main ground grid

of the sub-station.

12.2. Potential and current transformer neutrals shall be grounded only at the terminal

blocks where they enter the control panel from the instrument transformers.

12.3. Wherever a circuit is shown grounded in the drawings, a single wire for the

circuit shall run independently to the ground bus and connected to it.

13.0 DOORS:-

13.1. Each panel shall be complete with end enclosing sheets on both sides and door

in the rear. The rear door shall be fitted with handle and also turn twist locks at top and

bottom. Proper rubber sealing gasket shall be provided on the door. A type test report

from the recognized Government laboratory or NABL approved lab on degree of

protection test IP-55 shall be furnished by the supplier.

14.0 CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS:-

14.1. The control panels required for installation at all the sub-stations shall be of

simplex type for multi circuit control. The control and indication apparatus, all meters and

relays shall be mounted in the front. The instruments and relays shall be flush mounted

pattern.

14.2. The labeling for the circuits shall be provided at the front control panel, as well as

on the inside wall. All indicating instruments, meters and important components shall

have identification labels from inside also, in addition to outside. The terminal block

shall have identification labels attached to them, clearly indicating type of supply ‗AC &

DC identification circuits‘ control (metering/protection) and instruments identification. For

example, the terminal block shall have an identification indicating that is for CT circuit,

metering, protection etc.

14.3. A mimic diagram showing single bus arrangement, with semaphore for breaker

position indicator etc. shall be provided for each circuit.

15.0 PROTECTION SCHEME:-

15.1. The control panels are required for protection of 11 KV Overhead lines

The protection schemes are described in the following clause:-

15.2. Feeder Protection :-


This will be in the form of a IDMT relay having 2 Nos. O/C and 1 No. E/F elements with high

set. The current settings of O/C relay element shall be from 2 % to 150% in equal step of

1-2 % each and of E/F relay element from 2 % to 80%. They shall be suitable to work on

110 Volt D.C. supply. The secondary rating of C.T. shall be 5 Amps. The numerical relays

having programmable characteristics as per above requirements are required. The relay

shall be of draw out type with CT shorting facility. Further, the relay shall have self re-set

contacts and hand re-set flag arrangement. The tripping shall be routed through a high

speed master trip relay with hand reset facility and flag relay.

16.0 CONTROL AND INDICATION CIRCUITS: -

11 KV feeders): 11 KV multi circuit control & relay panel for control of two feeders shall have

the following instruments, relays and accessories:-

Particulars 11 KV I 3 pole 5 Amp Numeric IDMT relay 30 V DC with self-reset contacts and

hand reset flag

(Flush pattern) shall be suitable for selecting following settings :-

a. O/C Element (2% to 200%) 2 nos. relay each with 2 O/c and 1

E/f element b. E/F Element (2% to 80%) with high set

c. Operating Time plug setting With Multiple characteristics

II Pistol grip Circuit Breaker Control switch T-N-C 2

III Digital Ammeter of 96X96.mm size flush pattern CT operated

5 Amp Accuracy class 1.0.

2

(200-100 )

Range 0 to 125 or 250

IV Ampere meter selector switch 2

V Hand Reset Master trip Relay separate for each circuit 2

VI Indicating Lamps

a. CB-ON (RED) 2

b. CB-OFF (GREEN) 2

c. TCH coil-1 2

d. TCH coil-2 2


e. Auto trip 2

f. DC Fail ( separate for each circuit ) 2

VII Push buttons

A Alarm accept 2

B Alarm reset 2

c. Pre close Trip Circuit check coil-1 2

d. Pre close Trip Circuit check coil-2 2

E Auto trip 2

f. DC Fail test(Separate for each circuit ) 2

VIII Alarm Bell (DC) 30 Volt DC 1

IX Alarm Bell (AC) 230 Volt AC 1

X Cable glands with dummy cover suitable for 2.5 sq.mm Unarmored

copper control cable fitted on cover plate.

3 nos. for 8 core

5 nos. for 4 core

3 nos. for 2 core

XI Box type base of 100 mm height painted with water resistant

black rubber paint complete with 3mm thick cover plate fitted

with cable gland box and cover.

1 set

XII Set of Foundation bolts for grouting panel box base with panel 1 set

XIII Illumination CFL 11/15 Watt lamp with protective cage &

On/Off Switch.

1

XIV 3 pin-5 A power socket with On/Off Switch. 1

XV MIMIC (10X3 mm) made of Aluminum strip painted black


showing single bus and breaker position semaphore indicator

As required

XVI Semaphore CB position indicator 2

13.15.2 A trip healthy lamp shall be provided for each circuit breaker and connected in such a

way as

to indicate the healthy condition of the trip circuit. The lamp should have the indication on

demand when

breaker is on. Such indication is also necessary when the breaker is off, but it should be

possible to

check the trip circuit condition before closing the circuit breaker. In brief, pre and post close

trip

supervision facility on demand is required and shall be included.

13.15.3 The automatic tripping of the circuit breaker due to operation of protective relays shall

be

indicated by a common audible DC alarm. The DC fail alarm shall be indicated by a common

audible

AC bell for each of the multi circuit panel

13.15.4 The bidders are required to submit C&R panel general arrangement and schematics

indicating

all relevant details of all relays and gadgets along with bill of material.

13.15.5 The mimic of 10X3 mm thick Aluminum strip painted black showing single bus

arrangement and

breaker position semaphore indicator shall be provided 700 mm above the box type base

channel on

each C&R panel.

NOTE: Any other indications or control equipments which are required for proper protection/

operation

of circuit breaker should be provided in control panel, without any extra cost.

17.0 RELAYS:-

16.1 All relays, except where otherwise approved, shall be capable of breaking the maximum

current which shall not be affected by vibration or by external magnetic fields. The

contacts shall be of silver, platinum or other better materials and shall be suitable for

efficient and reliable operation of protection


scheme.

16.2 All relays /auxiliary relay, which are connected to complete the tripping circuit of the

breaker coil,

shall be provided with approved flag indication, which whenever possible shall be

mechanically

operated type. Indicators shall also be provided on such additional relay elements as it will

enable

identification the type & phase of fault condition to be identified. Each indicator, whether of

the

electrically or mechanically operated type, shall be capable of being reset by hand, without

opening the

relay case. Each indicator shall be so designed that it can not move before the relay has

completed its

operation. It shall not be possible to operate any relay by hand without opening case.

16.3 All relays shall be so arranged that on opening the case it shall be impossible for any

dust which

may have collected in or upon the case to fall on the relay mechanism.

16.4 The numerical Over current and earth fault relays shall have inverse definite minimum

time limit

having programmable characteristics as per above requirements. Further, these relays shall

have self

reset contacts with hand reset flag arrangement. The relay rating shall be 5 Amps.

13.17.0 INSTRUMENTS:-

13.17.1 All indicating instruments shall conform to IS-1248 and shall be of type and sizes

specified in

GTP. They shall be capable of carrying their full load currents continuously without heating.

They shall

have long clearly divided and indelibly marked scales of engraved or enameled and the

pointers shall

be of clean outline. The design of pointers and scales shall be got approved. The marking on

the dials

shall be restricted to the scale marking. All indicating instruments, shall be provided with non-

reflecting


glass type fronts. All indicating instruments shall be of class 1.0 accuracy.

13.17.2 The bidders shall arrange to furnish type test certificate for Ammeter and Voltmeter

and all

relays along with the bid.

13.17.3 It may be carefully noted by the Bidder that automatic tripping of the circuit breaker

due to

operation of protective relay shall be indicated by audible alarm. The offered alarm scheme

shall be

complete in all respects including one DC bell for trip alarm with a contactor/ auxiliary relay

suitable to

handle breaking of DC bell current. The contactor/auxiliary relay will get energized through

the self

reset alarm contacts of protective relay and will remain actuated by its own seal-in contact. A

push

button shall be provided to accept alarm by breaking the seal in contact. It may also be noted

that they

should organize services of their engineer at any site if any problem is reported either by the

purchaser

or field units.

13.18 TESTS:-

18.1 Each control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the

factory, prior

to dispatch.

18.2 The tests shall include wiring continuity tests, insulation tests and functional tests to

ensure

operation of the control scheme and individual equipment.

18.3 The test procedures shall have prior approval of the purchaser.

18.4 All instruments, meters and relays shall be tested and calibrated in accordance with

relevant

standards.

18.0 TEST CERTIFICATE:-

Each control & relay panel should be tested by the manufacturer at their works for all routine


and acceptance tests and copies of test certificate in duplicate giving results of these

tests shall be furnishedto the purchaser along with letter / offer for inspection.

19.0 WITNESSING OF TESTS

The routine/ acceptance tests results shall be witnessed by purchaser‘s representative, if so

desired by the purchaser, prior to dispatch of the equipment from the works. The supplier

shall give at least Fifteen (15) days advance notice of the date when the tests are to be

carried out.

20.0 TEST CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENTS:-

Test certificate for important components like Ammeter, Voltmeter, Relays and Control Switch

shall be produced at the time of inspection and shall be enclosed with the inspection

report.

21.0 PRE-TREATMENT AND PAINTING PROCESS:-

21.1. The Control Panel sheet steel shall be subjected to pre-treatment process before

painting. The process shall be carried out as under. The procedure can broadly be

divided as ―Metal treatment‖ and ―painting‖.

(A) METAL TREATMENT:-

i) DEGREASING :-

This can be achieved either by immersing in hot alkaline degreasing bath or in hot di-

chloroethelene solution. In case degreasing is done by alkaline bath, rinse with cold water

thoroughly.

ii) PICKLING :-

This is to remove rust and metal scales by immersing in diluted sulphuric acid (approximately

20%) at nearly 80 degree centigrade until scale and rust are totally removed.

iii) Rinse in cold water in two tanks to remove traces of acids.

iv) Treat with phosphoric acid base neutralizer, for removal of chlorine from the above acid

pickling and again wash with running water.

v) PHOSPHATING :-

Immerse in grenadine Zinc phosphate solution for about 20 minutes at 80 to 90 degree

centigrade. The uniform phosphate coating of 4 to 5 gms per sq. meter shall be achieved.

vi) Swill in cold water.

vii) Rinse in deorylyte bath at 70 to 80˚C to neutralize any traces of salts.

viii) Seal the above phosphate coating with hot dilute chromate solution.


ix) Dry with compressed air.

(B) PAINTING:-

Sequence of process shall be as follows:

i) Spray one coat on wet surface by specially developed, ―High Luster‖ Zinc chromate primer

and stove at 150 to 160 degree centigrade for 25 to 30 minutes. Alternatively, Red-Oxide

primer with zinc chromate content may be used. However, former process is preferred.

ii) Rubbing and putting: - Apply putty to fill up scars, if any, to present smooth surface and

stove 15 to 20 minutes. Apply putty several times to get the perfectly smooth finish.

iii) Surfacing:- Sand down with mechanical abrasive and stove for 20 minutes.

iv) Primer:- Spray second coat of primer as per (i) above or grey primer surface on wet and

stove for 30 to 40 minutes at 150 degree centigrade.

v) Finish Paint: - Rub down dry and spray first coat of synthetic enamel finish paint on wet

and stove for 30 minutes.

vi) Surfacing:- Sand down or rub dry to prepare for final finish. Spray 2 coats of synthetic

enamel finish paint on wet and stove it at 150 degree centigrade for 30 minutes.

NOTE:-

i) Necessary stiffeners may be welded between large cut outs to provide rigidity before

painting process.

ii) Painting process shall be done within 24 Hrs. of completion of metal treatment.

iii) Small coating shall be supplied along with equipment for touching up at site.


3.7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11kV INDOOR VACUUM SWITCHGEAR

1.0 SCOPE

1.1. This specification covers the manufacture, testing at manufactures works, transport to

site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of indoor 11 KV ,9 unit Panel

switch boards which includes 11KV circuit breakers with current transformers, voltage

transformers, protective devices, protective relays measuring instruments and meters

etc. and wired complete with all accessories as specified.

2.0 STANDARD

2.1. Latest issues of the following standards shall be applicable.

I.S. 13118 Circuit Breakers

I.S. 2705 Current transformers

I.S. 3156 Voltage transformers

I.S. 2099 Porcelain Bushing, High Voltage

I.S. 335 Insulating oil

I.S. 1554 Cables

I.S. 3231 Electrical relays for power system protection

I.S. 1248 Electrical indicating instruments.

3.0 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, LITERATURES ETC.

3.1. The successful tenderer shall be required to submit to the purchaser for his approval five

copies of drawings and other details which include bue not limited to the following:-

a) General out line drawings with full dimensions.

b) Detailed drawings showing the mounting arrangement of the switchboards, provisions for

cable entries etc.

c) Detailed drawings showing the provisions kept for extension of the switchboards.

d) List of all component parts, fittings and accessories of the switchboards with maker‘s


name, type, ratings etc.

e) A.C. and D.C. schematic and wiring diagrams.

3.2. After approval of drawings the tender shall submit to the purchaser for the reference and

record five copies of the above drawings including the following leaflets / manuals (in sic

copies):

a) Instruction books / operation and maintenance manuals for circuit breaker and other

component parts.

b) Descriptive literature/leaflets on construction and other details of circuit breakers and other

component parts.

3.3. In addition to the above successful tenderer shall supply three sets of all the above final

drawings, literatures, manuals etc under a common cover with each and every sets of

switchboard. All the above drawings, literatures, manuals etc. shall from a part of the

contract.

4.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:

4.1. The switchboard shall be metal enclosed, floor mounting, single front self supporting

cubical type suitable for indoor. The switchgear shall be easily extendable in future.

4.2. The switchgear assembly shall be designed for the power system having the following

parameters.

a). Nominal system voltage: 11KV

b). Highest system voltage: 12KV

c). Frequency: 50 Hz.

d). System earthing: Solidly earthed neutral

e). System fault level: 250 MVA

f). Degree of protection of switchgear assembly: 1PH3 as per IS: 3427

5.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:

5.1. The 11 KV switchgear panels shall be made of stretched leveled steel plates of thickness

not less than 3 mm and structural steel having light sections.

5.2. The steel panel and frame work shall have rigorous surface treatment before application

of suitable primer and two coats of paints, painting shall be a anti-corrosive and anti-

condensive type.


5.3. Each panel shall be divided into independent compartment completely isolated from one

another to house the circuit breaker, instruments, relay, bus bar, cable boxes etc. The

front compartment housing the breaker shall be such that the breaker can be taken out

only when it is in open condition.

5.4. The switchgear boards shall have a single front, single tier, fully compartmentalized,

metal enclosed construction, comprising of row of freestanding floor mounted panels.

Each circuit shall have a separate vertical panel with distinct compartments for circuit

breaker ,cable termination, main busbar and auxiliary control devices. The adjacent

panels shall be completely separated by steel sheets except in busbar compartments

where insulated barriers shall be provided to segregate adjacent panels. However,

manufacturer‘s standard switchgear design without internal barriers in busbar

compartment may also be considered.

5.5. The circuit breakers and bus PTs shall be mounted on withdrawable trucks, which shall

roll out horizontally from service position to isolated position. The breaker truck shall be

floor mounted so that it can easily be pulled out on the control room floor and the help of

trolly etc. are not to be utilized.

5.6. The switchgear assembly shall be dust, moisture, rodent and vermin proof, with the truck

in any position SERVICE, ISOLATED, TEST or removed, and all doors and covers

closed. All doors, removable covers and glass windows shall be gasketted all round with

synthetic rubber or neoprene gaskets.

5.7. The bus VT/relay compartments shall have degree of protection not less than IP : 52 in

accordance with IS:2147. However, remaining compartments can have a degree of

protection of IP:42. All louvers if provided shall have very fine brass or GI mesh screen,

IPH-2 degree of protection as per IS: 3427 to all live parts shall (whether isolated or

removed from panel) even when the breaker compartment door is open. Tight fitting

garments / gaskets are to be provided at all openings in rely compartment.

5.8. Circuit breaker shall be vacuum; draw out type housed in a separate cubicle of the

switchboard and shall be enclosed from all sides. A sheet steel hinged lockable door

shall be at the front. It shall be possible to withdraw the circuit breaker to ‗Test‘ and

―Isolated‘ position with the door closed. Door interlock shall be provided such that the

door can only be opened after withdrawing the breaker to ‗Isolated‘ position and the

breaker cannot be racked into the ‗Service‘ position unless the door is closed. A visual

indication as to show when the breaker is in „Service‟, „Test‟ of „Isolated‟ position

shall be provided in front of the door.

5.9. The switchgear shall be cooled by natural airflow and cooling by any other method shall

not be accepted.

5.10. Total height of the switchgear panels shall not exceed 2600 mm. The height of

switches, pushbuttons and other hand-operated devices shall not exceed 1800 mm and

shall not be less than 700mm.

5.11. Switchgear construction shall have a bushing or other sealing arrangement

between the circuit breaker compartment and the busbar / cable compartments, so that

there is no air communication around the isolating contacts in the shutter area with the

truck in service position.

5.12. The breaker and the auxiliary compartments provided on the front side shall have


strong hinged doors, busbar and cabling compartments provided on the rear side have

bolted compartment covers with self retaining bolts. Breaker compartment doors shall

have locking facility.

5.13. In the service position, the truck shall be so secured that it is not displaced by

short circuit. Busbars, jumpers and other components of the switchgear shall also be

properly supported to withstand all possible short circuit forces corresponding to the

short circuit rating specified.

5.14. Suitable base frames made out of steel channels shall be supplied along with

necessary anchor bolts and other hardware, for mounting of the switchgear panels.

These shall be dispatched in advance so that they may be installed and leveled when

the flooring is being done, welding of base frame to the insert plates as per approval

installation drawings.

5.15. The switchboard shall have the facility of extension on the both sides Adopter

panels and dummy panels required to meet the various busbar

6.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING

6.1. FOR INCOMER

6.2. FOR BUS COUPLER

6.3. FOR OUTGOING FEEDER

7.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMER RATING

7.1. FOR TRANSFORMER INCOMING

(i) Accuracy class : a) Core -I : 0.5 with ISF less than 5

b) Core –II : 5 P with ALF 10

c) Core –III : PS (for 3 core CT only)

(ii) Rated Burden a) Core –I : 30 VA

b) Core –II : 15 VA

(iii) Knee point voltage : 150 volts (for core –III )

(iv) Secondary Resistance : Max 0.3 ohm (for core-III of 3-core C.T. only).

(v) Ratio: : 600-300-150/5/5/2.89


7.2. Current Transformers for outgoing (feeders)

(i) Ratio : 100-200/5-5

(ii) Accuracy class : a) Core -I : 0.5 with ISF less than 5


(iii) Rated Burden : a) Core –I :30 VA

b) Core –I : 15 VA

7.3. Current Transformers for Bus Section

(i) Ratio : a) 150-300/5-5 type - I & II (B)

(ii) Accuracy class : a) Core -I : 0.5 with ISF less than 5


(iii) Rated Burden : a) Core –I : 15 VA

b) Core –I : 15 VA

8.0 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS

8.1. . The tenderer shall quote for oil immersed or cast-resin type having the following

particulars for the purpose of metering:

1. Rated voltage ratio : 11000/110

2. No. of phases : 3 Phases / star - star connected

3. Rated Burden : 100 VA per phase

4. Class of accuracy : 0.5

5 Primary wiring of the PTs shall be protected by suitable H.R.C. fuse.

8.2. One set of 11 KV/110 V Pts shall be provided where there is only one transformer and

two sets having two numbers of transformers.

9.0 PROTECTIVE RELAYS:

9.1. All the incoming and outgoing switchgear units shall be provided protective relays to

disconnect the faulty circuits with speed and certainty without interfering with healthy


circuits.

9.2. The protective relays mounted on the panels shall be of the draw out type. The relavs

must be capable of resetting without necessity of opening the case. The relays shall be

provided with flag indicates to enable the type of fault conditions to be identified.

9.3. Incoming and outing feeders units and the bus coupler panel shall be provided with

combined over current and earth fault relay with current range of 50-200% for O/C with

inverse characteristics and 20-80% for E/F relay of time range 0.3 secs at 10 times

current.

10.0 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

10.1. All instruments shall be switchboard type, back connected, suitable for flush

mounting and shall comply with the requirements of latent issues of relevant Indian

Standards. The instrument cases shall be dust proof, water tight, vermin proof and

specially constructed to adequately protect the instruments against damage or

deterioration due to high ambient temperature and humidity.

10.2. All instruments shall be access adjustable and calibrated before dispatch and

shall have means for calibration check and adjustment at site.

10.3. All ammeters shall be digital type with direct reading scales. The scale value of

ammeters shall be as per the primary current ratings of the associated current

transformers. The rated current of ammeter elements shall be 5 ampere and accuracy

class 1.0 as per IS: 1248.

10.4. All voltmeters shall be of digital type with direct reading scales. The maximum

scale value of voltmeters shall be 50% in access of the primary voltage of associated

PT. The rated voltage of the voltmeters shall be 110 volts A.C. and accuracy class shall

be 1.0 as per IS: 1248.

10.5. Indicating wattmeters shall be of digital type of accuracy class 1.

10.6. Energy meters shall be digital type of accuracy class 0.5.and of Secure make or

L&T make preferably..

11.0 BUS – BARS

11.1. The panels shall incorporate a single bus bar system. The bus bars of high

conductivity (as per IS: 5082) copper of adequate uniform cross-section shall be

provided. The bus bars shall extend along the entire length of the switchgear.

11.2. The minimum current carrying capacity of bus bar shall be 800 amperes for type

– I switchboards and 1250 amperes for type –II and III switchboards.

11.3. The bus bar shall be adequately supported and braced to withstand the thermal

and electro-mechanical forces due to the short –circuit current as specified for the circuit

–breaker.


11.4. Bus-bar joints shall be bolted type. Bus bars shall be thoroughly cleaned at the

joint locations and suitable contact grease shall be applied just before a joint.

12.0 SMALL WIRING AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

12.1. All panels shall be furnished completely factory wired up to terminal blocks ready

for external connections. All wiring shall be switchboards type, with annealed copper

wires with PVC insulation for 1100 volts complying with requirements of latest issue of

IS: 1554 (Part-I). The sizes of the wiring for different circuits shall be go chosen as to

provide ample margin for the purposes intended and shall be subjected to approval of

the purchaser. However minimum cross section of wires t be used shall not be less than

1.5. sq.m. All the operating coils and small wires shall withstand a power frequency ten

voltage of 2 KV for one minute.

13.0 SAFETY EARTHING

13.1. Earthing of current free metallic parts of metallic bodies of the equipment on the

panel and the switchboards shall be done with soft drawn single conductor bare cooper.

A copper ground bus extending the entire length of the panels shall be provided.

Suitable clamp type terminals shall be provided for connecting both ends of the bus to

the station earth system. The earth connection of instrument transformers wherever

necessary shall be connected with the main earth wire of the panel earthing system.

Multilpe earthing of any instrument transformer circuit shall be avoided.

14.0 CABLE BOXES AND CABLE GLANDS:

14.1. Cable boxes with cable glands shall be supplied with each of the panel. It should

be of adequate dimension for terminals of 11 KV cables of sizes 150 and 180 sq.mm.

14.2. The 11 KV cable boxes shall preferably be located at the back of the

switchboards and shall be suitably mounted for cables rising from cable trenches

running at floor of the control room. The cable glands provided at the entrance shall

facility for earthing of amounting.

14.3. All control/Wire entries should be by means of suitable cable glands such glands

should be of brass and tinned.

15.0 DETAILS OF FITTING AND ACCESSORIES

15.1. The 11 KV switchboards shall consist of the following equipments for each

incoming outgoing and bus-coupler panels as per single line diagram enclosed.


15.2. Incoming panel (Transformer panel)

I. Circuit Breaker:

1 No. : - Triple pole circuit breaker.

- 630 A for switchboard type-I and II.

- 800 A for switchboard type –II & IV only.

1 No. :Manually, charged independent spring closing, mechanism fitted with

mechanical ―ON‖ and ―OFF‖ indications.

1 No. : Hand trip device.

1 No. : Shunt trip coil suitable for 110 D.C.

II. Current and potential Transformers

1 No. : Three phase, 3 limb withdraw able type potential transformer.

Ratio : 11 KV/110 volts.

3 Nos. : Current transformer of ratio as specified.

III. Meters and Instrument:

1 No. : Ammeter with selector switch.

1 No. : Voltmeter with selector switch.

1 No. : Electronic Tri-vector Meter

1 No. : Test terminal block for meters.

IV. Relays:

1 Set : Over current and earth fault relay.

1 Set : Testing links and terminals for relays.

Indication

2 No. : Indicating lamps for indication of ‗ON‘ and ‗OFF‘ position of breaker.

1 No. : Indicating lamp labeled ―trip Circuit healthy‖ with push button.


V. Annunciation:

Annunciation: No annunciation facia shall be provided for Outgoing panel

VI. Other Equipments and fitting:

Same as for incoming panel but cable box shall be suitable for following size of cable:

1 No. : 3 core 11 KV cable of size up to 150 sq.mm.

15.3. BUS SECTION PANEL:

Same as detailed for incoming panel in clause 7.16.1 but with following

modifications/additions/deletions:

I. Circuit Breaker:

a). 630 A : for switchboard type I B and II B.

b). 800 A : for switchboard type IIIB and IV B.

II. Current and potential transformer

NO Potential transformer, CT ratio as specified for bus section panel.

III. Meters and Instruments:

All meters except the ammeter with selection switch shall be deleted.

IV. Relays:

Only 1set O/C & E/F relay shall be provided.

V. Indication:

Indicating lamp labeled ―Auto trip‖ with accept push button associated with Auto trip alarm

shall be added.

VI. Annunciation:

No annunciation facia shall be provided for bus section panel.

VII. Other Equipments and Fittings:

Cable box shall be deleted.

15.4. COMMON ALARM AND ANNUNCIATION:


I. Each switchboard shall be provided with a suitable common alam system for:

a). D.C. Power supply failure.

b). A.C. Power supply failure.

c). Auto trip alarm.

II. An AC operated relay with AC buzzer and AC indicating lamp shall be provided

for annunciation of DC failure.

III. ADC operated relay with DC buzzer and DC lamp shall be provided for AC

failure.

IV. Alarm and annunciation scheme shall be provided completed with horns,

buzzers, relays, alarm connection push buttons, alarm test push buttons

etc.

16.0 CIRCUIT LABELING:

16.1. Each switchgear shall be appropriately such as ‗INCOMING

TRANSFORMER‘, OUTGOING – FEEDER and BUS – SECTION‘, Associated Circuit

breaker ratings, CT & PT ratio and any other information, manufacturer feels necessary

shall also be included in the label.

17.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

17.1. The bidder shall offer equipment performance guarantee for a minimum

period of 1 year from the date of commissioning.

18.0 . SPECIAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF SWITCHGEAR:

18.1. Switchgear shall be installed on finished surfaces, concrete or steel sills.

Contractor shall be required to install and align any channels sills, which form part of

foundations. Circuit breaker trolley wheels shall move on channels, which shall form part

of floor. The channel length shall be minimum of 1-meter form the door of switchgear

panel. Power bus enclosure, ground and control splices of conventional nature shall be

cleaned and bolted together with torque wrench of proper size or by other approved

means. Tape or compound shall be spilled where called for in drawing Contractor shall

take utmost care in handling instruments, relays and other delicate mechanism.

Wherever the instruments and relays are supplied loose along with switchgear, they

shall be mounted only after the associated switchgear panels have been erected and

aligned. The blocking materials, employed for safe transit of instrument and relays shall

be removed after ensuring that panels have been completely installed and no further

movement of the same would be necessary. Any damage shall be immediately reported

to Engineer.


18.2. Foundation work for all switchgear panels will be carried out by contractor. For

R&M of existing substation foundation work shall be done wherever required as per site

condition.

18.3. Circuit breaker may be provided with inter pole barriers of insulting materials, if

the same is standard design of the manufacture. But use of inflammable materials like

Hylam shall not be acceptable.

18.4. The control switch located on the switchgear would normally be used for

operation of circuit breaker in service/isolated position, and for tripping it in an

emergency.

18.5. Facilities shall be provided for mechanical tripping of the breaker.

18.6. Auxiliary contacts of breaker may be mounted in the fixed portion or in withdraw

able truck as per the standard practice of the manufacture, and shall be directly operated

by the breaker operating mechanism.

18.7. Auxiliary contacts mounted in the portion shall not be operable by the

operating mechanism, once the truck is withdrawn from the service position, but remain

in the position corresponding to breaker open position. Auxiliary contacts mounted on

the truck portion and dedicated for use shall be wired out in series with a contact

denoting breakers service position. With truck withdrawn, the auxiliary contacts shall be

operable by hand for testing.

18.8. For Employer‘s use six (6) normally opened (NO) and six (6) normally

closed (NC) auxiliary contacts shall be wired out to the terminal blocks. Contact

multiplication, if necessary to meet the above contact requirement, shall be done through

suitable latch relay of English Electric type VAJC-11 or equivalent.

18.9. It shall be possible to easily insert breaker contractor of one feeder into any one

of the panel meant for same rating but at the same time shall be prevented from

inserting it into panels meant for a different type of rating.

18.10. All bus bar and jumper corrections shall be of high conductivity aluminium alloy.


They shall be adequately supported on insulators to withstand electrical and mechanical

stresses due to specified short circuit currents.

18.11. Busbar cross-section shall be uniform throughout the length of

switchgear. Busbar and other high voltage connection shall be sufficiently corona free at

maximum working voltage.

18.12. Contact surfaces at all joints shall be silver plated or properly cleaned

and no oxide grease applied to ensure an efficient and trouble free connection. All bolted

joints shall have necessary plain and spring washers. All connection hardware shall

have high corrosion resistance. Suitable bimetallic connectors shall be used for

aluminium to copper connections.

18.13. Busbar insulators shall be of arc and track resistant high strength, non-

hygroscopic, non-combustible type and shall be suitable to withstand stresses due to

over-voltages, and short circuit current. Busbar shall be supported on the insulators such

that the conductor expansion and contraction are allowed without straining the

insulators. In case of organic insulator partial discharge shall be limited to 100 pico

coulomb at rated voltage x1.1/ 3. Use of insulators and barriers of inflammable material

such as Hylem shall not be accepted.

18.14. All busbur shall be colour coded.

18.15. The temperature of the busbars and all other equipment, when carrying

the rated current continuously shall be limited as per the stipulations of relevant India

Standards, duly considering the specified ambient temperature (50 deg. C). The

temperature rise of the horizontal and vertical busbars when carrying the rated current

shall be in no case exceed 55 deg.C for silver plated joints and 35 deg.C for all other

type of joints. The temperature rise at the switchgear terminals intended for external

cable termination shall not exceed 35 deg.C. Further the switchgear parts handled by

the operator shall not exceed a rise of 5deg.C.

19.0 PAINTING:

19.1. Al sheet steel work shall be pretreated in tanks in accordance with IS:

6005. Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed

by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then

these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphated coating

shall be Class ‗C‘ as specified in IS: 6008. The phosphated surface shall the rinsed and

passivated prior to application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer

application, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint on panels shall be applied.

Finishing paint on panels shall be shade 692 (smoke grey) of IS: 5 unless specified

otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the panels shall preferably be glossily white. Each

coat finishing shall be properly stoved. The paint thickness shall not be less than 50

microns. Finished surfaces from scratches, grease dirt‘s and oily spots during testing,

transporation, handling and erection.

20.0 SWITCHGEAR WIRING


20.1. All switchgear panels shall be supplied completely wired internally upto the

terminal block ready to receive external cabing. All inter cubicle wiring and connections

between panels of same switchboard including all bus wiring for AC and DC supplies

shall be provided by the Contractor.

All internal wiring shall be carried out 650 grade, single core, 1.5 sq.mm, stranded

copper wires having minimum of seven strands per conductor and colour coded, PVC

insulation. CT circuits shall be wired with 2.5 sq.mm. wires which otherwise are

similar to the above. Extra flexible wires shall be used for wiring between fixed and

moving parts such as hinged doors.

All wiring shall be properly supported neatly, readily accessible and securely

connected to equipment, terminals and termenal blocks. Wiring troughs or gutters be

used for this purpose.

20.2. Internal wire terminals shall be made with solder less crimping type tinned

copper lugs, which shall firmly grip the conductor. Insulation sleeves shall be provided

over the exposed parts of lugs. The lugs related to CT secondary circuit wiring shall be

hole type.

20.3. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with panel

wiring diagrams be fitted at both ends of each wire number 6 and 9 shall not be used for

wire identification. Ferrules shall fit tightly on wires and shall not fall off when wire is,

disconnected from terminal. All wires directly connected to trip the circuit breaker shall

be distinguished by the addition of a red coloured unlettered ferrule.

20.4. Inter connection to adjacent panels shall be brought out to a separate set of

terminal blocks located near the slots or holes, meant for the interconnecting wires.

Arrangement shall permit neat layout and easy inter connections to adjacent panels at

site and wires for this purpose shall be provided by Contractor looped and bunched

properly inside the panels. The inter panel wires shall be cross ferruled i.e. it shall have

details of emanating terminal and also where it is terminated.

20.5. Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the completeness and

correctness of the internal wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected

equipment.

20.6. The Manufacturer shall provided the necessary clamps wiring troughs

etc. for all wiring in side the switchgear enclosed including the power and control cables.

21.0 POWER CABLE TERMINATION:

21.1. The cable termination compartment shall received the stranded aluminium

conductor, XLPE insulated, shielded, armoured / unarmoured, PVC jacketed, single

core / three core unearthed / earthed grade power cable (s).

21.2. A minimum clearance of about 600 mm shall be kept between the cable lug

bottom ends and gland plates for stress cone formation for XLPE Cable. Interphase

clearance in the cable termination compartment shall be adequate to meet electrical and

mechanical requirement besides facilitating easy connections and disconnections of

cables. Dimensional drawing of cable connected compartment showing the location of


lug, glands, CTS, gland plates etc. and the electrical clearances available shall be

submitted Employer approval during detailed engineering.

21.3. Cable termination compartment shall be complete with power terminals, power

lugs and associated hardware and removable undrilled gland plates. Fopr all single core

cables grand plates shall be of nonmagnetic material.

21.4. Supply of the cable termination kit and cable termination shall be in scope of

contractor.

22.0 TESTS:

22.1. The Contractor shall submit the type test reports of following type tests for

approval of the Employer for circuit breaker, circuit breaker panels, of each voltage class

and current rating:

i). Short circuit duty test oncircuit breaker, mounted inside the panel offered along with CTs,

bushing and separator.

ii). Short time withstand test – on circuit breaker, mount inside panel offered together with

CTs, bushing and separator.

iii). Power frequency withstand test on breaker and panel.

iv). Lighting impulse withstand test on breaker and panel.

22.2. Temperature rise test on breaker and panel together. For this test, the test set

up shall include three panels with breakers, the test breaker and panel being placed in

the center. The adjacent panels shall also be loaded to their current capacity.

Alternatively the test panel may be suitably insulated at the sides, which will be adjoining

to other panels in actual site configuration.

..

22.3. . Switching over-voltage test as per clause 3.2(b) on each rating of breaker.

a. Measurement of resistance of main circuit.

b. Mechanical eduranc4e test on breaker.

c. Mechanical operation test.

Viii). Short circuit withstand test of earthing device (Truck / Switch).

22.4. For all the important components like instrument transformers, relays,

instruments, switches, bushing, wires, insulators, timers, annunciation, terminal blocks

and fuses etc. the contractor shall furnish satisfactory type test reports for Employer‘s

approval. Such reports cover all applicable type test listed in relevant Indian Standards,


for all components of type and rating being supplied.

23.0 COMMISSIONING CHECKS / TESTS

23.1. After installation of panels, power and control wiring and connect

contractor shall perform commissioning checks as listed below to proper operation of

switchgear / panels and correctness of all respects.

23.2. GENERAL

a). Check name plate details according to specification.

b). Check for physical damage.

c). Check tightens of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminal.

d). Check earth connections.

e). Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.

f). Check heaters are provided.

g). H.V. test on complete switchboard with CT & breaker / contractor lubricated in

position.

h). Check all moving parts are properly lubricated.

i). Check all alignment of bus bars with the insulators to ensure alignment and fitness of

insulators.

j). Check for inter changeability of breakers.

k). Check continuity and IR value of space heater.

l). Check earth continuity of the complete switchgear board.

23.3. CIRCUIT BREAKER

a). Check alignment of trucks for free movement .

b). Check correct operation of shutters.

c). Check show closing operation (if provided).

d). Check control wiring for correctness of corrections, continuity and IR values.


e). Manual operation of breakers completely assembled.

f). Power closing / opening operation manually and electrically at extreme condition of control

supply voltage.

g). Closing and tripping time.

h). Trip free and anti-pumping operation.

i). IR values, resistance and minimum pick up voltage of coils.

j). Simultaneous closing of all the three phases.

k). Check electrical and mechanical inter locks provided.

l). Checks on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switches and time of charging.

m). Check vacuum (as applicable).

n). All functional checks


3.8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33KV & 11 KV ISOLATORS

1.0 SCOPE

1.1. This section of the specification is intended to cover design specifications for

manufacture and testing of 33 KV and 11 KV gang operated switch (Isolators) with all

fittings and accessories.

1.2. The Isolators are for outdoor installation suitable for horizontal/vertical mounting on

mounting structures and for use at sub-stations.

1.3. Isolators shall be supplied with Earth Switch as and where specified.

2.0 GENERAL

2.1. The Isolators and accessories shall conform in general to IS 9921 (or IEC: 62271-102)

except to the extent explicitly modified in specification.

2.2. All isolating switches and earthing switches shall have rotating blades and pressure

releasing contacts. All isolating and earth switches shall operate through 90 angle from

closed position to fully open position.

2.3. Complete isolator with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be supplied

including but not limited to the following:

(i). Isolator assembled with complete base frame, linkages, operating mechanism,

control cabinet, interlocks etc.

(ii). All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable isolator installation,

control parts and other devices whether specifically called for herein or not.

(iii). The isolator shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological

conditions as given in Section 1.

3.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS

3.1. Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal

effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems in their closed

position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under influence of short

circuit current.

3.2. The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so that the

earth switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The

constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition

to the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating mechanism.

3.3. In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have

provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated and

other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of failsafe type.


Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The interlocking coil

shall be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and within a variation range as

stipulated elsewhere in this specification.

3.4. The earthing switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the associated

lines.

3.5. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no significant

change in voltage occurs across the terminals of each pole of isolator on account of

make/break operation.

3.6. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking magnetising current of 0.7A at 0.15

power factor and capacitive current of 0.7A at 0.15 power factor at rated voltage.

4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS

4.1. All isolating switches and earthing switches shall have rotating blades and pressure

releasing contacts. All isolating and earth switches shall operate through 90 angle from

closed position to fully open position.

4.2. Contacts:

a) The contacts shall be self-aligning and self-cleaning and so designed that binding

cannot occur after remaining closed for prolonged periods of time in a heavily

polluted atmosphere.

b) No undue wear or scuffing shall be evident during the mechanical endurance

tests. Contacts and spring shall be designed so that readjustments in contact

pressure shall not be necessary throughout the life of the isolator or earthing

switch. Each contact or pair of contacts shall be independently sprung so that full

pressure is maintained on all contacts at all time.

c) Contact springs shall not carry any current and shall not lose their characteristics

due to heating effects.

d) The moving contact of double break isolator shall have turn-and -twist type or

other suitable type of locking arrangement to ensure adequate contact pressure.

4.3. Blades:

a) All metal parts shall be of non-rusting and non-corroding material. All current

carrying parts shall be made from high conductivity electrolytic copper/aluminium.

Bolts, screws and pins shall be provided with lock washers. Keys or equivalent

locking facilities if provided on current carrying parts, shall be made of copper

silicon alloy or stainless steel or equivalent. The bolts or pins used in current

carrying parts shall be made of non-corroding material. All ferrous castings

except current carrying parts shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast-steel.

No grey iron shall be used in the manufacture of any part of the isolator.

b) The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp joints, edges and other corona

producing surfaces, where this is impracticable adequate corona shield shall be

provided..


c) Isolators and earthing switches including their operating parts shall be such that

they cannot be dislodged from their open or closed positions by short circuit

forces, gravity, wind pressure, vibrations, shocks, or accidental touching of the

connecting rods of the operating mechanism.

d) The switch shall be designed such that no lubrication of any part is required

except at very infrequent intervals i.e. after every 1000 operations or after 5 years

whichever is earlier.

4.4. Insulators:

a) The insulator shall conform to IS: 2544 and/or IEC-60168. The insulators shall

have a minimum cantilever strength of 400 Kgs. for 33/11 kV insulators

respectively.

b) Pressure due to the contact shall not be transferred to the insulators after the

main blades are fully closed.

4.5. Base:

Each isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised steel base provided with holes

and designed for mounting on a supporting structure.

5.0 EARTHING SWITCHES

5.1. Where earthing switches are specified these shall include the complete operating

mechanism and auxiliary contacts.

5.2. The earthing switches shall form an integral part of the isolator and shall be mounted on

the base frame of the isolator.

5.3. The earthing switches shall be constructionally interlocked with the isolator so that the

earthing switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The

constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition

to the electrical interlocks.

Suitable mechanical arrangement shall be provided for de-linking electrical drive for

mechanical operation.

5.4. Each earth switch shall be provided with flexible copper/aluminum braids for connection

to earth terminal. These braids shall have the same short time current carrying capacity

as the earth blade. The transfer of fault current through swivel connection will not be

accepted.

5.5. The frame of each isolator and earthing switches shall be provided with two reliable

earth terminals for connection to the earth mat.

5.6. Isolator design shall be such as to permit addition of earth switches at a future date. It

should be possible to interchange position of earth switch to either side.

5.7. The earth switch should be able to carry the same fault current as the main blades of the

Isolators and shall withstand dynamic stresses.


6.0 OPERATING MECHANISM

6.1. The bidder shall offer manual operated Isolators and earth switches..

6.2. Control cabinet/operating mechanism box shall be made of aluminum sheet of adequate

thickness (minimum 3 mm).

6.3. Gear should be of forged material suitably chosen to avoid bending/jamming on

operation after a prolonged period of non-operation. Also all gear and connected

material should be so chosen/surface treated to avoid rusting.

7.0 OPERATION

7.1. The main Isolator and earth switches shall be gang operated.

7.2. The design shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all service conditions.

All operating linkages carrying mechanical loads shall be designed for negligible

deflection. The length of inter insulator and interpole operating rods shall be capable of

adjustments, by means of screw thread which can be locked with a lock nut after an

adjustment has been made. The isolator and earth switches shall be provided with ―over

center‖ device in the operating mechanism to prevent accidental opening by wind,

vibration, short circuit forces or movement of the support structures.

7.3. Each isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a manual operating handle

enabling one man to open or close the isolator with ease in one movement while

standing at ground level. Detachable type manual operating handle shall be provided.

Suitable provision shall be made inside the operating mechanism box for parking the

detached handles. The provision of manual operation shall be located at a height of

1000 mm from the base of isolator support structure.

7.4. The isolator shall be provided with positive continuous control throughout the entire cycle

of operation. The operating pipes and rods shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain positive

control under the most adverse conditions and when operated in tension or compression

for isolator closing. They shall also be capable of withstanding all torsional and bending

stresses due to operation of the isolator. Wherever supported the operating rods shall be

provided with bearings on either ends. The operating rods/ pipes shall be provided with

suitable universal couplings to account for any angular misalignment.

7.5. All rotating parts shall be provided with grease packed roller or ball bearings in sealed

housings designed to prevent the ingress of moisture, dirt or other foreign matter.

Bearings pressure shall be kept low to ensure long life and ease of operation. Locking

pins wherever used shall be rustproof.

7.6. Signaling of closed position shall not take place unless it is certain that the movable

contacts, have reached a position in which rated normal current, peak withstand current

and short time withstand current can be carried safely. Signaling of open position shall

not take place unless movable contacts have reached a position such that clearance

between contacts is atleast 80% of the isolating distance.

7.7. The position of movable contact system (main blades) of each of the Isolators and


earthing switches shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator at the lower end of the

vertical rod of shaft for the Isolators and earthing switch. The indicator shall be of metal

and shall be visible from operating level.

7.8. The contractor shall furnish the following details along with quality norms, during detailed

engineering stage.

(i) Current transfer arrangement from main blades of isolator along with

millivolt drop immediately across transfer point.

(ii) Details to demonstrate smooth transfer of rotary motion from motor

shaft to the insulator along with stoppers to prevent over travel.

8.0 TEST AND INSPECTION

8.1. The switches shall be subjected to the following type test in accordance to with IS: 9920.

I) Dielectric test (impulse and one minute) power frequency withstands voltage.

II) Temperature rise test

III) Rated off load breaking current capacity

IV) Rated active load breaking capacity

V) Rated line charging breaking capacity

VI) Rated short time current

VII) Rated peak withstand current

VIII) Mechanical and Electrical Endurance

8.2. The equipment shall be subjected to the following routine test.

I) Power frequency voltage dry test

II) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit

III) Operating test.

8.3. The porcelain will have pull out test for embedded component and beam strength of

porcelain base.

9.0 CONNECTORS

9.1. Each isolator shall be provided with appropriate number of bimetallic clamping type

connectors as detailed in the schedule of requirement. The maximum length of jumper

that may be safely connected or any special instruction considered necessary to avoid

under loads on the post isolators should be stated by the tenderer.

10.0 SUPPORTING STRUCTURES


10.1. All isolators and earthing switches shall be rigidly mounted in an upright position

on their own supporting structures. Details of the supporting structures shall be furnished

by the successful tenderer. The isolators should have requisite fixing details ready for

mounting them on switch structures.

11.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS

11.1. Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests. Contractor

shall also perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field

instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the

Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these

tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the

Employer for approval.

(a) Insulation resistance of each pole.

(b) Manual operation and interlocks.

(c) Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors.

(d) Ground connections.

(e) Contact resistance.

(f) Proper alignment so as to minimise to the extreme possible the vibration during

operation.

(g) Measurement of operating Torque for isolator and Earth switch.

(h) Resistance of operating and interlocks coils.

(i) Functional check of the control schematic and electrical & mechanical interlocks.

(j) 50 operations test on isolator and earth switch.

12.0 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR ISOLATORS

SL

No

.

Technical Particulars Isolators class

33 kV 11kV

1 Nominal system voltage, kV 33 11

2 Highest system voltage, kV 36 12

3 Rated frequency, Hz. 50 50

4. Type of Isolator Double Break,

center pole

Double Break,

center


SL

No

.

Technical Particulars Isolators class

33 kV 11kV

rotating pole

rotating

5 Rated continuous current, A 630 1250

6 Rated short time current, kA 16 12.5

7 Rated duration of short time

current, Second

3 3

8 Rated lightning impulse

withstand voltage, kV

(peak)

i) To earth & between poles

ii) Across isolating distance

170

170

95

95

9 Rated 1 minute power

frequency withstand

voltage, kV (rms)

i) To earth & between poles

ii) Across isolating distance

70

80

28

40

10 Minimum creepage distance of

insulators, mm

900

400

11 Temperature rise As per relevant IS


3.9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF OUTDOOR CURRENT AND POTENTIAL

TRANSFORMERS

1.0 SCOPE OF CONTRACT

1.1. This Section of the Specification covers general requirements for design, engineering,

manufacture, assembly and testing at manufacturer‘s works of 33kV and 11 kV outdoor

Current and Potential Transformers.

2.0 STANDARDS

2.1. The equipment covered by this specification shall, unless otherwise stated be designed,

constructed and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of relevant Indian

Standards and shall conform to the regulations of local statutory authorities.

2.2. In case of any conflict between the Standards and this specification, this specification

shall govern.

2.3. The current transformer shall comply also with the latest issue of the following Indian

standard.

(

i

)

IS:

2705(Par

t-I)

Current transformers: General requirement.

(i

i

)

IS:

2705(Par

t-II)

Current transformers : Measuring Current transformers

(i

i

i

)

IS:

2705(Par

t-III)

Current transformers : Protective Current transformers

(i

v

)

IS:

2705(Par

t-IV)

Current transformers: Protective Current transformers

for special purpose application.

(

v

)

IS:

3156(Par

t-I)

Potential transformers: General requirement.

(

v

i

)

IS: 3156

(Part-II)

Potential transformers : Measuring Potential

transformers

(

v

IS: 3156

(Part-III)

Potential transformers : Protective Potential

transformers


i

i

)

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1. The cores of the instrument transformers shall be of high grade, non-aging CRGO steel

of low hysteresis loss and high permeability.

3.2. Instrument transformers shall be of Dead Tank design or Live Tank design.

3.3. The instrument transformers shall be truly hermetically sealed POLYCRETE Type

3.4. A complete leak proof secondary terminal arrangement shall be provided with each

instrument transformers, secondary terminal shall be brought into weather, dust and

vermin proof terminal box. Secondary terminal boxes shall be provided with facilities for

easy earthing, shorting, insulating and testing of secondary circuits. The terminal boxes

shall be suitable for connection of control cable gland.

3.5. All instrument transformers shall be of single phase unit.

3.6. The instrument transformers shall be so designed to withstand the effects of temperature,

wind load, short circuit conditions and other adverse conditions.

3.7. All similar parts, particularly removable ones, shall be interchangeable with one another.

3.8. All cable ferrules, lugs, tags, etc. required for identification and cabling shall be supplied

complete for speedy erection and commissioning as per approved schematics.

3.9. The instrument transformers shall be designed to ensure that condensation of moisture is

controlled by proper selection of organic insulating materials having low moisture

absorbing characteristics.

3.10. All steel work shall be degreased, pickled and phosphated and then applied with

two coats of Zinc Chromate primer and two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint.

4.0 COMMON MARSHALLING BOXES

4.1. The outdoor type common marshalling boxes shall conform to the latest edition of IS

5039 and other general requirements specified hereunder.

4.2. The common marshalling boxes shall be suitable for mounting on the steel mounting

structures of the instrument transformers.

4.3. One common marshalling box shall be supplied with each set of instrument transformers.

The marshalling box shall be made of sheet steel and weather proof. The thickness of

sheet steel used shall be not less than 3.0 mm. It is intended to bring all the secondary

terminals to the common marshalling.

4.4. The enclosures of the common marshalling boxes shall provide a degree of protection of

not less than IP 55 (As per IS 2147).


4.5. The common marshalling boxes shall be provided with double hinged front doors with

pad locking arrangement. All doors and removable covers and plates shall be sealed all

around with neoprene gaskets or similar arrangement.

4.6. Each marshalling box shall be fitted with terminal blocks made out of moulded non-

inflammable plastic materials and having adequate number of terminals with binding

screws washers etc. Secondary terminals of the instrument transformers shall be

connected to the respective common marshalling boxes. All out going terminals of each

instrument transformer shall terminate on the terminal blocks of the common marshalling

boxes. The terminal blocks shall be arranged to provide maximum accessibility to all

conductor terminals.

4.7. Each terminal shall be suitably marked with identification numbers. Not more than two

wires shall be connected to any one terminal. At least 20 % spare terminals shall be

provided over and above the required number.

4.8. All terminal strips shall be of isolating type terminals and they will be of minimum 10 A

continuous current rating.

4.9. All cable entries shall be from bottom. Suitable removable gland plate shall be provided

on the box for this purpose. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied fitted

on to this gland plate. Cable glands shall be screw on type and made of brass.

4.10. Each common marshalling box shall be provided with two numbers of earthing

terminals of galvanised bolt and nut type.

4.11. All steel, inside and outside work shall be degreased, pickled and phosphated

and then applied with two coats of Zinc Chromate primer and two coats of finishing

synthetic enamel paint. The colour of finishing paint shall be as follows: -

4.12. i) Inside: Glossy White

4.13. ii) Outside: Light Grey (Shade No. 697 of IS: 5)

5.0 TESTS

5.1. Routine/Acceptance Tests (all units)

5.2. All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standards. All

routine/acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Employer/his authorised

representative.

5.3. Type Tests: The bidder shall furnish type test certificates and results for the all tests as

per relevant Standards along with the bid for current and potential transformers of

identical design.

5.4. Type test certificates so furnished shall not be older than 5 (five) years as on date of Bid

opening.

6.0 NAME PLATES

6.1. All equipment shall have non-corrosive name plates fix at a suitable position indelibly

mark with full particular there on in accordance with the standard adapted.


7.0 MOUNTING STRUCTURES

7.1. All the equipment covered under this specification shall be suitable for mounting on steel

structures. Supply of mounting structures is also in the scope of this tender.

7.2. Each equipment shall be furnished complete with base plates, clamps, and washers etc.

and other hardware ready for mounting on existing steel structures.

8.0 SAFETY EARTHING

8.1. The non-current carrying metallic parts and equipment shall be connected to station

earthing grid. For this two terminals suitable for 40mm X 10mm GI strip shall be provided

on each equipment.

9.0 TERMINAL CONNECTORS

9.1. The equipment shall be supplied with required number of terminal connectors of

approved type suitable for ACSR/XLPE cable. The type of terminal connector, size of

connector, material, and type of installation shall be approved by the Employer, as per

installation requirement while approving the equipment drawings.


10.1. Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests. Contractor

shall also perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field

instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the

Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these

tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the

Employer for approval.

10.2. Current Transformers

(i) Insulation Resistance Test for primary and secondary.

(ii) Polarity test.

(iii) Ratio identification test - checking of all ratios on all cores by primary

injection of current.

(iv) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable).

(v) Magnetising characteristics test.

(vi) Tan delta and capacitance measurement

(vii) Secondary winding resistance measurement

(viii) Contact resistance measurement (wherever possible/accessible).

10.3. Potential Transformers


(i) Insulation Resistance test for primary (if applicable) and secondary winding.

(ii) Polarity test.

(iii) Ratio test

(iv) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable).

(v) Tan delta and capacitance measurement of individual capacitor stacks.

(vi) Secondary winding resistance measurement.

11.0 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR CURRENT AND POTENTIALTRANSFORMERS

11.1. For 33 kV/11kV CTs the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than

2.5 for metering core.

11.2. TYPE AND RATING:

All instrument transformer shall be outdoor type, single phase, polycrete type suitable for

mounting on steel structure. The instrument transformer shall have the following ratings

and particulars.

S

L

N

o

.

Item Ratings and Particulars

33 KV 11 KV

A Nominal system voltage 33 kV 11 kV

B Highest system voltage, kV 36 12

C Rated frequency ,HZ 50 50

D System earthing Solidly earth Solidly earth

E Insulation level

a

)

Impulse withstand voltage: kVp 170 70

b

)

One minute p.f. Withstand voltage, kV

(r.m.s.)

70 28

F Short time current for one second, kA 16 12.5

G Minimum creepage distance, mm 900 360


S

L

N

o

.


33 KV 11 KV

H Temperature rise As per ISS As per ISS

J TRANFORMER C.T.

(i) No. of Cores 3 3

(ii) Transformation ratio 200-100-

50/5-5-

5A

600-300-150/5-5-

2.89A

(iii) Rated out put

(a) Core-1 30 VA 30 VA

(b) Core-2 15 VA 15VA

(C) Core-3 - -

(iv) Accuracy class

(a) Core-1 0.5 0.5

(b) Core-2 5P 5P

(C) Core-3 PS PS

(v) Accuracy limit factor

(a) Core-1 - -

(b) Core-2 10 10

(C) Core-3 - -

(v) Instrument security factor

(a) Core-1 Less than 5 Less than 5

(b) Core-2 - -

(C) Core-3 - -

(v) Minimum Knee point voltage, Volts


S

L

N

o

.


33 KV 11 KV

(C) Core-3

(v) Maximum secondary resistance, ohm

(C) Core-3

(vi) Maximum exciting current, at Vk/4 mA

(a) Core-3 - -

FEEDER CT

(i) No. of Cores

(ii) Transformation ratio

(iii) Rated out put

(a) Core-1

(b) Core-2

(iv) Accuracy class

(a) Core-1

(b) Core-2

(v) Accuracy limit factor

(a) Core-1

(b) Core-2

(v) Instrument security factor

(a) Core-1

(b) Core-2

(v) Minimum Knee point voltage, Volts

(a) Core-1


S

L

N

o

.


33 KV 11 KV

(b) Core-2

(v) Maximum secondary resistance, ohm

(a) Core-1

(b) Core-2

NEUTRAL CT

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 33kV/√3

/110V/√3 11kV/√3 /110V/√3

(a) Core-1 100 100

(b) Core-2 100 100

(vi) Accuracy class 0.5 05

(v) Rated voltage factor 1.2 1.2

(vi) Accuracy class 0.5 05

Note:

(i) It is intended to use different ratios of the same CT at the same time for differential

protections and metering cores. The CTS should therefore be suitable for the above

purpose by secondary tapings only. The ratio change by secondary taps is acceptable

as long as the required CT specifications are achieved at all ratios.

(ii) The knee point voltage specified above shall be at higher ratio/ taps.


3.10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33kV & 11kV LIGHTNING ARRESTORS

1.0 SCOPE

2.0 This Section covers the specifications for design, manufacture, shop & laboratory

testing before despatch of 33 kV and 11 kV 10 kA, Station class heavy duty, gapless

metal (zinc) oxide Surge Arrestors complete with fittings & accessories.

3.0 STANDARDS

The design, manufacture and performance of Surge Arrestors shall comply

with IS: 3070( Part-3 )/1993 unless otherwise specifically specified in this

Specification

4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

The surge arrestor shall draw negligible current at operating voltage and at

the same time offer least resistance during the flow of surge current.

The surge arrestor shall consist of non-linear resistor elements placed in

series and housed in electrical grade porcelain housing/silicon polymeric of specified

creepage distance.

The assembly shall be hermetically sealed with suitable rubber gaskets with

effective sealing system arrangement to prevent ingress of moisture.

The surge arrestor shall be provided with line and earth terminals of suitable

size. The ground side terminal of surge arrestor shall be connected with 25x6 mm

galvanized strip, one end connected to the surge arrestor and second end to a

separate ground electrode. The bidder shall also recommend the procedure which

shall be followed in providing the earthing/system to the Surge Arrestor.

The surge arrestor shall not operate under power frequency and temporary

over voltage conditions but under surge conditions, the surge arrestor shall change

over to the conducting mode.

The surge arrestor shall be suitable for circuit breaker performing 0-0.3sec.-

CO-3min-CO- duty in the system.

Surge arrestors shall have a suitable pressure relief system to avoid

damage to the porcelain/ silicon polymeric housing and providing path for flow of

rated fault currents in the event of arrestor failure.

The reference current of the arrestor shall be high enough to eliminate the

influence of grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage.

The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable and the bidder shall furnish a

copy of thermal stability test with the bid.


The arrestor shall be capable of handling terminal energy for high surges,

external pollution and transient over voltage and have low losses at operating

voltages.

5.0 ARRESTOR HOUSING

The arrestor housing shall be made up of silicon polymeric housing and

shall be homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws of

imperfections that might affect the mechanical and dielectric quality. The housing

shall be of uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects.

Arrestors shall be complete with insulating bases, surge counters with leakage current meters

(33 KV LA) and terminal connectors.

The housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover shall not

occur due to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage up to the

maximum design value for arrestor. The arrestors shall not fail due to contamination.

The arrester housings shall be designed for pressure relief class as given in

Technical Parameters of the specification.

Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurable leakage.

6.0 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

The surge arrestor shall be complete with insulating bases, surge counters

with leakage current meters (for 33 KV LA) and terminal connectors.

The terminals shall be non-magnetic, corrosion proof, robust and of

adequate size and shall be so located that incoming and outgoing connections are

made with minimum possible bends. The top metal cap and base of surge arrestor

shall be galvanized. The line terminal shall have a built in clamping device which can

be adjusted for both horizontal and vertical takeoff.

7.0 SURGE MONITOR

A self-contained discharge counter suitably enclosed for outdoor use and

requiring no auxiliary or battery supply for operation shall be provided for each single

pole unit. Leakage current meter with suitable scale range to measure leakage

current of surge arrestor shall also be supplied within the same enclosure. The

number of operations performed by the arrestor shall be recorded by a suitable

cyclometric counter and surge monitor shall be provided with an inspection window.

There shall be a provision for putting ammeter to record the current/alarm contacts in

the control room if the leakage current exceeds the permitted value. Similar provision

shall be considered for surge counter also.

Surge monitor shall be mounted on the support structure at a suitable height

so that the reading can be taken from ground level through the inspection window

and length of connecting leads up to grounding point and bends are minimum.

Surge monitor shall have to be provided for 33 KV class only.

8.0 TESTS


Test on Surge Arrestors

The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and

acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 3070 (Part-3). In addition, the suitability of the

Surge Arrestors shall also be established for the following:

- Residual voltage test

- Reference voltage test

- Leakage current at M.C.O.V

- P.D. test

- Sealing test

- Thermal stability test

- Aging and Energy capability test

- Watt loss test

Each metal oxide block shall be tested for guaranteed specific energy capability in addition to

routine/acceptance test as per IEC/IS.

The surge arrestor housing shall also be type tested and shall be subjected

to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 2071.

Galvanization Test

All Ferrous parts exposed to atmospheric condition shall have passed the type tests and be

subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 2633 & IS 6745.

9.0 NAME PLATE

The name plate attached to the arrestor shall carry the following information:

Rated Voltage

Continuous Operation Voltage

Normal discharge current

Pressure relief rated current

Manufacturers Trade Mark

Name of Sub-station

Year of Manufacturer

Name of the manufacture


Purchase Order Number along with date


Contractor shall carry out following tests as pre-commissioning tests.

Contractor shall also perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as

per the field instructions of the equipment Supplier or Employer without any extra

cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for

conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of

instruments to the Employer for approval.

1. Operation check of LA counters.

2. Insulation resistance measurement.

3. Capacitance and Tan delta measurement of individual stacks.

4. Third harmonic resistive current measurement (to be conducted

after energisation.

11.0 TYPE AND RATINGS

S

L

N

o

.

Particulars Voltage class

33 kV 11 kV

1 Rated voltage of arrester, kV 30 9

2 Rated frequency, Hz 50 50

3 Nominal discharge current of arrester, kA 10 10

4 Maximum residual voltage at nominal

discharge current, kV (peak)

108 40

5 Maximum steep current impulse residual

voltage at kV (kVP)

130 50

6 One minute power frequency withstand

voltage of arrester insulation, kV (rms)

70 28

7 1.2 / 50 second impulse withstand voltage

of arrester insulation, kV (peak)

170 95

9 Line discharge class 2 2

1 Insulator Housing


0

a) Power frequency withstand test voltage

(wet) (kV rms) 70 28

b) Lightning impulse withstand tests

voltage(KVp) 170 95

c) Pressure Relief Class 40 40

d) Creepage distance not less than (mm) 900 400


3.11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 33 KV AND 11 KV GANG OPERATED SWITCH

1.0 SCOPE

1.1. This specification is intended to cover design manufacture, testing at

manufacturer‟s works, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and

commissioning of 33 KV and11 KV gang operated switch (Isolators) with all

fittings and accessories.

1.2. The Isolators are for out door installation suitable for both vertically and

horizontally mounting on mounting structures or M.S. Channel and for use at

sectionalizing/tapping points of 33 KV lines and at 33/11 KV sub-stations.

1.3. 33 KV isolators shall be supplied with Earth Switch as and where specified

1.4. The successful bidders shall supply the necessary drawings and instructions for

installation and commission of the Isolators.

2.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS

2.1. The vertically mounted gang switches shall be manually operated triple pole type with

single break operation. The operation of the equipment shall be through forward and

backward motion of the mid-pole post insulator. The contacts shall be made of silver

faced hard drawn copper.

2.2. The horizontally mounted switches, with or without earth switches shall have rotating

blade features and pressure reliving features. Such isolators are required to be double

break; three posts per phase, single through, gang operated three phase type. All

isolators with/without earth switch shall operate through 900

from their fully closed

position to fully open position

2.3. The switch shall be fitted with arcing horns and the horns shall be easily replaceable.

All isolators shall be provided with suitably rated terminal connectors to directly receive

ACSR conductor of required size. The termination shall have at least 3 pairs of holes to

hold the conductor tight with nuts & bolts The terminals shall conform to all the test

requirements of IS: 5561 and shall be designed as to avoid bimetallic corrosion.

2.4. The operating rod shall comprise of not less than 40 mm (nominal bore) Galvanised

steel pipe as per IS 1161-1979. The length of the operating rod shall be suitable for

operation as per installation methods. The rod shall be so threaded that the length can

be adjusted.

2.5. The horizontal operation shaft shall be of solid Galvanised steel of square section

suitable for fitting the insulator base of the switch. Length of the rod shall be such as to

maintain the phase clearance as per I.S.


2.6. The operating handle shall have OFF/ON locking arrangement and provision for earthing

the equipment.

2.7. The gang operating switch shall be provided with three post insulators per phase

conforming to IS 5350 (Pt-III)-1971. The cast iron post shall be embedded in the

insulators with sulphur cement. For embedded components, pull out strength should be

such as to result in breakings of the porcelain insulators, the beam strength shall be as

per relevant T.S. Creepage distance shall not be less than 900 mm and 300 mm for

33KV and 11 KV isolators respectively.

2.8. All similar materials and removable parts of similar equipments shall be interchangeable

with each other.

3.0 APPLICABLE STANDARD

3.1. Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification, the Gang operated switch shall conform

to IS. 9920 (Pt-I to Pt-IV).

4.0 Failure to meet guarantees and requirement of specification

4.1. If after installation, the operation of the switch proven to be unsatisfactory, to the

purchaser, the tenderer shall have to take back or replace.

5.0 TEST AND INSPECTION

5.1. The switches shall be subjected to the following type test in accordance to with IS: 9920.

IX) Dielectric test (impulse and one minute) power frequency withstands voltage.

X) Temperature rise test

XI) Rated off load breaking current capacity

XII) Rated active load breaking capacity

XIII) Rated line charging breaking capacity

XIV) Rated short time current

XV) Rated peak withstand current

XVI) Mechanical and Electrical Endurance


5.2. The equipment shall be subjected to the following routine test.

IV) Power frequency voltage dry test

V) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit

VI) Operating test.

5.3. The porcelain will have pull out test for embedded component and beam strength of

porcelain base.

5.4. The manufacturer shall afford the inspection representing the purchaser or third party

nominee all reasonable facilities, with charge, to satisfy him that the material is being

furnished in accordance with this specification.

The purchaser has the right to have the test carried out at his own cost by an independent

agency whenever there is dispute regarding the quality of supply.

6.0 GUARANTEE

The Bidder shall offer equipment performance guarantee for a minimum period of 1

year from the date of commissioning.

Any damaged part or defective part of the equipment, the bidder has to replace at his cost.

7.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1.0 SYSTEM DETAILS

1.1 Nominal system voltage, KV 33 11

1.2 Highest system voltage, KV 36 12

1.3 Nominal frequency, Hz 50 50

2.0

GENERAL SPECIFICATION

2.1 Rated voltage, KV 36 12

2.2 Rated frequency, Hz 50 50

2.3 Rated normal current, Amp 200 A, 400 ,630,

800


2.4 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

i) To earth and between pole, KV (Peak)

ii) Across the isolating distance, KV (Peak)

170

195

75

2.5 Power frequency one minute

withstand voltage,

i) To earth and between pole, KV (RMS)

ii) Across the isolating distance, KV (RMS)

70

80

28

2.6 Temperature rise -as per relevant

IS-

2.7 Rated short time current 3 Sec, KA 25 16

2.8 Rated active load break capacity, Amps 400 200

2.9 Transformer OFF-Load current

breaking capacity, Amps

10 10

2.1

0

Rated line changing breaking

capacity, A(rms)

6.3 6.3

2.1

1

Rated Peak withstand current 25 KA 16

2.1

2

Electrical endurance 20 operations for

400 A ,200

operation

for 200 A

2.1

3

Mechanical endurance 1000 operation

2.1

4

Minimum insulator creepage distance, mm 900 300


3.12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF BATTERY BANK AND CHARGER

1.0 SCOPE

This Section of the Specification covers the design, manufacture, and testing at

manufacturer‘s work, of stationary type sealed, Valve Regulated Lead Acid Battery Bank,

Battery Charger, complete with all required accessories for various Sub-stations.

2.0 BATTERY BANK

2.1 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF BATTERY BANK

1. Battery Rating 110 V-100 Ah to 1.75 ECV at C10 at 27⁰ C

2. Type of battery Maintenance free valve regulated lead acid

(MF-VRLA) battery

3. Battery specification

Batteries conforms to IS 15549:2005

Also conforms to International

Standards (I) IEEE 1188 and 1189

(II) BS6290 Part 4/ IEC 896

4. Manufacturers cell designation F 100 P

5. No of Cells 55 Nos.

6. Cycle life of Battery @ 27⁰ C

2000 cycles for 50 % depth of discharge or

1200 cycles for 80 % depth of

discharge

7. All efficiency Above 90%

8. WH Efficiency Above 80 %

9. Self discharge/ Week < 1% of rated capacity

10. Max, allowable ambient temp at

which cell can safely operate 55⁰ C continuously and 70⁰ C short time

11. Overall dimension of each cell (107.8 x 198.5 x 477)mm approx.


12. Overall weight of each cell 27 kg approx.

13. Recommended Max period of

storage

6 months from the date of manufacturing

and the batteries shall be stored in

covered area at 27⁰ C

14. Material of container Polypropylene co-polymer

15. Type of separator Highly absorbent micro porous spun glass

matrix (AGM)

16. Type of +ve & -ve plates Flat pasted

17. Material of rack Mild steel coated with acid resistance paint

18. Method of connection between

cells Bolted

19. Recommended float charge

Batteries shall be charged in constant

potential mode with current limit

Voltage: 2.23-2.25 Volts per cell

Current: Recommended- charging current

is 45 amps

20. Recommended boost charge

Voltage: 2.3 Volts per cell

Current: Recommended- charging current

is 45 to 90 amps

21.

Time required for boost charge

from fully discharged

condition at 27⁰ C

9 Hrs for 90 % state of charge

(or)

24 hrs for 100 % state of charge

22. Voltage ripple allowable < 2% of the RMS value

23. Type of connectors Lead coated heavy duty copper strips

2.1.1 PLATES

Positive plates shall be made of flat pasted type using lead-cadmium antimony alloy for

durability, high corrosion resistant, maintenance free, long life both in cyclic as well

as in ,float applications.

Negative plates shall be heavy duty, durable flat plate using lead calcium alloy pasted

box grid. Negative plates shall be designed to match the life of positive plates and


combination of negative and positive plates shall ensure long life, durability and

trouble free operation of battery.

PLC operated equipment should be deployed for preparation of paste to ensure

consistency in paste quality. Conventional / manual type of paste preparation is not

allowed.

2.1.2 CONTAINER AND LID

The containers and lids shall be made of a special grade polypropylene copolymer plastic

material. They shall be sufficiently robust and not liable lo deformation under internal

operating pressures and within the temperature range naturally encountered, leak

proof, non-absorbent and resistant to the acid with low water vapour permeability.

2.1.3 VENT PLUGS :

Each cell shall be equipped with one-way safety valve with opening pressure of 5±1 psi

and closing pressure 4±1 psi. The vent plug shall be made with suitable grade of fire

retardant plastic material. Each valve opening shall be covered with flame barrier

capable in preventing the ingress of flame into the cell interior when the valve opens

and hydrogen / oxygen gas mixture is released.

2.1.4 SEPARATORS :

Separator shall be made of spun glass, micro porous matrix and shall be resistant to

Sulphuric Acid. It shall be capable of keeping the entire electrolyte and shall be

electrically insulated. Sufficient separator overlap and PVC shield protection to top and

bottom edges of the plates is to be provided to prevent short circuit formation between

the edges of adjacent plates.

2.1.5 CONNECTORS :

The connectors shall be lead coated copper of suitable size to join the cells. The

connectors shall be suitably designed and coated to withstand corrosion due to

sulphuric acid. The coating should be adequate and tenacious. All the copper inter

cell connectors shall be provided with heal shrinkable sleeves except at the

connecting points.

2.1.6 ELECTROLYTE:

The electrolyte shall be prepared from the battery grade Sulphuric Acid confirming to ISS:

266. The batteries shall be supplied in factory filled and charged condition.


2.1.7 WATER

Water required for preparation of electrolyte shall conform to IS: I069.

2.1.8 PLATE CONNECTION

Lugs of plates of like polarity shall be connected by lead burning to a horizontal strap

having an upstanding terminal post adopted for connection to external circuit. Strap

and post shall be caste with lead alloy. The positive and negative terminal posts shall

be clearly marked for unmistakable identification.

2.1.9 BOLTS AND NUTS

Nuts and Bolts for connecting the cells shall be of superior grade passivated Stainless

steel.

2.1.10 TERMINALS

Terminals shall be of integral lead terminal with solid copper core with M6 threading for

fastening. The junction between terminal posts and cover and between the cover and

container shall be hermetically sealed.

2.1.11 BATTERY RACKS

Batteries shall be installed on MS racks to be supplied by the Contractor to fit in the

battery room. Racks/Trays shall be powder coated with anti corrosive paint. Rack

shall accommodate 55 cells plus 2 spares. Racks/Tray shall be suitably treated

before painting for protection against fungus growth and other harmful effects due to

tropical environment.

The colour of the supporting racks shall conform to RAL 7032 shade.

2.2 BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENTS

2.2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The battery charging equipment shall be capable of giving two rate of charging currents

namely Boost Charge and Trickle Charge. The charging equipments capable of

giving two rate of charging currents shall consist of two separate sections: Boost

Charger Section & Trickle Charger Section.

The Trickle Charger Section along with all necessary equipments is required for the

purpose of float charging one battery bank of 55 cells of capacity 150 Ah at 10 hours

discharge rate at the rate of 2.0 volts to 2.3 volts per cell and for meeting a constant


D.C. load of 10 Amperes at 110 Volts D.C. simultaneously.

The Boost Charger Section along with all necessary equipments is required to charge a

battery bank of 55 cells of capacity 150 Ah at 10 hours discharge rate at the rate of

1.85 volts to 2.55 volts per cell and for meeting a constant D.C. load of 10 Amperes

simultaneously.

2.2.2 TYPE AND RATING

i) TYPE

The charger shall be static type, using Silicon Rectifiers. The rectifiers shall be arranged

in three phase bridge circuit for full wave rectification. The charger unit shall be

suitable for operation on 415 volts three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz A.C. Supply.

The Boost and Trickle Charger section shall have an arrangement for automatic and

manual D.C. voltage regulating system with an Auto / Manual change over switch.

ii). RATING

The entire charger circuitry shall have two separate sections eg. Boast charger and

Trickle charger sections and shall of following ratings:

2.2.2.1 Float Charger

(a) D.C. Output Voltage: (i) The D.C. output voltage of the Float charger shall be 110 volts

(nominal). (ii) The D.C. output voltage of the Float charger shall be adjustable between

110 volts to 126.5 volts.

(b) D.C. Output Current: (i) The Trickle charger shall be capable of supplying a continuous

D.C. load of 10 amperes and float a battery bank of 150 Ah at 10 hours discharge rate

simultaneously at a normal voltage of 110 volts D.C.

2.2.2.2 Boost charger:

(a) The D.C. output voltage of the Boost charger section shall be adjustable between 101

volts to 140 volts.

(b) D.C. Output Current: The Quick charger shall be capable of charging a battery bank of

150 Ah capacity at 10 hours discharge rate and to meet a continuous D.C. load of 5

amperes simultaneously. Output current of the Boost charger shall not be less than about

20 Amperes.


2.2.3 OPERATION AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS:

The incoming A.C. supply for Quick and Trickle charger shall be controlled by rotary

switches. In addition to the rotary switches supplies to the both chargers shall be

controlled by two push button operated contractors having overload protection. ‗RED‘

& ‗GREEN‘ indicating lamps shall be provided to indicate ‗ON‘ & ‗OFF‘ conditions

respectively of the Quick and Float charges in addition to the A.C. ‗ON‘ indication.

During normal operation of the Trickle charger shall supply the normal direct current

requirements of the substation and the station battery shall be floating on D.C.

system. In the event of failure of A.C. supply or failure of the charger itself the battery

shall come automatically across the load without any interruption.

It is intended to supply the D.C. load of the equipment normally by the float charger

during boost charging of the bank. Thus, when the Boost charger is switched ‗ON‘ the

Boost charger and the battery bank shall be isolated from the float charger and the

load automatically. If during boost charging operation, the A.C. supply fails, the

battery shall come automatically across the load without any interruption. During the

infinitely small time required for initiation of the contractor a reduced number of cells

shall be available across the load, through the blocking diode.

Provision shall also be made so that in the event of failure of Float Charger, the Boost

charger shall supply the load as well as charging a battery bank. Arrangement shall

be made to limit the voltages across the load to around 110 volts, even if the boost

charger is operating at maximum charging voltage. This aspect shall be clearly

brought out in the tender by the bidder. In this operation also, the battery bank should

come across the load automatically and without any interruption in the event of A.C.

mains failure.

2.2.4 VOLTAGE REGULATING SYSTEM

The Float and Boost Charger sections shall have suitable arrangement for regulation of D.C.

output voltage by the following methods.

(a) Automatic Voltage Regulation.

(b) Manual Voltage Regulation.

(a) Automatic Voltage Regulation:

The Automatic Voltage Regulation shall hold the voltage flat from zero to full load within

±1% of pre-set value of the charger with a fluctuation of ±10% in voltage and ±5% in

frequency in the A.C. input voltage. The setting device of the automatic voltage

regulator shall be so designed that the D.C. output voltage can be set anywhere

between (i) 100 volts to 126.5 volts for Float Charger and (ii) 100 volts to 140 volts for

Boost Charger. The automatic voltage regulator shall be static type and its

characteristics shall be supplied with the tender.


(b) Manual Voltage Regulator:

The Manual Voltage Regulator for Trickle charger shall have suitable equipments and

means to control the D.C. output voltage with the ranges mentioned earlier. The

voltage control shall be smooth and continuous. The charger shall have a change

over switch for selecting ‗Auto‘ or ‗Manual‘ mode of regulation to regulate the D.C.

voltage. The tenderer shall furnish all the details of the manual voltage regulator in

the tender.

Both the trickle and boost chargers shall be provided with alarm and indication for the

following:

(a) Mains on

(b) Charger failed.

(c) Rectifier element fuse blown.

(d) Charger output fuse blown.

(e) AC input failed

In addition to the above arrangement for controlling, regulating and operation of the

charger, the bidder may suggest and quote suitable alternative arrangement for the

same. The right of acceptance of such an arrangement shall however, lie with the

Employer.

2.2.5 INSTRUMENTS, EQUIPMENTS, ETC

i) Rectifier Transformer

The rectifier transformers shall be designed to operate at a frequency of 50 Hz and at the

r.m.s. voltage between the lines on the line side of transformers of 415+10% volts. The

rating of the rectifier transformer shall correspond to the rating of the associated rectifier

assembly. The transformer should preferably be air cooled dry / synthetic oil filled type

and shall conform to the latest issues of IS: 2026 and IS: 4540.

ii) Rectifier Elements

Rectifier elements shall be Silicon and shall be arranged in three bridge circuit. The rectifier

elements shall be protected by HRC fuse with fuse blow out indication. The rectifier

stacks shall be supplied with their own heat dissipating arrangement for natural air

cooling.

iii) Measuring Instruments:


The instruments shall be flush type and shall have dust proof and moisture resistant enclosed

cases, finished in black and suitable for tropical use. Elements shall be shock resistant

and shielded from external magnetic fields. The instruments and meters shall have easy

accessible means for calibration testing and adjustment and shall conform to relevant

I.S.S.

iv) Air Break Switches and Fuses:

The series combination air break rotary switches and HRC fuses shall conform to provisions

of the latest issue of IS-4064, IS-4047 and IS-2208. the air break switches and fuses

housed in the charger panel shall be so arranged that when they are opened, the

terminals are readily accessible. Switches shall be of rotary operated type preferably with

silver to silver contacts of adequate making, carrying and breaking current ratings and

shall open and close with snap action to minimise arcing. The ‗ON‘ and ‗OFF‘ positions of

the switches shall be definite and shall be clearly indicated.

All fuses shall be of HRC type conforming to the latest issue of I.S. 2208.

v) The charger units shall be provided with but not limited to the following instruments and

equipments.

a) 3 Pole A.C. mains ON-OFF switches and HRC fuses of suitable capacity.

b) 2 pole air break switches with HRC fuses of suitable capacity output side of

chargers.

c) Air break magnetic contactors of suitable ratings complete with push button and

thermal overload devices and red and green indicating lamps for A.C. input

ON/OFF to the chargers.

d) Fuse blown out indication for D.C. output fuses.

e) HRC fuses for protection of rectifier elements with fuse blow out indication.

f) 0-500 volts range, A.C. voltmeters to measure A.C. input voltage to the chargers.

Accuracy class 1.0 as per I.S. 1248.

g) Moving coil, flush mounting type voltmeters of suitable ranges to measure trickle,

boost and battery voltages. Accuracy class: 1.0 as per I.S.-1248.

h) Moving coil, flush mounting type ammeters of suitable scales to read the output

currents of boost and trickle chargers and load current. Accuracy class : 1.0

as per I.S.-1248.

i) Single pole D.C. contactors of suitable ratings.

j) Blocking diode of adequate capacity.

k) Cubicle illuminating lamps with door operated switches suitable for 240 volts A.C.

l) All other equipments and accessories for indication and alarm annunciation as

mentioned earlier.


m) All other equipments not specifically mentioned but required for proper and

satisfactory operation of the charger shall be provided.

n) The charger assembly shall be complete with input / output terminals, cable

glands, internal wiring, earthing terminals, rating plates, etc.

2.2.6 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:

The whole battery charging equipments shall be housed in an indoor, floor mounting type;

sheet metal clad, cubicle type enclosures which shall also be served as charger panels.

The assembly shall be complete in all respect and shall contain all the components

described in different clauses and which are essential for the proper operation and control

of the equipments. The enclosures shall be totally enclosed dust tight and vermin proof.

All doors and covers shall be filled with rubber gaskets. The panels shall have double leaf

hinged doors at the back and shall be provided with locks and duplicated keys. The

equipments in the panels shall be so located as not to cause congestion and accessibility

to the equipments located herein shall be easy and convenient.

All incoming and outgoing cables shall enter from bottom and suitable cable terminal boards

with cable lugs shall be provided in side of each panel for incoming and outgoing cables.

Each terminal of the terminal boards shall be serially numbered to facilitate connections.

At least 20% extra terminals shall be provided in each terminal board. Suitable

compression type cable glands with base plates shall also be provided. The terminal

boards shall be easily accessible for inspection and checking. The panels shall have

cable supports and metallic clips for supporting power and control cables for internal

wiring of the panels.

2.2.7 TESTS

The battery charger and all the components of the charger shall be routine tested accordingly

to their relevant standard. This shall include the following:

a) Operational check for boost and float charger.

b) Input / Output test of the chargers.

c) Performance test of the charger.

d) Temperature rise test of the rectifier transformer.

e) Power frequency H.V. test / Insulation tests.


3.13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 General Features

1.1. The D.C. distribution boards shall be indoor, floor mounting of self supporting, sheet

metal clad, and cubicle type. The panels should be totally enclosed, dust tight and

vermin proof and shall be made of 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel. The boards shall be

provided with double leaf hinged doors at the back. All doors and covers shall be fitted

with rubber gaskets. The doors shall be provided with locks and duplicated covers

2.0 Busbars

2.1. The busbars shall be of electrolytic copper of ample cross-section. The busbars shall be

insulated from the structure by means of durable, non-hydroscopic, non-combustible and

non tracking materials.

3.0 Detail Requirements

3.1. The 110 Volts D.C. distribution boards shall be provided with the following:

A. One mains failure alarm relay.

B. One earth fault alarm relay.

C. One 110 Volts D.C. bell to be operated by the mains failure alarm relay.

D. One 110 Volts D.C. buzzer to be operated by the earth failure alarm relay.

E. One double pole air-break circuit breaker of 200 amp capacity with thermal

overload tripping arrangement to act as incoming breaker of the load bus.

F. One 0-150 volts D.C. moving coil voltmeter to measure the bus-bar voltage. The

display is to be in digital.

G. One pilot lamp to indicate D.C. on conditions.

H. 250 volts, double pole double throw make before break switch with H.R.C. fuses

of following ratings for outgoing feeders.

a. 16 Amp, 4 Nos.

b. 32 Amp, 3 Nos.

c. 63 Amp, 1 Nos


I. One terminal Board/block for all feeder outlets including cable glands.


3.14 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 SCOPE

1.1. This section of the specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works,

transport to site, insurance, storage, erection and commissioning of 415 volts, A.C. 50 Hz

A.C. Distribution Board complete with all equipments and accessories as described in

subsequent clauses.

2.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

2.1 The L.T.AC. panels shall be outdoor, sheet metal clad type comprising of

combination switch fuse units and bus bar chambers. and equipped with the circuits

and equipments as specified later. The different circuits shall be mounted above and

below the bus bar chamber to form a suitable arrangement, except that the

incomings will be located at the front and mounted below the bus bar chambers. All

equipments shall be suitable for the reception of the cables rising from the ground

level. The switch boards shall be so designed as to be readily extensible.

2.2 Required technical particulars of ACDB

1

. Manufacturers Name & Co

2 Bus Bars

a

)

Make

b

)

Continuous Current rating in Amps 200A

c

)

Material Aluminium

d

)

Current Density 0.9 Amps/sqmm

3 Incoming Switch Fuse Unit

a

)

Make Havell‘s/

Schinder

b Type SFU


)

c

)

Rated Voltage 415 Volts AC

d

)

Continuous Current carrying Capacity in Amps 200A

4 Indication Lamps

a

)

Make STD

b

)

Type LED

c

)

Voltage 220Volts

5 Fuse

a

)

Make Havell‘s/

Schinder

b

)

Type HRC

c

)

Rupturing Capacity 80 KA

6 Switch (triple/double pole)

a

)

Make

Havell‘s/

Schinder/

EQV

b

)

Type SF UNIT

c

)

Rated Continuous Current carrying Capacity in

Amps 63A/32A/16A


7 Current Transformer

a

)

Make

b

)

Type Bar primary and

ring type

c

)

Ratio 100-200/5A

d

)

VA burden rating 15 VA

e

) Accuracy class 1

f

) Type of Insulation PVC

g

) Security factor <5

8

AC Meters/ Energy Meters

(Details for Ammeters Voltmeters, Energy Meters

shall be furnished separately)

AM

VM

KWH

a

)

Make M/S SML,or M/S

L&T

b

)

Type MI 96 mm sq.

3 ph, 4W

c

)

Range

0-100 A

,200/5

0-200 A 0-

500

0-300A

d

)

Accuracy 1.5


9 Internal Wiring

a

)

Make Supercab/ EQV

b

)

Type PVC Insulated

Copper

c

)

Voltage Grade 1100 Volts

d

) Size Recommended

e

) Material used Copper

1

0 Cable Glands

a

)

Make Standard

b

)

Type Compression

type

c

) Size As per cable size

d

) Material used Brass

1

1 Terminal Block

a

)

Make Eleco/ STD

b

)

Type STUND Type

d

) Material used Bakelite DMC


1

2 Switch Board

a

)

Overall Dimension

1500x900x500

mm(for nine

feeders

ACDB)

b

)

Thickness of Steel metal 1.6 mm

c

)

Finish Light Grey

d

)

Approximate Weight 250Kg

3.0 COMBINATION MCCB UNIT

3.1. All MCCB shall be of triple pole rotary operated type and shall open and close with snap

action. The series combination MCCB shall conform to the provisions of latest issue of IS

– 13947-2.

3.2. The MCCB shall be suitable for rated voltage of 415 volts AC., 50 Hz. The rated

current of each unit shall be as specified before.

4.0 BUS BARS

4.0 The phase and neutral bus bars shall be of high conductivity (as per IS 5082)

aluminum of adequate uniform cross section. The bus bars shall be insulated

from the structure by means of durable non-hygroscopic, noncombustible and

non-tracking materials. Bus bar joints shall be bolted type.

5.0 The 415 Volts, L.T.A.C. switchgear shall have following circuits and equipments:

(a) INCOMING: - One number fitted with following:

(i) One 400/300 Amps. as required , unit fitted with cable glands suitable for 4

core XLPE cable labeled "Incoming".

(ii) One voltmeter, 0-500 volts.

(iii) One Ammeter, 0-500 Amps.


(iv) One KWH Static Electronic Three phase Trivector meter having facility of

downloading the data with connected CTs as mentioned.

(b) OUTGOING :- Nos. 1 and 2 each comprising of:

One 300/200 Amps. as required, unit fitted with complete with direct connected round

protecting pattern ammeter, scaled 0-300 Amps, and cable gland suitable for 4 core

XLPE cable labeled as ―outgoing‖.

Name Plate

The board shall be provided with nameplate covering all technical data and also name of

the project shall be clearly mentioned

7.0 INSPECTION.





the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in· accordance with the

specification.


SECTION :7

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL

PARTICULARS


1. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV /11kV TRANSFORMER

2. (To be filled by bidder)

3.

Sl. No

Description

1 Name of the Manufacturer

2 Installation [indoor/outdoor]

3 Reference standards

4 Continuous Ratings

a) Type of cooling

b) Rating [MVA]

c Rated voltage

i HV [KV rms.]

ii LV [KV-rms.]

d Highest system voltage

i HV [KV rms.]

ii LV [KV-rms.]

e Rated frequency with ±% variation

f Number of phases

g Current at rated full load and on principal tap

i HV [Amps]

ii LV [Amps]

5 Connections

HV

LV

6 Connection symbol and vector group

7 Temperature rise

a Temperature rise of oil above reference peak ambient temperature i.e.50 °C [by thermometer] [°C]

b Temperature rise of winding above reference peak ambient temperature [by resistance method][°C]


c Temperature gradients between windings & oil.

d Limit of Hot spot temperature for which the Transformer is designed [°C]

8 Type of ON load tap changing switch

9 Tapping on windings for

i Constant flux/variable flux/combined regulation

ii Tapping provided at

iii Number of steps

iv Range of tapping for variation [+ percent to - percent]

10 i No load loss at rated voltage and frequency at principal tap [KW]

ii No load loss at the voltage corresponding to highest tap [KW]

11 Load loss at rated output, rated frequency, corrected for 75 °C winding temperature at:- [Copper loss ]

ONAN

i Principal tap [In KW]

ii Highest tap [In KW]

iii Lowest tap [In KW]

12 Positive sequence impedance on rated MVA base at rated current and frequency at 75°Centigrade winding temperature at

i Principal tap [%]

ii Highest tap [%]

iii Lowest tap [%]

13 Zero sequence impedance at reference temperature of 75°C at principal tap [%]

14 % reactance at rated MVA base at rated current and rated frequency at

i Principal tap [%]

ii Highest tap [%]

iii Lowest tap [%]

15 % resistance at rated MVA base at rated current and rated frequency at

i Principal tap [%]

ii Highest tap [%]


iii Lowest tap [%]

16 % Impedance at rated MVA base at rated current and rated frequency at

i Principal tap [%]

ii Highest tap [%]

iii Lowest tap [%]

17 a Polarisation index i.e. ratio of Megger values at 600 secs to 60 secs, (H.V. to E, L.V. to E, & H.V.to L.V.)

In Between PI

H.V - E

L.V. - E

H.V – L.V.

b Regulation at full load and 75°C winding temperature expressed as a percentage of normal voltage

i At unity power factor [%]

ii At 0.8 power factor [lagging][%]

18 Efficiency at 75°C winding temperature as derived from guaranteed loss figures and at

Unity power factor

0.8 Power factor

a At full load [%]

b At ¾ load [%]

c At ½ load [%]

19 i Maximum efficiency [%]

ii Load at which maximum efficiency occurs[% of full load]

20 Short time thermal rating of

i HV winding in KA and duration in seconds

ii LV winding in KA and duration in seconds

21 Permissible over loading:-

a HV winding

b LV winding

22 Terminal arrangement

a High voltage [HV]

b Low voltage (LV)

c Neutral

23 Insulating and cooling medium

24 Test voltage HV LV

i Lightning impulse withstand test voltage [KVP]

ii Power frequency withstand test voltage [dry and wet][for 1 minute] [KV-rms.]


25 Noise level when energized at normal voltage, frequency without load.

26 External short circuit withstand capacity [MVA] and duration [seconds]

27 Over-fluxing withstand capability of the Transformer

28 DETAILS OF CORE

a Type of core construction

b Type of corner joints of the core

c Maximum flux density at

i Rated voltage [33/11 KV] & rated frequency 50 Hz][in Tesla]

ii Highest system voltage [36/12 KV] and lowest system frequency [48.5Hz.][in Tesla]

d No load current, no load loss and no load power factor at normal ratio and frequency [Amp/KW/p.f.]

i 10 percent of rated voltage

ii 25 percent of rated voltage

iii 50 percent of rated voltage

iv 85 percent of rated voltage

v 100 percent of rated voltage

vi 105 percent of rated voltage

vii 110 percent of rated voltage

viii 112.5 percent of rated voltage

ix 115 percent of rated voltage

x 120 percent of rated voltage

xi 121 percent of rated voltage

xii 125 percent of rated voltage

e Core laminations:-

i Material of core lamination [M4 /HIB]

ii Grade of core laminations

iii Thickness of core lamination [mm]

iv Specific loss [watt/Kg.] at rated voltage and rated frequency

v Specific loss [watt/Kg.] at highest system voltage and lowest system frequency

vi Whether specific core loss graph [flux density vs. watt/Kg. submitted


vii VA/Kg at rated voltage and rated frequency

viii VA/Kg. at highest system voltage and lowest system frequency

ix Whether VA/Kg. Vs. flux density graph Submitted

x Insulation of core laminations

f CORE ASSEMBLY:-

i Core diameter [mm]

ii Core window height [mm]

iii Core leg centre [mm]

iv Gross core cross-sectional area [m²]

v Whether details of core widths, stacks and calculation furnished as per enclosed annexure

vi Distance between centers [mm]

vii Total height of core [mm]

viii 1) Details of core belting.

2) Material, grade & type

3) Width

4) Thickness

5) Fixing method

ix Details of top end frame

x Details of Bottom end frame

xi Details of clamp plate [Material, thickness, Insulation]

xii Total core weight [kg]

xiii Core loss basing on core loss graph at operating flux density [rated voltage and rated frequency] [kw]

xiv Core stacking factor

xv Net core area Sq. m.

xvi Margin towards corner joints, cross fluxing etc [kw]

xvii Total core loss at rated voltage and rated frequency [xiii+xvii] [kw]

xviii Dielectric loss at rated voltage and rated frequency [KW]

xix No load loss at rated voltage and rated frequency [xviii+xix] [KW]

g Describe location/method of core grounding

h Details of oil ducts in core


i Peak value of magnetizing Inrush current (% of HV rated current).

29 DETAILS OF WINDINGS. HV Regulating LV

a Type of winding

b Material of the winding conductor

c Maximum current density of windings [at rated current] and conductor area

Conductor area [cm²]

Current density [A/cm²]

i HV

ii Regulating

iii L.V.

d Whether HV windings are interleaved

e Whether windings are pre-shrunk?

f Whether adjustable coil clamps are provided for H.V. and L.V. windings?

g Whether steel rings are used for the windings? If so, whether these are split?

h Whether electrostatic shields are provided to obtain uniform voltage distribution in the windings?

i Winding Insulation. Type & class Graded or Ungraded

i H.V. & Regulating

ii LV Winding

j Insulating material used for

i H.V.& Regulating winding

ii L.V Winding

iii Tapping connection

k Insulating material used between

i H.V. and L.V. winding

ii H.V. and Regulating winding

iii Core and L.V winding

iv L.V. Winding and core

v Regulating Winding and core

vi H.V. winding and core

vii H.V. to H.V. winding [between phases]

l Type of axial coil supports

i H.V. winding

ii Regulating winding


iii LV winding

m Type of radial coil supports

i H.V. winding

ii Regulating winding

ii LV winding

n Maximum allowable torque on coil clamping HV Regulating LV bolts

o Bare conductor size (mm).

p Insulated conductor size (mm).

q No. of conductors in parallel (Nos.).

r No. of turns/phase

s No. of discs/phase

t No. of turns/disc

u Gap between discs. (mm).

v Inside diameter (mm).

w Outside diameter (mm).

x Axial height after shrinkage (mm).

y D.C.RESISTANCE

i L.V winding at 75 ° C (Ohms).

ii HV winding and Regulating winding at normal tap at 75° C (Ohms).

iii HV winding and Regulating winding at highest tap at 75° C (Ohms).

iv HV winding and regulating winding at lowest tap. (Ohms).

v Total I²R losses at 75 ° C. for normal tap. (KW).

vi Total I²R losses at 75 ° C. for highest tap. (KW)

vii Total I²R losses at 75 ° C for lowest tap.(KW).

viii Stray losses including eddy current losses in winding at 75°C (KW).

a Normal tap position

b Highest tap position

c Lowest tap position.

d Any special measures taken to reduce eddy current losses and stray losses, mention in details


x Load losses at 75°C [I²R + stray].

a Normal tap position [KW].

b Highest tap position [KW].

c Lowest tap position [KW].

z Details of special arrangement provided to improve surge voltage distribution in the windings

30 BUSHINGS. HV LV Neutral

a Make and type

i Rated voltage class [KV-rms.]

ii Rated current [Amps.]

b Lightning Impulse withstand test voltage [1.2/50 micro second][KVP]

c Power frequency withstand test voltage

i Wet for 1 minute [KV-rms]

ii Dry for 1 minute [KV-rms]

d Power frequency visible corona discharge voltage [KV-rms.]

e Minimum creepage distance in mm

f Phase to earth clearance in air of live parts at the top of bushings

31 Minimum clearance [mm] In Oil Out of Oil

Between windings

Phase to

Ground

Between windings

Phase to

Ground

HV

LV

32 Weight [Tolerance + 5%] [Approximate value is not allowed]

a Core [Kg.]

b Core with clamping [Kg.]

c H.V. winding insulated conductor [Kg.]

d Regulating winding insulated conductor [Kg.]

e L.V.winding insulated conductor [Kg.]

f Coils with insulation [Kg.]

g Core and winding [Kg]

h Oil required for first filling


[Liter/Kg.]

i Tank and fittings with accessories [Kg.]

j Untanking weight [Kg.]

k Total weight with oil and fittings [kg.]

33 DETAILS OF TANK

a Material for Transformer tank

b Type of tank

c Thickness of sheet [No approximate value to be mentioned]

i Sides [mm]

ii Bottom [mm]

iii Cover [mm]

iv Radiators [mm]

d Inside dimensions of main tank [No approximation in dimensions to be used]

i Length [mm]

ii Breadth [mm]

iii Height [mm]

e Outside dimensions of main tank [No approximation in dimensions to be used]

i Length [mm]

ii Breadth [mm]

iii Height [mm]

f Thickness of spray galvanisation of tank bottom.

g Vacuum recommended for hot oil circulation [torr]

h Vacuum to be maintained during oil filling in Transformer tank [torr]

i Vacuum to which the tank can be subjected without distortion [torr]

j No. of bi-directional wheels provided

k Track gauge required for the wheels

i Transverse axis

ii Longitudinal axis

l Type and make of pressure relief device and minimum pressure at which it operates [Kpa]


34 CONSERVATOR

a Total volume [Liters]

b Volume between the highest and lowest visible oil levels [Litres]

c Whether flexi separator provided

35 OIL QUALITY

a Governing standard

b Density in gms/cu-cm

c Kinematics viscosity in CST

d Inter facial tension at 27°C in N/m

e Flash point in °C

f Pour point in °C

g Acidity [neutralization value] in mg of KOH/gm

h Corrosive sulfur in %

i Electric strength [breakdown voltage]

i As received [KV-rms.]

ii After treatment [KV-rms.]

j Dielectric dissipation factor [tan delta] at 90°C

k Saponification value in mg of KOH/gm

l Water content in ppm

m Specific resistance

i At 90°C [ohm-cm]

ii At 27 °C [ohm-cm]

N- dm analysis

CA%

CM%

CP%

o Oxidation stability

i Neutralization value after oxidation

ii Total sludge after oxidation

p Characteristic of oil after ageing test as per ASTMD-1934

i Specific resistance at

27°C [ohm-cms]

90°C [ohm-cms]

ii Tan delta

iii Sludge content

iv Neutralization number

v Details of oil preserving equipment offered


36 RADIATORS

a Overall dimensions lxbxh [mm]

b Total weight with oil [Kg.]

c Total weight without oil [Kg.]

d Thickness of radiator tube [mm]

e Types of mounting

f Vacuum withstand capability

g Total radiating surface in sq.m

h Type and make of material used for the radiators

i Total number of radiators for Transformer and dimensions of tubes

j Thickness of hot dip galvanization of radiators

37 GAS AND OIL OPERATED RELAY

a Make

b Type

c Size

d Whether supervisory alarm and trip contacts provided and their sizes and Nos

38 TEMPERATURE INDICATORS Oil Temp Indicator

Winding Temp Indicator

a Make and type

b Permissible setting ranges for alarm and trip

c Number of contacts

d Current rating of each contact

e Whether supervisory alarm contacts provided?

f Size [lxbxd]

g Nos.

h Ratio and type of CT used for winding temperature indicators.

39 APPROXIMATE OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF TRANSFORMER INCLUDING COOLING SYSTEM, TAP CHANGING GEAR ETC.

Length [mm]

Breadth [mm]

Height [mm]

40

a Minimum clearance height for lifting core and winding from tank


[mm]

b Minimum clearance height for lifting tank cover [mm]

41 SHIPPING DETAILS

a Approximate weight of heaviest package [Kg.]

b Approximate dimensions of largest Package [Kg.]

42 Transformers will be transported with oil/gas.

43 MARSHALLING KIOSK

a Make and type

b Details of apparatus proposed to be housed in the kiosk

44 Details of anti-earthquake device provided, if any

45 Separate conservator and Buchholz relay provided

46 TAP CHANGING EQUIPMENT [These details refer to the basic rating of O.L. T.C. as guaranteed by OLTC manufacturers]

a Make

b Type

c Power flow [Uni.-directional/bi - directional/restricted bi-directional]

d Rated voltage to earth [KV]

e Rated current [Amps.]

f Step voltage [volts]

g Number of steps

h Control - manual/local- electrical/remoteelectrical

i Voltage control [Automatic/Non -automatic]

j Line drop compensation provided/not provided

k Parallel operation

l Protective devices

m Auxiliary supply details

n Time for complete tap change [one step][Sec.]

o Diverter selector switch transient time [cycles]

p Value of maximum short circuit current [Amps]


q Maximum impulse withstand test voltage with 1.2/50 micro seconds full wave between switch assembly and ground [KVP]

r Maximum power frequency test voltage between switch assembly and earth [KV-rms]

s Maximum impulse withstand test voltage with 1.2/50 micro-seconds across the tapping range [KVP]

t Approximate overall dimensions of tap changer [WxBxD] in mm

u Approximate overall weight [Kg.]

v Approximate mass of oil [Kg.]

w Particulars of the OLTC control panel for installation in control room

47 DRIVING MECHANISM BOX

a Make and type

b Details of apparatus proposed to be housed in the box

48 Types of terminal connectors and drawing No

a HV

b LV

49 Details of painting, galvanization conforms to this Specification [Yes/No]

50 Type of oil level indicator and whether Supervisory alarm contact for low oil level provided [Yes/No]

51 Type and size of thermostat to be used

52 No. of breathers provided [Nos.]

53 Type of dehydrating agent used for breathers

54 Valve sizes and numbers

a Drain valves- mm-Nos

b Filter valves- mm-Nos

c Sampling valves- mm-Nos

d Radiator valves- mm-Nos

e Other valves- mm-Nos

55 a Type and make of PRV

b No. of each type of devices per transformer


c Min. pressure at which device operates

56 Please enclose the list of accessories and fittings, being provided on transformer. Please confirm, these are as stipulated in the tender

57 Whether the transformer, covered is fully type tested and if so, whether copies of type test certificates, enclosed with the tender

58 Please confirm that you will guarantee maximum Impedance variation between phases within the limit of 2% only


4.

5. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

6. (To be filled by bidder)

1. Name of the Manufacturer

2. Country of Origin

3. Manufacture‘s type and Designation

4. Number of poles

5. Rated Voltage (KV)

6. Standards Applicable

7. Normal Current Rating

a)IEC conditions

b)Site conditions

8. Frequency in cycles per second

9. Making capacity in peak kilo-amperes

10. Breaking capacity

a) Symmetrical in KA

b) A-Symmetrical in KA

11. Three second short time current rating

12. Total Break time in milli second

a) At 10% rated interrupting capacity

b) At 30% rated interrupting capacity

c) At 60% rated interrupting capacity

d) At 100% rated interrupting capacity

13. Maximum temperature rise above ambient

a) Live parts (Degree C)

b) Enclosure (Degree C)

14. Whether suitable for three phase auto reclosing

15. Breaker

a) Opening time in milli – seconds with no current

b) Opening time in Milli-seconds at rated breaking current

c) Arcing time in milli-seconds

d) Time in milli-seconds from Arc Extinction to contact fully open

e) Dead time in mill-seconds for three phase reclosing

f) Time in milli-second

j) From circuit energized to contacts make

ii) From contacts make to contacts fully closed


16. 1.2/50 microsecond lightening impulsive with stand voltage to earth (in KV peak)

17. One minute power frequency dry. Withstand voltage to earth (in KV rms)

18. One minute power frequency wet withstand voltage to earth (in KV rms)

19. First pole to clear factor

20. Out of phase switching capability of the breaker

21. Rated out of phase breaking current

22. Switchgear component load requirement

a) Circuit breaker

i) Spring charging motor

ii) Close coils

iii) Open coils

iv) Heaters

b) Control cubicle

i) Relays

ii) Heaters

iii) Indications

c) Other requirements

23. Maximum line charging current that the breaker can interrupt (in Amperes)

24. Maximum over voltage developed while breaking line charging current

a) Supply slide (KV)

b) Line side (KV)

25. Maximum shunt capacitor bank switching capacity of breaker (single bank MVA)

26. Maximum cable charging current breaking capacity (in Amps) and corresponding over voltage (in KV)

a) Supply side

b) Line side

27. Short line fault current breaking capacity (KV)

28. Maximum over voltage developed while breaking magnetizing current of transformer (KV)

29. Rated operating duty cycle

30. Minimum clearance in air

a) Between poles (mm)

b) Between live part (mm) to earth

c) Between live part to ground level (mm)

31. Creepage distance

a) To ground (mm)


b) Between terminals (mm)

32. Protected creepage distance (mm)

33. Number for breaks in series per pole

34. Type of main contacts

35. Type of arcing contacts

36. a) contact silver plated or not

b) Thickness of silver plating

c) Contact pressure

d) Electric contract resistance at 20 degree C (ohm)

37. Type of device, if any used to limit rate of rise of restriking voltage

38. Number and type of spare auxiliary switches provided

a) Normally closed

b) Normally open

39. Rated voltage of auxiliary contacts

40. Material of auxiliary contact

41. Current carrying capacity of auxiliary contacts

42. Type and make of vacuum interrupter

43. Dynamic load to be transferred to foundation

a) Co-Operation (Compressive)

b) Co-operation (Tensile)

44. Guaranteed number of operations

a) With no load current

b) With full fault current

c)Those adjustable with respect to position of main contact

45. Over all dimensions

i) Height (mm)

ii) Width (mm)

iii) Length (mm)

46. Weight of complete circuit breaker for foundation design

47. Seismic level for which the breaker is designed

a) Horizontal acceleration

b) Vertical acceleration

48. Height of supporting structure

49. Material of supporting structure

50. Noise level of circuit breaker at 5 meters distance

51. Whether the circuit breaker is fixed trip or trip-free

52. Short circuit type test report


53. Porcelain bushings

i) Type

ii) Dry flashover voltage

iii) Wet flashover voltage

iv) Dry 60-S withstand test voltage

v) Wet 80-S withstand test voltage

vi) Under-oil flashover or puncture withstand test voltage (power frequency)

vii) Full wave impulse withstand test voltage

viii) Creepage distance in air (total) mm

ix) Protected creepage distance (mm)

x) Whether the bushing is suitable for outdoor installation and extreme humid conditions

xi) Weight of the assembled bushing (Kg)

xii) Whether terminal connection for all bushing included in scope of supply

xiii) Test (routine/type) to be conducted on the bushing

xiv) Bushing, clearance in (mm)

a) Between phases

b) Between phase to ground

xv) Performance guarantee


7. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

8. (To be filled by Bidder)

Technical Particulars M.W. Meters

Volt Meters

Ammeters

A. METERS

a i) Type of instrument

aii] Name of manufacturer

b) Size

c) Whether magnetically shielded or not

d) Limits of error in the effective range

e) Scale length

f) Short time overload capacity

g) VA burden

i) Current coil

ii) Potential coil

h) BSS grade accuracy

i) Description leaflet reference Nos. submitted

B. STATIC ENERGY METERS

a) Rating of current coil & potential coil

b) Continuous withstand capacity of the above coils

c) Limits of error at unity pf and

i) 125/25% rated current

ii) 10% rated current

iii) 5% rated current

d) Limits of error at 0.5 pf (lag) and

i) 125/25% rated current

ii) 10% rated current

e) Power losses per element

i) Current coil

ii) Potential coil

f) Minimum running current (percent of marked current)

g) Variation of voltage to cause a change of not more than 1% at any load from full to 1/10

h) Variation of air temperatures maximum temperature co-efficient of error in percent per Deg.C at


i) Unity pf

ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

i) Variation dur of heating by main current in percent at

i) Unity pf

ii) 0.5 pf (lag)

j) Variation of frequency percent error due to 5% variation in frequency

i) At unity pf

ii) At 0.5 pf (lag)

k) Overload capacity

i) Continuous

ii) ½ second

l) Excess voltage permissible fr 30 minutes

m) Type of register mechanism with register constant

n] Type of instrument

o] Name of manufacturer

C. PROTECTIVE RELAYS

C1 . Non-directional over current relays

a i) Type of instrument

aii] Name of manufacturer

b) Current coil range

c) Tap range

d) Power consumption

i) Highest tap

ii) Lowest tap

c) Time of operation at maximum time dial setting at

i) 5 times tap setting current

ii) 10 times tap setting current

f) Type of characteristic

g) Whether draw out type or not

h) Trip contact rating Amps

i) Whether seal in contact provided or not

2. Non-directional earth fault relays

a) Type

b) Current coil range

c) Tap range

d) VA burden


i) Highest tap

ii) Lowest tap

e) Power consumption

i) Highest tap

ii) Lowest tap

f) time of operation at maximum time dial setting at

i) 5 times tap setting current

ii) 10 times tap setting current

g) Whether draw out type or not

h) Trip contact rating Amps

i) Whether seal in contact provided or not

C2 Differential Relay Details as above to be provided along with manufacturers leaflets

D. ANNUNCIATIONS

a) Type of annunciation system offered

b) Make of the system

c] Any deviation from specification to be stated.

c) Sequence and scheme of operation of the annunciation system (Drawings shall be enclosed) together with details of components involved.

E. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

a) Response time

b) Burden for pre-warm up facility per window

c) No. of lamps per window

d) Burden per window

i) With flashing

ii) With steady light

iii) During off condition

f) Whether annunciation system is suitable for 110 V DC supply

F. GENERAL

a) Panel sheet thickness

b) Over all dimensions

i) Width

ii) Depth


iii) Height

c) Total weight of panel

d) Internal finish

e) External finish


9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11kV CR PANEL

Particulars Values

1.Dimension H x D x W (1475 X 300 X 600 mm)

2 Thickness of steel sheet in mm (minimum 2mm)

3 Arrangement of rear door(Provision of turn twist locks at top & bottom with handle)

Interior illumination (CFL with protective cage & On/Off switch)

5 Provision of detachable Gland Plate (4mm thick at 200 mm above base of Panel

6 Make, Type & Rating of Terminal Connector for CT/PT circuits (disconnectable type)

7 Make, Type & rating of Terminal Connectors for control circuits (Non-disconnecting type)

Size of conductor used for Wiring of CT, PT circuits & control

circuits (2.5 sq.mm stranded copper for CT, PT circuits & 1.5

sq.mm for other circuits )

Wiring colour codes for R,Y, B Phase & Black Neutral (AC), Red-

Positive, yellow-Negative(DC), Green-Earthing, Grey- control

circuit

Instruments identification (labels to be provided)

12 CT/PT/AC/DC/ Circuit Identification (labels to be provided)

Final outside finish (Opaline green color)

Inside finish(Egg shell white)

Make, Type, scale of Ammeter (96 Sq.mm. Flush Mounting Type Dual Range, 5A, 0 to125 or 250V

Make & Rating of Ammeter Selector switch(current rating shall not be less than


15A)

Type & thickness of gaskets provided in the rear door & cable gland plate

Make, Type & Rating of Pistol grip breaker control switch

Make, Type & Rating of indicating lamps & Total nos. of lamps

Make, Type & Rating of Push buttons & Total nos. of lamps

Provision of copper Earthing Bus (25mm x 6 mm x 250 mm)size

Provision of Alarm cancellation relay (Give Make, Type, Rating)

Provision of Plastic Channels with sliding covers for wiring

Provision of Spare Plastic channels with sliding cover

Ferruling of wires at both ends

Provision of 3-Pin 5A Socket with On/off switch

Provision of lifting Eye-Bolts & their size

Provision of circuit diagram on rear side of back door of the panel

Provision of Pocket with adequate space with transparent cover on top of panel for identification name of feeder / transformer panel

. IDMT O/C and E/F Relays:-

Feeder Control (numerical) with high set

i. Make

ii. Model no.

iii. O/C Setting

iv. E/F Setting

IDMT

Configuration (Horizontal)

Total nos. of NO and NC Contacts(Hand/self


reset)

Hand or Self Reset Flag

10.


11. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV ISOLATOR

12. (To be filled by Bidder)

1.2 Manufacturer's name & address

1.3 Guaranteed delivery schedule

1.4 System Voltage

1.5 Maximum permissible service voltage

1.6 Continuous current rating

1.7 Short time current rating

i) for 1 sec

ii) for 3 sec

1.8 Rated peak short circuit current

1.9 Rated peak short circuit current of earthing blade

1.10 Temperature with corresponding to

i) Maximum current rating at 60 deg. C ambient temperature

ii) Short time current rating

1.11 Fault current which can be made by earth switch

1.12 Maximum current that can be safely interrupted between equi-potential busbars

1.13 Clearance in air (minimum) in mm

i) between phases

ii) between live parts and earth

iii) distance between centres of outer stacks of insulators

1.14 Power frequency withstand voltage test for complete assembled switches

i) Against ground

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

ii) Across open contacts

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

iii) Between phases


a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

1.15

Particulars of main contacts in fixed (main and earthing switch) and moving contacts (main and earthing switch)

i) Type

ii) Material

iii) Surface treatment

iv) contact area

1.16 Current density of minimum cross section of switch blade

1.17 No. of operations without need for inspection

1.18 Type and materials of connectors

1.19 Whether arcing contacts provided and if yes, give materials used

1.20

Whether adjustable gap type arcing horns provided and if yes, give materials used

1.21 Insulators

i) Creepage distance of insulators in mm

ii) Bending strength of insulators in KN

1.22 location and type of bearings

1.23 Weight of complete isolators with insulator

i) With earthing blade, Kg

ii) Without earthing blade, Kg

1.24 Operating efforts required for manual operation, Kg

1.25 Type of interlocking between isolating switch and earth switch

1.26 Details of mounting (centre to centre)

1.27 Guaranteed weight of mounting structure including nuts and bolts in Kg


1.28 Auxiliary contacts

i) Normally Open (NO) contacts

ii) Normally Close(NC) contacts

1.29 Auxiliary DC Supply


13. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV CURRENT TRANSFORMER

1.0 General

1.1 Manufacturer‘s name and address

2.0 Current Transformer

2.1 Standard applicable

2.2 Type

2.3 Rated voltage kV

2.4 Rated frequency Hz

2.5 No of cores

2.6 Rated primary current

2.7 Rated secondary current

2.8 Turns ratio

2.9 Rated output VA

2.10 Accuracy class

2.11 Accuracy limit factor

2.12 Instrument security factor

2.13 Maximum Knee point voltage ,V

2.14 Max. secondary resistance Ohm

2.15 Exciting current, mA

i) At knee point voltage

ii) at 50% of knee voltage

iii) at 50% of knee voltage( at highest ratio tab)

2.16 Rated output at different tap, VA

2.17

One minute power frequency withstand voltage, kV(rms) i) Primary winding ii) Secondary winding

2.18 Standard impulse withstanding voltage of primary winding kV(peak)

2.19 Creepage distance mm

2.20 Rated thermal current A

2.21 Rated short time current kA

2.22 Rated time for above current(sec)

2.23 Rated dynamic current kA(peak)

2.24 Class of insulation


2.25 Rated continuous current temp. rise over ambient degree

2.26

Time period for which secondary winding can be left open when rated primary current is flowing in primary winding

2.27 Quantity of oil litre

2.28 Total weight Kg

2.29 Whether PRV provided

CGM(D)/APDCL/LAR/CIT SS/18-19/D-32

of 282

14. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER

Sl no.

Specification

1.0 Manufacturer‘s name and address

1.1 Potential Transformer

1.2 Standard applicable

1.3 Type

1.4 Rated voltage kV

1.5 Rated frequency Hz

1.6

One minute power frequency withstand voltage, kV(rms) i) Primary winding ii) Secondary winding

1.7 Standard impulse withstanding voltage of primary winding kV(peak)

1.8 Creepage distance mm

1.9 Temperature at 1.2 times rated burden in degree C

1.10 Quantity of oil litre

1.11 Total weight Kg

1.12 Hermetically scaling arrangements

1.13 Transformation ratio

1.14

1.15 Rated burden VA

1.16 Accuracy class

1.17 Maximum ratio error with rated burden and at 5% normal voltage


of 282

15. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS

FOR

GALVANIZED IRON STEEL TUBULAR POLE

14.5M=Sp-76 (380kg)]

(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE BIDDER)

:-

SL.

NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT

SP-76

( 380 KG )

Name of the bidder

1 Name of Manufacturer

2 Place of manufacture

3 Country in origin

4 IS Standards Application

5 Type of Pole

6 Total length M

7 Out side diameter and thickness

of section

a Bottom mm

b Middle mm

c Top mm

8 Minimum Guaranteed weight of

pole ( without base plate )

9 Effective length of Section

a Bottom

b Middle

c Top

9 Minimum Guaranteed weight of

Base plate

10 Breaking load

11 Crippling load

12 Galvanization—gm/sqm

PERFORMANCE GAURANTEE


of 282

Particulars unit 33kV

1 Manufacturer's name & address

2 Guaranteed delivery schedule

3 System Voltage

4 Maximum permissible service voltage

5 Continuous current rating

6 Short time current rating

i) for 1 sec

ii) for 3 sec

7 Rated peak short circuit current

8 Rated peak short circuit current of earthing blade

9 Temperature with corresponding to

i) Short time current rating

10 Fault current which can be made by earth switch

11 Maximum current that can be safely interrupted between equi-potential busbars

12 Clearance in air (minimum) in mm

i) between phases

ii) between live parts and earth

iii) distance between centres of outer stacks of insulators

13 Power frequency withstand voltage test for complete assembled switches

i) Against ground

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

ii) Across open contacts

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

iii) Between phases

a) Dry, KV

b) Wet, KV

14 Particulars of main contacts in fixed (main and earthing switch) and moving

contacts (main and earthing switch)

i) Type

ii) Material

iii) Surface treatment

iv) contact area

15 Current density of minimum cross section of switch blade

16 No. of operations without need for inspection

17 Type and materials of connectors

18 Whether arcing contacts provided and if yes, give materials used

19 Whether adjustable gap type arcing horns provided and if yes, give materials used

20 Insulators

i) Creepage distance of insulators in mm

ii) Bending strength of insulators in KN

21 location and type of bearings

22 Weight of complete isolators with insulator

i) With earthing blade, Kg


of 282

16. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF COMPOSITE 33 KV POLIMERIC DISC INSULATOR

ii) Without earthing blade, Kg

23 Operating efforts required for manual operation, Kg

24 Type of interlocking between isolating switch and earth switch

25 Details of mounting (centre to centre)

26 Guaranteed weight of mounting structure including nuts and bolts in Kg

Auxiliary contacts

i) Normally Open (NO) contacts

ii) Normally Close(NC) contacts

27 Auxiliary DC Supply

Sl. No. Description Unit 33 KV,90 KN

1. Type of Insulator

2. Standard according to which the Insulator manufacture and

tested

3. Name of material used in manufacture of the insulator with

class/grade

(a) Material of core(FRP rod) i) E-glass or ECR-glass ii) Boron content

(b) Material of housing & Weather sheds silicon content by weight

(c) (Material of end fitting)

(d) Sealing compound for end fittings

4. Colour

5. Electrical characteristics

(a) Normal system voltage KV(rms)

(b) Highest system voltage KV(rms)

(c) Dry power frequency withstand voltage KV(rms)

(d) Wet power frequency withstand voltage KV(rms)

(e) Dry flash over voltage KV(rms)

(f) Wet flash over voltage KV(rms)

(g) Dry lightning impulse withstand voltage a) Positive b) Negative

KV(peak)

(h) Dry lightning impulse flash over voltage c) Positive d) Negative

KV(peak)

(i) R/V at 1 MHz when energized at 10KV/30KV (rms) under dry

condition.

Microvolt

(j) Creepage distance (mm) (mm)

6. Mechanical characteristics

(a) Minimum failing load KN

7. Dimension of insulator

(i) Weight kg


of 282

17. GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV COMPOSITE POLYMER PIN INSULATORS

Sl

.No. Description

33 kV,

10 KN

1 Name of Manufacturer

2 Address:

(a) Registered Office

(b) factory

3 Type of Insulators

4 Standard specification to which the insulators manufactured and tested

5 Name of Material used in manufacture of the Insulator ( With class/ Grade)

(a) Material of core rod

(b) Material of Housing & Weather sheds (silicon content by weight)

(c) Material of end fittings : tongue/ clevis

(d) Sealing compound for end fitting

6 Colour Glaze of Insulator

7 Electrical Characteristics:

(a) Nominal System Voltage ( kV RMS)

(b) Highest System voltage (kV RMS)

(c) Dry power frequency withstand (kV RMS)

(d) Wet power frequency withstand (kV RMS)

(e) Dry flash over voltage (kV RMS)

(f) Wet flash over voltage (kV RMS)

(g) Dry lightening impulse withstand voltage

(a) Positive (kV Peak)

(b) Negative (kV Peak)

(h) Dry lightening impulse flashover voltage

(a) Positive (kV Peak)

(b) Negative (kV Peak)

(i) RIV at 1MHz when energised at 10kV/30kV(rms) under dry condition(microvolt)

(j) Creepage distance (min) mm

8 Mechanical Characteristics:

Minimum failing load(KN)

9 dimensions of insulator:

(i) Weight(kg)

(ii) dia of FRP rod(mm)

(ii) Dia of FRP rod mm

(iii) Length of FRP rod mm

(iv) Dia. of Weather sheds mm

(v) Thickness of housing mm

(vi) Dry arc distance mm

Dimension drawing of insulator including weight with

clearances in weight enclosed.

Yes/No.

8. Method of fixing of sheds to housing(specify single moulder

Modular construction moulding)

9. No. of Weather sheds

10. Types of sheds

(i) Aerodynamic

(ii) With under ribs

11. Packing details

(a) Type of packing

(b) No. of insulator each pack

(c) Gross weight of package

12. Any other particulars which the bidder may like to give.


of 282

(iii) Length of ERP rod(MM)

(iv) dia of weather sheds (mm)

(v) Thickness of housing (mm)

(vi) Dry arc distance(mm)

10

Dimensioned drawings of Insulator(inclluding weight with

tolerances in weight) enclosed

11

Method of fixing of sheds to housing specify):- Single mould or modular

construction( injection moulding/ compression moulding)

12 No. of weather sheds

13 Type of sheds

(i) Aerodynamic

(ii) With under ribs

14 Packing details

(a) Type of packing

(b) No. of Insulators in each pack

(c) Gross weight of package

18. Galvanized Channel Cross Arm [100x50x6x3200 mm ]

Sl No. Description Particular To be filled up by Bidder

Name of Manufacturer

1 Type of cross arm

2 Size

3 Material

Applicable Standard

4 Length

5 Breath

6 Width

7 Thickness

8 Hole

9 Center to center distance for

hole

10 Weight

11 Galvanization

12 Ref. Drawing

1. Galvanized Channel Cross Arm [100x50x6x2200 mm ]



1 Type of cross arm

2 Size

3 Material

Applicable Standard

4 Length

5 Breath

6 Width

7 Thickness

8 Hole


hole

10 Weight

11 Galvanization

12 Ref. Drawing


of 282

1. Galvanized Angle Cross Arm [50x50x6x5000 mm ]



1 Type of cross arm

2 Size

3 Material

Applicable Standard

4 Length

5 Breath

6 Width

7 Thickness

8 Hole


hole

10 Weight

11 Galvanization

12 Ref. Drawing

5 GUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS FFOORR GG..II.. WWIIRREE

((TTOO BBEE FFUURRNNIISSHHEEDD BBYY BBIIDDDDEERR))

Manufacturer‘s Name & Address

A. G.I.Wire (4 mm dia) :

1. Size of Wire :

2. Tolerance in size of wire :

3. Tensile strength :

4. Wrapping list :

5. Galvanising conforming to IS :

4826 – 1968

:

6. Guarantee :

B. G.I.Wire (5 mm dia) :

1. Size of Wire :

2. Tolerance in size of wire :

3. Tensile strength :


of 282

4. Wrapping list :

5. Galvanising conforming to IS :

4826 – 1968

:

6. Performance guarantee :

33 GGUUAARRAANNTTEEEEDD TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL PPAARRTTIICCUULLAARRSS FFOORR CC..II.. PPIIPPEE ((EEAARRTTHH))

((TTOO BBEE FFUURRNNIISSHHEEDD BBYY BBIIDDDDEERR))

Manufacturer‘s Name & Address

Sl. G.I.Wire (4 mm dia) :

1. Length of Pipe :

2. Diameter of Pipe :

3. External Dia of Pipe :

4. Thickness of Pipe :

5. Internal Dia of Socket :

6. Thickness of Socket :

7. Internal Depth of Socket :

8. Internal Radius of Socket :

9. Width of Grooves of Socket :

10. External Dia of Grooves Socket

11. Weight of Pipe :

12. Hydraulic Test :

13. Guarantee :


of 282

SECTION:8

General Conditions of Supply

& Erection of APDCL


of 282

GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF SUPPLY AND ERECTION

1.0 INTRODUCTION :

1.1 Assam Power Distribution Company Limited was constituted under the provisions of Electricity Act,

2003 and is a public sector company registered under ‗Company Act,1956‘. It was formed out of

Assam State Electricity Board in 2003 and was notified as the State Electricity Distribution Utility.

It is entrusted with the responsibility of promoting the co-ordinated development of power

distribution and its efficient management in the entire state of Assam.

1.2 Assam Power Distribution Company Limited hereinafter referred to as APDCL, has its Corporate

Office at BijuleeBhawan, Paltanbazar, Guwahati, Assam. For further information, one may refer to

APDCL‘s official web site: www.laedcl.gov .in.

1.3 Assam is one of the seven states of North East India and its boundary encompasses almost the

entire valleys of Brahmaputra and Barak rivers. The state is well connected with rest of the country

by broad gauge railways and several national highways, one of which is a part of the four lane

east-west corridor. It also has important airports at Guwahati, Jorhat, Silchar, Tezpur&Dibrugarh.

1.4 Relevant guidelines and rules connected with all departmental supply and erection works have been

laid down in this document General Conditions of Supply & Erection of Assam Power Distribution

Company Limited adopted in 2009. This document supersedes earlier conditions of contract. It is

intended that contractual clauses of this document will be generally followed in all contractual

works. Any modification of a contractual clause considering requirement of a particular project shall

be made in the NIT/ Tender document for the specific project.

2.0 DEFINITION OF TERMS:

2.1 The following terms appearing in the General Conditions of Supply & Erection of Assam Power

Distribution Company Limited shall have the meaning herein indicated unless there is anything

repugnant in the subject or context.

2.2 ―Purchaser/ Employer‖ shall mean the Assam Power Distribution Company Limited (in short APDCL)

and its assignees.

2.3 ―Contractor/Supplier/Owner‖ shall mean the tenderer/ bidder whose tender/ bid has been accepted

by the ―Purchaser/ Employer‖ and shall include the bidder‘s/ tenderer‘s legal personal

representatives, successors and assignees.

2.4 ―Engineer‖ shall mean the Officer in-Charge of Project/ Work/ purchase for the supply and/ or

erection contract or such other Officer or Offices as may be duly authorized and appointed in

writing by the Purchaser to act as ―Engineer‖ for the purpose of the contract.

2.5 ―Sub-Contractor‖ shall mean the person named in the contract for any part of the work or any person

to whom any part of the contract has been sublet with the consent in writing of the ―Purchaser/

Employer‖ and the legal representatives, successors and assignees of such person.

2.6 ―Materials‖ or ―Works‖ shall mean and include plant and materials to be provided and work to be

done by the contractor under contract.

2.7 ―Contract‖ shall mean and include the general conditions, specifications, schedules, drawings,

tender forms, bidding schedules, covering letter, schedule of prices, any special conditions

applying to the particular contract specification, amendments if any, letter of acceptance and

contract agreement to be entered into.

2.8 ―Contract period‖ means the period from the contract commencement date to the date on which the

warranty period is over. Date of acceptance of ‗Purchase/ Work Order‘ shall be treated as the ―date

of commencement of contract‖.


of 282

2.9 ―Specification‖ shall mean the relevant ISS/ IEC specification with up to date amendments and

revisions and/or APDCL specification wherever applicable.

2.10 ―Site‖ shall mean the site of the station, where proposed work is to be executed under the contract

and to which the plant and machinery are to be delivered and any other places as may be

specifically designated in the contract as forming part of the site.

2.11 ―Consignee‖ shall mean the Executive Engineer/ Senior Manager or any other authorized Officer

performing the duty of the consignee as specified in the Order.

2.12 ―Commercial use‖ shall mean use in the work which the contract contemplates or to which it is to be

commercially capable.

2.13 ―Day‖ shall mean a calendar day.

2.14 ―Month‖ shall mean a calendar month.

2.15 ―Writing‖ shall include any manuscript, type written or printed statement properly signed.

2.16 ―Persons‖ shall include firm, company, corporation and other body of persons whether incorporated

or not.

2.17 ―Word‖ indicating in the singular only shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context

requires.

2.18 ―Bid‖ will mean ―Tender‖

3.0 PREPARATION OF TENDER I BID:

3.1. DEFINITION OF TENDERER / BIDDER:

3.1.1. When the tenderer is a firm, the names and addresses of the partners must be indicated and a

copy of the certificate of registration with the concerned Registrar of firms should be enclosed.

3.1.2. When the tenderer is a Company, the company registration document along with Memorandum of

Association shall be submitted.

3.1.3. When the tenderer is an individual carrying on business in a firm‘s name, the tender should be

submitted by the owner of the firm, who may describe himself as carrying on business in the firm‘s

name.

3.1.4. When the tenderer is a Joint Venture (JV) of two or more firms as partners, one of the partners

shall be legally authorized as the lead partner for the purpose of submitting the tender, incur

liabilities; receive payments and instructions on behalf of the others. A copy of the registered

agreement, executed on Non judicial stamp paper, shall be submitted with the tender.

However, in case of a successful tender, the agreement shall be signed by all the partners, so as

to be legally binding on all the partners.

3.2. PURCHASE OF TENDER I BIDDING DOCUMENTS:

3.2.1. Tenderer may purchase the tender document by paying the requisite fee as stipulated in the NIT.

Alternatively, the tenderer may download tender document from the company‘s website:

www.laedcl.gov.in and pay the above requisite fee by way of a demand draft separately along with

earnest money. Tenderer shall be responsible for any error etc., on the downloaded tender

document.

3.2.2. The General Conditions of Supply & Erection of Assam Power Distribution Company Limited will

be treated as a part of the NIT. The Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined the

aforesaid general conditions of supply & erection besides all specifications.

3.2.3. The tender should be complete in all respects so as to eliminate further correspondences and

clarifications. A tender which is not complete in all respects, will be liable for rejection. However the

Purchaser, in its discretion, may seek clarification from the tenderer where necessary .The

discretion of the Purchaser in this regard shall be final.


of 282

3.3. LANGUAGE AND SIGNING OF TENDER:

3.3.1. The tender, and all correspondence and documents related to the tender, exchanged between the

Tenderer and the Purchaser shall be written in English. Supporting documents and printed

literature furnished by the tenderer shall also be in English.

3.3.2. Tender shall be written in ink or typed. No tender filled in pencil or otherwise shall be considered.

The tender shall be signed by a responsible and authorized person and the designation and

authority of the signatory shall be stated in the tender. All corrections in the proposal will have to

be signed with date and seal of the tenderer. Such correction even though signed, may make the

tender liable for rejection.

3.3.3. Any printed document promoting sales may not be accepted by the Purchaser.

3.4. DOCUMENTS COMPRISING TECHNO-COMMERCIAL BID:

The particulars and supporting documents required in respect of the techno- commercial bid

should be strictly as per following sub-clauses (clauses 3.4.1 to 3.4.10). In case, any of the details

are either not furnished or inadequately furnished, the entire tender may be rejected without

informing the tenderer.

A techno-commercial bid may have to be submitted under separate sealed cover if so stipulated in

the NIT. The price bid may not at all be opened for examination in case the techno-commercial bid,

which shall be opened first is not found substantially responsive.

3.4.1. EARNEST MONEY OR BID SECURITY:

(a) Every tender must be accompanied with Earnest Money of value as stipulated in the NIT. Mode of

depositing the earnest money shall be clearly indicated in the NIT. Earnest money or Bid security

may be furnished in the shape of Bank Call Deposit/ Bank Draft as may be prescribed in the NIT.

Without this, the tender may be deemed to be incomplete and liable for rejection. The earnest

money shall be pledged in favour of the Officer as indicated in the NIT.

(b) In case of unsuccessful tenderer, earnest money will be released on request from the tenderer on

a date subsequent to contract agreement with the successful tenderer.

(c) In case of successful tenderer, the earnest money will be retained until submission of the

performance security deposit referred to in clause 9.0.

(d) No interests shall be payable on such deposit

(e) The Purchaser/ Employer reserve the right to forfeit the earnest money or part thereof, in

circumstances which according to him indicate that the tenderer is not earnest in accepting/

executing any order placed under specification.

3.4.2. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The GTP (Guaranteed Technical Particulars) of the materials offered along with their complete

technical description supported by drawings shall be furnished by the tenderer. Relevant

specifications like IS/ BS/ IEC etc. will be mentioned.

3.4.3. TEST REPORTS:

(a) A list showing various type tests and routine tests as required under the relevant specifications

shall be furnished by the tenderer and all such tests shall be carried out on the materials and the

components offered for supply in the event of award of contract. Against each such test, the results

of test performance shall be mentioned along with the name of laboratories/ testing houses, where

tests were


of 282

so conducted. In support of the results whether type tests or factory tests, certified copies of the

test certificates shall be furnished. In case any of the prescribed tests has not been carried out, the

same shall be clearly mentioned in this list stating the reasons for not carrying out the test. The

tenderer also shall furnish a separate list of tests which they have carried out on their products for

ensuring their better quality, but are not stipulated explicitly, in the relevant ISS or BSS

specifications. Type test reports to be acceptable, the tests have to be carried out at an NABL

accredited laboratory. Reports of Type test conducted in laboratories other than the above will be

acceptable only if witnessed by an officer from a power utility.

(b) Type test reports of equipment of higher capacity or voltage class than those specified shall be

acceptable for the purpose of bidding. However, in that case, the successful tenderer shall conduct

type tests on the offered equipment free of charge.

(c) Type test reports, conducted 5 years prior to the date of opening of tender, in general, will not be

accepted.

3.4.4. SPARE PARTS:

Each tenderer shall indicate the expected life in use of their products. A list of spares which may

be necessary for replacement during the maintenance of the equipment in service shall be

furnished indicating if these are of proprietary nature or of standard make available in the market.

In case these spares are of proprietary nature, their prices and the likely quantities that may be

necessary during the useful life of the equipment shall also be mentioned.

3.4.5. BIS. CERTIFICATION:

The tenderer shall state clearly if the particular product offered by him is covered by any IS

certification mark and if so, the tenderer will furnish the particulars of the IS Specification, the year

of obtaining the certification and a copy of the certification.

3.4.6. PAST EXPERIENCE:

A Complete list of supplies/ works/ services in respect of the particular supplies / works / services

offered to various parties during the period of last 5 (five) years along with total value of supplies

shall be furnished. A separate list of supplies/ works/ services not exactly same as the one offered

but similar to it, supplied during the last five years shall also be furnished.

The tenderer shall state clearly if they had supplied similar material including the offered product,

to Assam Power Distribution Company Limited/ ASEB in the past. If so, reference of the purchase

orders, the ordering authority and the consignees shall also be furnished.

3.4.7. SOURCES OF SUPPLIES:

3.4.7.1. The tenderer shall clearly state the names of the manufacturer, the brand name of the product and

the place/ places of its manufacture. In case, the components of the product are obtained from

ancillary manufacturers, the names and addresses of such manufacturers also shall be furnished.

It shall be mentioned clearly how the tenderer ensures quality control over such ancillary

components and if manufacturer of such components is covered by any IS/ BS/ IEC or any other

relevant specification.

3.4.7.2. The tenderer shall mention clearly whether he is a manufacturer, a sole selling agent or a

commission agent of the product.

3.4.7.3. When the tenderer is not a manufacturer, submission of manufacturer's authorization for supply of

the offered materials by the tenderer along with warranty pledged by the manufacturer is

compulsory.

3.4.7.4. Further, the manufacturing experience of the manufacturer in respect of the particular product or

similar product also shall be furnished, indicating chronological development of the industry or the

manufacturing unit.


of 282

3.4.7.5. The sources of receipt of the raw material whether indigenous or imported shall be clearly

mentioned against each type of such raw materials used. The methods by which quality control of

such raw materials being enforced shall be clearly described.

3.4.8. DELIVERY/ WORK SCHEDULE:

3.4.8.1. The delivery/ work schedule as stipulated in the NIT or. in the APDCL specification shall be binding

on the tenderers. In case the APDCL delivery/ work schedule is not acceptable to the tenderer,

then the tenderer may give their own delivery schedule stating clearly the reasons for deviations

whether statutory or otherwise.

In any case such schedules must satisfy the completion time specified. Acceptance of such

deviations in the delivery/ completion schedule is entirely optional to the Purchaser.

3.4.8.2. The commencement period and the quantity of each item to be supplied per month shall be

specifically mentioned.

3.4.8.3. Quantities offered ex-stock as well as with earlier delivery schedule shall be mentioned.

3.4.9. SAMPLES:

A sample shall be submitted along with the tender if asked for in the NIT and as per .its terms.

Non-submission or late submission of sample may disqualify the tender .

3.4.10. TAX CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES AND REGISTRATION:

3.4.10.1. The tender shall be accompanied with income tax and GST clearance certificates.

3.4.10.2. The Contractor must register for GST with the concerned department of Government of Assam

within a reasonable time after award of contract if not already registered.

3.5. PRICE BID

3.5.1. The particulars and supporting documents in respect of the price bid should be as follows:

3.5.2. The total FOR destination price of the product offered unit wise and quantity wise both in words

and in figures shall be clearly furnished. Such FOR destination price also shall be supported by a

breakup of the price indicating separately Ex-works price, station of dispatch, Freight and

Insurance Charges. The offer may be straightway rejected if the FOR destination price and its

break up against the components as aforesaid are not furnished. The FOR destination price will

be on door delivery basis and shall be inclusive of cost of unloading of materials at site.

3.5.3. The Ex-works price shall not include Sales Tax whether central or state and the same will be

indicated separately in words and in figures by the tenderer .

3.5.4. Excise duty on the finished product also shall be indicated separately if applicable. This should be

worked out both unit wise and quantity wise indicating the excise rates applicable.

3.5.5. Any other levy, entry tax, excise or otherwise on finished products and of statutory nature also

shall be indicated separately stating the reasons for claim of such levies.

3.5.6. For imported equipment:-

(a) The tenderer shall quote price for:-

i. FOB Port of shipment, inclusive of seaworthy packing.

ii. CIF Kolkata

iii. Indian Agent Commission, if any.

(b) When prices quoted are for delivery FOB port of shipment, the Contractor shall agree to arrange

for the shipment and insurance of the machinery from the port of shipment to Kolkata on behalf

and to the account of the Purchaser should the Purchaser so desires. The actual expenses

incurred by the Contractor for Sea freight and insurance will be paid by the Purchaser. The

Purchaser shall provide for all incidental and statutory charges beyond the port of shipment such

as customs duty clearance, loading and unloading, Railway freight and Octroi or terminal and other

taxes.


of 282

(c) Firm FOB port of shipment shall be quoted. An alternative price CIF Kolkata shall be quoted

separately. The customs duty applicable and the category (Import Trade Control Classification as

brought up to date) under which the ―applicant‘s plant is assessable‖ shall be stated. If firm FOB

price cannot be offered, price subject to contract price adjustment may be quoted, but a ceilings

limit must be stated. Any claim for contract price adjustment shall be supported by authentic

documents

which shall be to the satisfaction of the Purchaser. Preference will be given to the firm offering

FOB/ CIF price. The currency in which payments have to be affected shall be clearly mentioned in

the tender .

(d) The best delivery FOB port of shipment shall be clearly stated in the tender as it shall have a vital

bearing on the selection of the final successful tender.

(e) In either cases of goods supplied from within and outside India, the tenderer will quote separately

the freight and insurance for delivery of the goods at site.

3.5.7. Price quoted should be firm. If however a variable price is permitted as per provisions of the

NIT, the tenderer shall specifically stipulate the price variation formula by indicating the base price

and base date. Normally the price variation formula and indices as per IEEMA and CACMAI will be

accepted.

3.5.8. In case the tenderer quotes variable price as per any formula of his own/ other sources, the

tenderer will state clearly the reasons for quoting such variable price and submit the source of the

formula and indices. However, his offer may be rejected at the discretion of the Purchaser if the

Purchaser finds the quoted formula to be complex and it is difficult to compare the outcome with

other bids.

3.5.9. In any case, if price variation is allowed, it will be limited to a ceiling of 10% (ten percent) upward

only. However, there shall be no limit for downward price variation.

3.5.10. The rate quoted shall remain valid for a minimum period of 180 (one hundred eighty) days from the

date of opening of the tender. Any tender offering a shorter validity period than specified in the NIT

may be rejected outright. The price quoted shall remain FIRM during the period of validity and any

post revision of rate after opening of the tender will make it liable for rejection. The Purchaser,

however, reserves the right to negotiate with the tenderer or offer lowest/ reasonable rate to any/

all of the tenderers.

3.5.11. The tenderer shall explain clearly if there is any DGS & D rate contract available for the product

offered and if on the positive, copies of such rate contract shall invariably be furnished. For such

DGS & D prices, the tenderer.should state clearly the period of validity of the rate contract.

3.5.12. The tenderer shall mention clearly if any quantity discount or payment discount is offered.

3.5.13. The price bid shall be furnished clause wise and in the same order as above.

4.0 RIGHT TO REJECT:

4.1. The Purchaser reserves the right to reject any or all the tenders without assigning any reason

thereof and the Purchaser further reserves the right to split up the supply order in favour of more

than one contractor. The Purchaser also reserves the right to reject the lowest or any other price

without assigning any reason.

5.0 ACCEPTANCE OF THE ORDER / CONTRACT:

5.1. Acceptance of the order(s) in writing shall be conveyed by the supplier to the Purchaser/ Employer

within 10 (ten) days from the date of issue of the purchase order failing which, it will be presumed

that all the terms and conditions of the purchase order are acceptable by him in full.

5.2. Before finalization of the contract, if discussion with the successful tenderer is considered

necessary by the Engineer, the tenderer shall turn up for the same within 10 (ten) days from the

receipt of intimation by FAX / e-mail at no extra cost to the Purchaser.

5.3. Also, if it is for executing a separate agreement the successful tenderer will turn up for the same

within 10 (ten) days from the receipt of intimation at no extra cost to the Purchaser.


of 282

6.0 CONDITION OF CONTRACT: COMMERCIAL & GENERAL:

6.1. If so required by the Purchaser, a formal agreement with or without guarantee at the option of the

Purchaser shall be entered into between the Contractor and the Purchaser for the proper fulfilment

of contract.

6.2. Such contracts shall be drawn up in non-judicial stamp paper.

6.3. The expenses of completing and standing the agreement shall be paid by the Contractor and

Purchaser shall be furnished free of charge with an executed stamped counterpart of the

agreement along with ten copies thereof.

6.4. After the tender has been accepted by the Purchaser, all orders or instructions to the Contractor

shall except as wherein otherwise provided, be given by the Engineer on behalf of the Purchaser .

7.0 CONSTRUCTION OF CONTRACT:

7.1. The contract shall in all respects be constructed and operated as defined in the Indian Contract Act

1972 and any statutory modification thereof.

8.0 EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT:

8.1. The contract agreement to be executed at Guwahati (Assam) by the parties.

9.0 PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT:

9.1. The successful tenderer shall have to deposit through a Bank Guarantee from a nationalized or

scheduled Bank of RBI for an amount equivalent to 10% (ten percent) of the total value of the

order as performance security, immediately on acceptance of letter of intent/detailed orders (as the

case may be), duly pledged in favour of the Purchaser concerned and such security deposits shall

be valid up to 30(Thirty) days beyond the warranty period.

9.2. If the supplier fails or neglects to observe perform any of his obligations under the contract, the

Purchaser shall have the right to forfeit either in full or in part at his absolute discretion, the security

deposit furnished by the supplier.

9.3. No interest shall be payable on such deposits.

10.0 RETENTION MONEY:

10.1. In addition to above performance security deposit, 5% value of each progressive bill will be

retained by the Engineer/ Purchaser as ‗retention money‘. The amount will be held by the

Purchaser till the work under the contract is completed and the completion certificate is issued in

pursuance to clause 25.0.

10.2. If the supplier fails or neglects to observe and perform any of his obligations under the contract, the

Purchaser shall have the right to forfeit either in full or in part at his absolute discretion, the security

deposit furnished by the supplier.

10.3. No interest shall be payable on such deposits.

11.0 RAW MATERIALS:

11.1. Raw materials will be arranged by the suppliers from their own quota and the Purchaser does not

have any responsibility in this regard. If, however raw materials are obtainable against purchaser‘s

quota due to statutory compulsion, allotment orders in respect thereof will be issued by the

Purchaser. In case of raw materials for which supplier has own quota, no recommendation or

advice for release of raw materials shall be issued by the Purchaser. If issue of raw materials from

purchaser quota is desired by the tenderer, he must indicate the price of the same raw material

considered in the offer. In the event of actual cost of such supply by the Purchaser, being lower

than the price stipulated in the tender, the difference will be recovered from the tenderer.


of 282

11.2. Where imports are unavoidable, the items shall be imported by the supplier in good time against

his import license without affecting the delivery schedule.

12.0 WARRANTY :

12.1. Each tender shall stipulate a warranty clause of products offered covering a minimum period for

rectification/free replacement thereof. The term ―period of warranty‖ shall mean the period of 12

(Twelve) months from the date of commissioning and successful operation of the equipment. In

any case, this period shall not be less than 18 months from the date the materials are received in

the purchaser‘s store in good and acceptable conditions. During the period of warranty, the

Contractor shall rectify all defects in design, materials and workmanship that may develop under

normal use of the equipment upon written notice from the Engineer who shall indicate in what

respects the equipment is faulty .This rectification/ free replacement must be carried i out within a

reasonable period as determined and directed by the Engineer. The cost of rectification/ free

replacement will be to the Contractor‘s account.

12.2. If the Contractor fails to rectify the defects within the reasonable time, the Purchaser/ Employer

may fix a date by which the Contractor would rectify the defects, failing which the Engineer may

(a) Carry out remedial works himself or through by others, in a reasonable manner and at the

contractor‘s risk and cost. The costs incurred by the Purchaser/ Employer in remedying the defect

shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Purchaser/ Employer;

(b) Determine and certify a reasonable reduction in the contract price; or

(c) May terminate the contract in respect of such parts of the works and the Engineer shall be entitled

to recover all sums paid for such parts of the work.

13.0 DETAILS OF AUXILIARIES / MATERIALS:

13.1. Within a reasonable time from the date of acceptance of notification of award of contract, the

Contractor shall provide the Purchaser with details of all the auxiliaries/ materials being supplied

and also of others, not forming part of the Contractor‘s supply but essential for the safe and

satisfactory working of the equipment/ system.

The Contractor shall send for approval on or before the date indicated by the Engineer, outline

drawings of all equipment/ materials to be furnished under the contract, together with weights and

sufficient overall dimensions to enable the design of the foundations, structures and associated

equipment to be prepared and also for transportation purpose.

14.0 CONTRACTOR.S DRAWINGS:

14.1. All working drawings shall preferably be prepared in AutoCAD 2000 software or its later version.

The Contractor shall also submit the soft copies of all working drawings.

14.2. Within 30 days from the date of acceptance of notification of award of contract, the Contractor shall

send to the Purchaser a preliminary list of all the drawings with their respective identification

numbers, titles and expected date of submission.

This list shall be amended or extended by the Contractor as and when necessary during the

progress of the work under the contract.

14.3. All titles, notes and inscriptions on the drawings shall be in English.

14.4. All drawings which the Contractor shall send to the Purchaser for approval shall be approved or

rejected or returned for modification within 15 days of receipt by the Purchaser. In case of

modification or rejection the Contractor shall submit the correct drawings within 15 days from

receipt of communication from the Purchaser.

Contractor shall be responsible for any delay in the contract processing and its award caused by

non conforming technical particulars furnished by the Contractor requiring query, confirmation etc.

14.5. Upon approval by the Engineer, the drawings shall become the contract drawings and thereafter,

the Contractor shall not depart from them in anyway whatsoever except with the written permission

of the Purchaser.


of 282

14.6. FINAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

In the final stages of the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser hard copies as well

as soft copies of complete set of built up drawings.

14.7. MISTAKES/ ERRORS IN DRAWINGS:

14.7.1. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for any change in the work due to any

discrepancies, errors, or omissions in the drawings or other particulars which have arisen due to

inaccurate information or particulars furnished by the Contractor, even though approved by the

Purchaser/Employer.

14.7.2. However, the Purchaser/ Employer shall be responsible for drawings and information supplied by

him. The Purchaser/ Employer shall compensate for any change in the work caused due to

inaccurate information supplied by him to the Contractor.

15.0 COPY RIGHT ETC.:

15.1. The Contractor shall indemnify the Purchaser against all claims, actions, suits and proceedings for

the infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, design or copyright protected either in the

country of origin or in India for the use of any equipment supplied by the Contractor but such

indemnity shall not cause any use of the equipment other than for the purposes indicated by or

reasonably to be inferred from the specification.

16.0 SUBLETTING CONTRACT:

16.1. The Contractor shall not, without the consent in writing of the Purchaser/ Employer assign or sublet

his contract, or any substantial part thereof, or interest therein or benefit or advantage whatsoever,

other than for raw materials or for minor details or for any part of the work of which the Sub-

contractors are named in the tender provided any such consent shall not relieve the Contractor

from any obligation, duty or responsibility under the contract.

17.0 PACKING & MARKING:

17.1. The contract shall include provisions for secured/ protective packing of equipment so as to avoid

damage in transit, and the Contractor shall be responsible for all loss or damage caused or

occasioned by a defect in the packing.

17.2. All bright metal parts shall be thoroughly protected from rust during transit.

17.3. All materials shall be packed in suitable strong cases or crates as per standard practice, unless

otherwise specified. Large equipment such as power transformers, circuit breakers etc. which are

not packed in cases, shall have all screwed holes plugged with wood and all machined faces shall

be properly protected. Each package should be suitably marked with APDCL marking as specified

in the purchase order.

18.0 VARIATION OF QUANTITY:

18.1. Purchaser/ Employer shall have the right to increase/ decrease the ordered quantity by 20% within

50 days of the period of completion of supply order and the same shall be supplied at the same

rates/ prices and terms and conditions stipulated in the order except in regard to delivery schedule,

which shall be mutually agreed upon in case of increase in the ordered quantity.


of 282

19.0 CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER MANUFACTURERS:

19.1. The Contractor shall agree to co-operate with the Purchaser‘s other contractors for associated

supplies and freely exchange with them such technical information as is necessary to obtain the

most efficient and economical design and to avoid unnecessary duplication. No remuneration shall

come from the Purchaser for such technical co-operation.

20.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

20.1. The Purchaser/ Employer and his duly authorized representative shall have at all reasonable time

access to the Contractor‘s premises or works and shall have the power to inspect and examine the

materials including raw materials used and the workmanship of the product during manufacture. If

a part of the goods is manufactured at other‘s premises or works the Contractor shall obtain for

purchaser‘s duly authorized representative, permission to similarly inspect at the other

premises/works.

21.0 INSPECTION AT SITE FOR ERECTION WORK:

21.1. A representative of the Purchaser shall have access to the Contractor/ Sub- Contractor‘s work at

site at any time and the Contractor/ Sub-Contractor or his authorized agent shall be present and

shall provide facilities for necessary inspection.

22.0 TESTS AT SITE FOR ERECTION WORK:

22.1. The Contractor after erection and commissioning of the equipment shall arrange testing to prove

correct workmanship as per specification. The Contractor shall give in writing the Purchaser‘s

representative thirty (30) days notice of the date the equipment would be ready for testing. The

Contractor shall bear all testing cost at site of work and shall become responsible for rectification of

defects found on testing within reasonable time as decided by the Engineer.

23.0 INSURANCE:

23.1. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified by the Purchaser, insure the materials through

their underwriter at their cost and shall keep it insured against any loss/ damage/ pilferage in

transit, destruction or damage by fire/ flood, exposure to vagaries of weather or through riot, civil

commotion, war or rebellion, for the full value of the materials until the materials are received at the

Purchaser‘s destination store.

23.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for safe arrival of the goods at destination, their unloading and

their receipt by the consignee. The Assam Power Distribution Company Limited will discharge

consignee‘s responsibilities only and shall not be responsible for any damage/ loss/ pilferage/ non-

delivery by the carriers.

23.3. In case of any loss / damage / pilferage / non-delivery / short delivery by carriers etc. the supplier

shall replace free of cost the missing / damaged / lost materials within 30 (thirty) days from the

receipt of report thereof from the consignee without waiting for settlement of their claims with their

carriers/ under-writers.

Normally such reports from the consignee to the supplier shall be initiated within a period of 30

(thirty) days from the date of receipt of each consignment by him.

23.4. If it is considered necessary that the damaged equipment either in part or in full be sent back to the

manufacturer‘s works for repair, the manufacturers/ suppliers will furnish the Bank Guarantee for

the full value of equipment needing repairs and such Bank Guarantee shall remain valid till such

time the equipment are repaired and returned to the consignee in good condition. The to and fro

freight, handling and insurance charges in such cases will be borne by the Contractor .

23.5. Unless otherwise mutually agreed upon, in case of failure by the supplier to replenish/ make good

of the loss/ damage/ short supplied quantities, within the stipulated period, the Purchaser reserves


of 282

the right to forfeit the security deposit and/ or adjust any outstanding payment to the Contractor

with APDCL or take any other appropriate action.

23.6. All materials will be dispatched against clear door delivery basis unless otherwise agreed by the

Purchaser .

24.0 TERMS OF PAYMENT:

24.1. The standard terms of payment of APDCL for supply of equipment/ materials are indicated below:-

(A) 100% payment would be admissible within three (3) weeks from the date of receipt of the

materials/ equipment at site in full and good condition less deduction of retention money and

advance applicable as per clause 10.0 and 24.2 and as per terms and conditions stipulated in the

purchase order

(B) However, in special case, the following terms of payment may be agreed to at the discretion of

Purchaser.

(1) Payment of 90% (ninety percent) of the consignment value on receipt of all dispatch and

other documents by the consignee through Bank.

(2) Balance 10% (ten percent) on-receipt of the equipment/ materials at site in full and in good

condition and as per terms & conditions stipulated in the Purchase order.

(3) Payment vide clause (B)(I) & (B)(2) would be made provided the Contractor submits to the

Purchaser/ Employer a bank guarantee equivalent to 90% of the consignment value, which

will be released after the consignment is received in full and good condition.

(4) Payments as per sub-para (A), (B)(I) & (B)(2) above will be made under the following

conditions:-

(a) Advance copies of bills in duplicate and other information such as challan packing list

etc. are furnished sufficiently in advance.

(b) Any demurrage charges on account of late intimation and/or delivery of documents by

the Bank is borne by the supplier.

(c) The supplier intimates the dispatch of each and every consignment to the Purchaser

and the Consignee.

(d) All Bank charges are borne by the supplier.

(5) Payment through Bank in respect of material/ equipment dispatched by road transport shall

be allowed if required, provided the transport agency is approved by the Banking Association

and prior approval thereof is given by the Engineer .

(C) TERMS OF PAYMENTS FOR ERECTION WORK:

Payment up to 100% of erection items will be made against progressive monthly bills within a

reasonable time from the date of submission of bills less deduction of retention money and

advance applicable as per clause 10.0 and 24.2 respectively.

24.2. ADVANCEPAYMENT:

10% of the contract value as interest free advance against a Bank Guarantee for a sum equivalent

may be permitted if specifically provided in the NIT. The advance amount will be gradually

adjusted/ amortized by suitable instalments from the progressive bills. Number of instalments will

be specified in the NIT.

25.0 TIME FOR COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION:

25.1. For the purpose of determining the completion time of supply and/or erection works, the date on

which the Contractor accept the purchase/ work order in pursuance to clause 5.0 shall be taken as

commencement date of the contract.

25.2. The Contractor shall attain Completion of the supply and/or works (or of a part where a separate

time for Completion of such part is specified in the NIT/ Contract), within the time stated in the NIT

/ Contract.

25.3. As soon as the works, in the opinion of the Contractor, are completed as per requirements of the

specification/ contract, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer in writing.


of 282

25.4. The Engineer shall, within fourteen (14) days after receipt of the Contractor‘s notice under Sub-

Clause 25.3 either issue a Completion Certificate in the form specified by the Engineer, stating that

the supply/ works thereof have reached Completion on the date of Contractor‘s notice under Sub-

Clause 25.3 or notify the Contractor in writing of any defects and/ or deficiencies.

25.5. If the Engineer notifies the Contractor of any defects and/ or deficiencies, the Contractor shall then

correct such defects and/ or deficiencies, and shall repeat the procedure described in Sub-Clause

25.3

25.6. If the Engineer is satisfied that the supplies/ works have reached completion, the Engineer shall,

within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor‘s repeat notice, issue a Completion Certificate

stating that the supplies/ works have reached Completion on the date of the Contractor‘s repeat

notice.

25.7. If the Engineer is not so satisfied, then he shall notify the Contractor in writing of any defects

and/or deficiencies within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor‘s repeat notice, and the

above procedure shall be repeated.

25.8. If the Engineer fails to issue the Completion Certificate and fails to inform the Contractor of any

defects and/ or deficiencies within fourteen (14) days after receipt of the Contractor‘s notice under

Sub-Clause 25.4 or within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor‘s repeat notice under Sub-

Clause 25.6 then the supplies / works shall be deemed to have reached completion on the date of

the Contractor‘s notice or repeat notice, as the case may be.

25.9. EXTENSION OF TIME FOR COMPLETION: Should progress be delayed because of delay in

approval of drawings or any cause beyond reasonable control of the Contractor, reasonable

extension of time may be granted on the application made by the Contractor in writing to the

Purchaser but without prejudice to other terms and conditions of the contract. It shall be the duty of

the Contractor to notify to the Purchaser the reason for delay which the Contractor considers to be

beyond his control. The decision of the Purchaser as to whether the delay was beyond the control

of the Contractor shall be final.

25.10. Price variation, if any, applicable as per purchase order shall not apply to any quantity not

delivered as per delivery schedule of the purchase order. If, however, the prices in respect of

delayed deliveries are found to have gone down, payment will be made at the reduced price or

penalty levied at the discretion of the Purchaser.

26.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGE FOR DELAY IN DELIVERY / COMPLETION OF WORKS AND

PENALTY:

26.1. The date of delivery/ completion of work shall be deemed to be the essence of the contract and

shall be completed not later than the date specified in the purchase order/ contract. In case of

failure to deliver the materials/ equipment in full or to complete the delivery within the stipulated

delivery period or delay in the erection work beyond completion schedule, the Purchaser/

Employer shall be entitled to: -

(1) Recover an amount at the rate of 1% (one percent) of the Contract Price per week or part thereof

of delay, subject to maximum of 10% (ten percent) of the contract price as liquidated damage to

APDCL. However, the payment of liquidated damages shall not in any way relieve the Contractor

from any of its obligations to complete the works or from any other obligations and liabilities of the

Contractor under the Contract.

(2) Purchase the undelivered material/ equipment from elsewhere or to complete the balance work

giving notice to the supplier and to recover any extra expenditure incurred thereby for having to

purchase these materials or complete the work at a higher price, at the risk and responsibility of

the Contractor.

(3) Cancel the contract wholly or in part and to purchase materials/ equipment at the full risk and cost

of the supplier and forfeit the security deposit.


of 282

27.0 CONTRACTUAL FAILURE:

27.1. In the event of contractual failure of any respect on the part of the supplier, the Purchaser shall be

entitled to forfeit the security deposit or any deposit or any payment due to Supplier from this or his

other contracts towards the recovery of Purchaser‘s claim for damages arising out of the failure. In

addition, APDCL may black-list or ban the Contractor or pending enquiry, suspend him or take any

other steps considered suitable.

28.0 REJECTION:

28.1. In the event, any of the Equipment supplied by the Contractor is found defective in materials or

workmanship or otherwise not in conformity with the requirements of the contract specifications,

the Purchaser shall either reject the equipment or request the Contractor in writing to rectify the

same. The Contractor, on receipt of such notification shall either rectify or replace the defective

equipment free of cost to the Purchaser. If the Contractor fails to do so, the Purchaser may at his

option:

(a) Replace or rectify such defective equipment and recover the extra cost so involved from the

Contractor plus 15% fifteen percent thereof, or

(b) Terminate the contract for default, or

(c) Acquire the defective equipment at a reduced price as considered equitable under the

circumstances. The provision of this article shall not prejudice the Purchaser‘s right under clause

26.0

29.0 DEDUCTION FROM CONTRACT PRICE:

29.1. All cost, damages or expenses which the Purchaser may have made for which, under the contract,

the Contractor is liable, may be deducted by the Purchaser from any money due or becoming due

by him to the Contractor or may be recovered by action at law or otherwise from the Contractor.

29.2. In the event of recovery to the necessary extent becoming impossible owing to insufficiency of the

earnest money/ security deposit and withheld amounts, the balance due to the Purchaser may at

the option of the Purchaser be recovered from any money due to the Contractor from LAEDCL

under other contracts with the Contractor.

30.0 FORCE MAJEURE:

30.1. Normally, force majeure shall cover only act of God, fire, war, riots and, act of Government etc.

Any constraints other than those specified above, will not constitute a force majeure condition. In

view of other constraints beyond the control of the supplier, primarily due to statutory compulsion,

extension of delivery time may also be considered on merit of individual case. In case of a force

majeure condition, the Contractor shall notify the Purchaser in writing such condition within 10 (ten)

days from the beginning of such delay for consideration and acceptance.

31.0 CHANGE OF NAME OF THE TENDERER:

31.1. At any stage after tendering, the Purchaser/ Employer shall deal with the Supplier/ Contractor only

in the name and the address under which he submitted the tender. All the liabilities/ responsibilities

for due execution of the contract shall be that of the Supplier/ Contractor. The Purchaser may

however, in his discretion deal with agents/ representatives/ distributors/ manufacturers/

associates/ principals/ sister concerns and such dealings shall not absolve the Supplier/ Contractor

from the responsibilities/ obligations/ liabilities to the Purchaser/ Employer under the contract.

31.2. Any change/ alteration of name/ constitution/ organization of supplier shall be duly notified to the

Purchaser/ Employer and the Purchaser/ Employer reserves the right to determine the contract, in

case of any such notification.


of 282

32.0 DEATH, BANKRUPTCY ETC.:

32.1. If the Contractor becomes bankrupt or being a corporation is in the process of winding up,

amalgamation or reorganization, the Purchaser shall be at liberty to:

(a) Terminate the contract forthwith by notice in writing to the Contractor or to the liquidator or

receiver or to any person in whom the contract may become vested.

(b) Give such liquidator, receiver or other person the option of carrying out the contract subject to his

providing a guarantee for the due and faithful performance of the contract up to an amount to be

determined by the Purchaser.

32.2. In case of death of the Contractor before completion of work and supply, the Engineer or

Purchaser shall be at liberty to:

(a) Close up the contract and take over the completed portion of work/ supply done and made as per

specification and make final payment to the legal heir of the Contractor on receipt of claim from

such legal heir .

(b) Give the contract to the legal heir of the Contractor subject to his depositing a performance

security for the due and faithful performance of the contract. The performance security amount

shall be determined by the Purchaser/ Engineer commensurate with the incomplete portion of the

work/ supply.

The Purchaser will enter into a fresh contract with the legal heir of the Contractor on the same

terms and conditions of the earlier contract.

33.0 ARBITRATION:

33.1. If at any time, any question, disputes or differences whatsoever shall rise between the Purchaser

and the Contractor, upon or in relation to or in connection with the contract, either party may

forthwith give notice to the other in writing of the existence of such question of dispute or difference

and the same shall be referred to the adjudication of three Arbitrators, one to be nominated by the

Purchaser the other by the Contractor and the third by the President of the International Chamber

of Commerce in the case of foreign contractors and in case of local contractors by the President of

the Institution of Engineers, India/ Retired or Sitting Judge not below the status of a retired Judge

of High Court of India. If either of the parties fail to appoint its arbitrators within 60 (sixty) days after

receipt of notice of the appointment of arbitrators then President of International Chamber of

Commerce or the President of the Institution of Engineers retired or sitting Judge of India, as the

case may be shall have the power at request of either of the parties, to appoint an Arbitrator. A

certified copy of the President of the ICC or IOE making such an appointment shall be furnished to

both parties

33.2. The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with Rules and procedures for Arbitration of the

International Chamber of Commerce (Paris) in the case of foreign contractors as per provisions of

the Arbitration Act 1940 or any statutory modification thereof and in case of local contractors, shall

be held at Guwahati or any other place as may be decided by the Managing Director, APDCL. The

decision of the majority of Arbitrators shall be final & binding upon the parties and the expenses of

the arbitration shall be paid as may be determined by the Arbitrator . However, any dispute arising

out of this contract will first be discussed and settled bilaterally between LAEDCL and the

Contractor.

34.0 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING CONSTRUCTIONS/ ERECTION:

34.1. The Contractor shall take reasonable and statutory precaution during execution of erection and

construction work so as to avoid accident and damage to equipment and injury to workman and to

prevent theft, pilferage etc.

35.0 LIABILITY FOR ACCIDENT AND DAMAGE:

35.1. The Contractor shall not claim for compensation arising out of any accident(s) or damages done

during the course of erection & commissioning work & the Contractor will be responsible for paying


of 282

compensation to the worker as per Workmen‘s Compensation Act, 1923 and subsequent

amendments thereof. It is further clarified that in case any payment is to be made by the

Contractor under the said Workmen Compensation Act, the same shall be paid forthwith and in

case of failure in making such payments the Purchaser shall make payment and the amount so

paid shall be deducted from the bills of the Contractor.

35.2. The Contractor shall adequately insure against liability to third party, in the joint names of the

Employer, the Contractor and the Sub-contractors for any loss, damage, death or bodily injury

which may occur to any physical property owned by others, the goods/ materials of the contract or

to any person which may arise out of the performance of the contract.

36.0 REGULATION OF LOCAL AUTHORITIES:

36.1. The Contractor shall abide by the regulation of local Authorities unless such regulation is

repugnant to any terms of the contract agreed upon.

36.2. All electrical contractors need to possess a valid ‗Electrical Contractor‘s License‘ from the

concerned Licensing Board, Government of Assam. A tenderer, who has a valid ‗Electrical

Contractor‘s License‘ from other states will also qualify for a bidding. However, in such cases the

tenderer will have to obtain the same or an endorsement to that extent, from the Licensing Board

of Government of Assam within a reasonable time from the date of award of contract.

36.3. The Contractor is required to fulfil all criteria related to Labour Laws.

36.4. The Contractor will also comply with all regulations/ directives of both State & Central Government

Pollution Boards.

37.0 SUSPENSION OF BUSINESS DEALINGS WITH FIRMS/ CONTRACTORS:

37.1. The Purchaser may suspend business dealings with a Firm/ Contractor, if:

(a) The Central Bureau of Investigation or any other investing agency recommends such a course in

respect of a case under investigation; and if a prima facie case is made out that the firm is guilty of

an offence involving unethical, unlawful, fraudulent means in relation to business dealings, which, if

established, would result in business dealings with it being banned.

(b) The Purchaser has past record of non-performance of the Firm in its previously awarded contracts.

(c) The Purchaser has record of ban against the Firm by other Government / Public sector utility

37.2. However, the Purchaser shall give the Firm/ Contractor a fair chance to explain the circumstances

of such previous suspensions.

38.0 BANNING OF BUSINESS DEALINGS WITH FIRMS/ CONTRACTORS:

38.1. The Purchaser may ban business dealings with a Firm/ Contractor, if:

(a) The owner (s) of the Firm/ Contractor is convicted by a court of law following prosecution for

offences involving unethical, unlawful, fraudulent means in relation to business dealings.

(b) There is strong justification that the Firm has been guilty of malpractices ―such as, bribery,

corruption, fraud, substitution of tenders, interpolation, mis-representation, evasion or habitual

default in payment of any Government tax" etc. .

(c) The Firm continuously refuses to return government dues without showing adequate cause and

government are reasonably satisfied that this is not due to reasonable dispute which would attract

proceeding in arbitration or court of law.

(d) The Firm is found guilty of involving in unethical practices, such as:

1. ―corrupt practice‖ involving offering, giving, receiving or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything

of value to influence the action of any such official/ party in procurement process or in contract

execution.

2. ―fraudulent practice‖ involving misrepresentation or omission of facts in order to influence a

procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the Employer.

3. ―collusive practice‖ involving a scheme among bidders (prior to or after bid submission) designed

to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the Employer of the

benefits of free and open competition.


of 282

4. ―coercive practice‖ involving harming or threatening to harm directly or indirectly, persons or their

property to influence procurement process or the execution of a contract.

38.2. The Purchaser may sanction a Firm/ Contractor or its successor, including declaring ineligible,

indefinitely or for a period of not less than 3 (three) years.

39.0 LEGAL JURISDICTION:

3.1 39.1. For any litigation arising out of the contract which cannot be resolved through mutual

agreement or through arbitration, the Guwahati High Court will have the sole jurisdiction.


of 282